Home

Topaz User Manual - Home Controls, Inc.

1. Style AS ign ment Case Ber Code Dale Format Mame Forn ets E Monal Lefi Justity Ho Change Mo Barcode C Mo Change f Mo Change C Bold C Right Justify C Upper Case C Code 3019 dd mr C LastName E Halic C Center C Lower Caca Code 128 Comm ccs C First Mame Underline Fo Mixed Case FC Code zoals C ypinmidd C Middle Mame First and hetiddle C Aip Name O eaha C dd mmm yyy Font Name To select a font place the mouse pointer over the down arrow on the left of the Font Name and click the left mouse button A pick list will appear Use the up and down arrows at the left of the pick list to scroll through the available fonts To select a font place the mouse arrow on to the selected font and click the left mouse button The pick list will disappear and the selected font name will show in the field next to the Font Name legend Outline The Outline command allows you to select the color and font for the text but in outline only with the background information visible through the text characters Alignment The Alignment command allows you to select whether the text will be Left Justified Right Justified or Centered inside the picked rectangle Case The Case command allows you to specify the typeface to be used for the selected Text or Database item The options are e No Change e Upper Case e Lower Case e Mixed Case Selecting No Change causes the data to be printed exactly as typed for a Text item or exa
2. ooooooooooooo 5 4 Video Switcher cada ana 8 51 Alarm Queue Active Alarm Window 1 30 Details Page 1 32 Alarm ROUINO uu aa 8 21 Alarm Video View recorded vide0 1 35 Anti Passback CONTO risa ais dera 4 11 Enabled for Site 7 17 Override 2 00 eh aw OS a be ek 3 8 Overview cal os ee ce ES D 1 RES ads ae 4 11 D 2 Reset Cardholders 4 12 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Security Area is controlled 7 11 SEUD 4 44 heed ee A D 1 Applications Engineering Email Address P 7 Assign Security Areas o oooooooooo 3 8 Auto Configuration o o ooo 1 4 Add System Components 1 4 FISTAIMEO iia Rd a aa 1 29 SEUD hos ee e Beis EEE a eae 8 57 Text Color onan 602 25k SR Oe aS 1 5 Auto Insert Notification 8 7 B Backup Restore Database Page 4 18 Badge PMNs out ce E rd a Oh a cca tee EE Be ee 3 14 Badge Design 0 000 c eee eeees 9 1 A bd mete aoe naaa 9 20 Editing Facilities 9 17 Entering Information 9 5 File Menu y end Shad eee Sed 9 21 Importing Photo 3 13 Link from Card Page 3 14 Open Design Module 9 3 Options Menu 0005 9 22 EROS eos oi osa e 9 12 Batch Add Cards o oooooooooo 3 24 Batch Delete Cards
3. o oooooo 4 6 ACUVO A mos is So be UB de 1 8 Relay Page iaa 8 54 Cookies 0 0 0 ces 1 8 Relay Status Page o ooooooooo 5 5 Settings for Microsoft Internet Explorer 1 8 Remote workstations 1 18 Setup REN Access GroupS osn ew edes cake ee anes 7 13 Ringer Equivalence Number P 6 Alarm Categories o oo o o 7 31 Repair Alarm Instructions 7 29 Alarm Database o o o oooo o 4 16 Alarm Options iii 7 28 Cardholder Database 4 16 Custom Fields yoga es te 7 19 REDOM seid es ada 6 1 Holidays ai tie aol ia ee 7 33 Access Event 4 est eid ees wea ae eta de 6 50 Operator Types 000005 1 4 Report Printer oooo 8 20 Operators sia aana 1 2 Reports Reader Events 1 27 O 6 56 Site Settings oooooooo 7 16 Cardholder Database 6 2 Time Schedules 1 7 EMPIOYOO ici eh ea 6 60 Variable Card Formats 7 23 Recall Events 6 34 Setup Button oooooomonooo 7 1 system Setup o oo ooooooooooo 6 5 Setup Reports Request to Exit REX 8 42 Access Events o oooooooo 6 26 Reset Anti Passback D 2 ACCESS GIOUDS 236525 sd a 6 18 Reset APB Page o oooooooooooo 4 11 Alain POT 24 ss ia 6 10 Restore Capabilities 6 32
4. Alwavs available Available from 12004M To 12 00 45 Priority 1 ET Driver Epson Stylus COLOR 440 ESC P 2 a New Driver Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster O Srat pining atten last gage is spooled e Stat pining immediately M Aod menatched documents e Eint spaaed documente hret M keep printed documents ha Enable advanced printing features Printing Defaults Print Processor Separator Page caca tn 5 Click the radio button to the left of Print directly to the printer to select it 6 Click OK button 7 Close the Printers window Setup is now complete and you can now select the events printer in the Event Printer field on the Workstation Page Report Printer If you want to print reports a Report Printer must be selected The drop down list will show all configured printers listed that have been added to the workstation The default is None Select a printer by clicking on it If there are no printers listed to choose from you need to set the properties of a printer available to this workstation lt can be either a local printer connected directly to the workstation or a network printer You cannot select the same printer for both Event Printer and Report Printer You must use two different printers If you want to set a printer to spool reports 1 Click on the Windows Start button 2 Click on Settings 8 20 460932001 GE Security Wo
5. e User Field 5 8 can contain a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters e User Field 9 11 can contain a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters The titles or names for these fields are optional and can be configured by you on the Custom Fields Page on page 7 19 Clicking on the ls Link Button to the left of the first field name on the screen above will open a new window allowing you to configure the field names After making changes click on the Save Save button to close the window You will return to the Custom Fields page to continue entering cardholder information In the Cardholder Custom Fields window add any additional information for the currently selected cardholder to all the desired fields and click the Sae O Save button at the bottom left side of the window to save the information to the system 3 22 460932001 GE Security Custom Fields Page At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data GE Security February 2 2005 3 23 TOPAZ Software User Guide Batch Add Page The Batch Add Page allows you to add a maximum of 250 cards at one time All of the cards being added must be configured for the same Deactivation Date Company Facility Code list of Security Areas and or Groups and Time Schedules assigned to the area
6. 7 19 Custom Fields Page 7 19 Custom Map Icons 10 39 Customer Service Email Address P 7 D Database GE Security February 2 2005 BACKUP ea a da a A eN i 4 18 Diagnostic vita ad a 4 16 dmsi dms2 2 oo o 4 17 FRESLOMGY pap dais e edo detal o ti 4 19 Database Repair o o o ooooooo o 4 16 Database Report Options 6 2 Date Format sue eee pr ae wee a 7 18 Deactivate Card Invalid PIN Guridi ea 7 17 Lost Terminated 3 3 Deactivation Date 3 7 De energize RelayS ooo 4 7 Define Elevator Floor 8 34 Design Badger barr ee gene hee ok bw dee a at 3 14 9 1 ColorGraphic Map 10 18 Detail Button Alarm 1 35 Detailed Access Event Window 1 34 Detailed Alarm Event Window 1 32 Detailed Event Window 2 1 Device Tree uta tard ia 8 60 Dial up Field Panel Page 8 27 Software Setup o ooooooo o 8 29 to Report Alarms Options 8 52 Disconnect Dial Up Field Panel 4 14 Display Badge o o o ooooo 3 12 Display Employee Number 7 17 OMS WOMSZ i cido ad 4 17 Door Control Lock Unlock 4 3 Door Unlock Time 8 40 DotNET Framework 1 15 Download Field Pane
7. Attempted to reference district number of a task but it was not defined Can mean a printer is not defined Attempted to modify or delete a port that does not exist Example The system attempts to send a message to the Dual System Controller if the Redundant System program is enabled Attempted to define a port that already exists Error opening port Out of Anti Passback Indexes Use the Employee Database Diagnostic program to rebuild Anti Passback index Out of range APB index Use the Employee Database Diagnostic program to rebuild Anti Passback index Software Sentinel not found TOPAZ requires a software sentinel to run Please contact an InfoGraphic System s Representative Unknown Redundant System restore command Unknown Redundant System poll command Time out for restore response The district attempted to log onto the File server but the District is already on line An unknown district attempt to log onto the File server The district workstation is disconnected TOO MUCH DATA HUH February 2 2005 A 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1392 1393 1394 1395 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 A 14 BAD LOGIN Check the Date and Time on both Fileserver and workstation computers BAD DISTRICT NUM BAD MEM ID BAD POOL ID BFR end written over Bogus free bfr check BADALMCMD
8. GE Security February 2 2005 1 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide The following is an example of what an Auto Configuration screen might look like Expand All Compress All Alarm 1 1 8 JAlarm 1 1 9 f Select All Clear All Not Found Gaslite Extension Editorial Extension office 61 Gaslite Elevator Main Building Elevator Contro ELEVATOR 1 JACU 3 LO BATT JACU 3 TAMPER JACU 3 POWER ELEVATOR 1 DC ELEVATOR 1 REX ELEVATOR 1 FO le AA HO Select All O E Eo Clear All A 1 IgE Default Device Names After Auto Configuration has been completed the devices will have numeric names for example Reader 2 1 3 is Host Port two 2 Field Panel address one 1 Reader number three 3 You may want to rename the devices with your own descriptive names For more detailed information see the chart below Reader Type COM ACU Polling Alarm Alarm Type E MAS a E N Reader RDR 1 RDR1 0 0 0 a Alarm RDR 1 0 0 Mo M8 a Forced A Alarm Alarm 1 0 0 Alarm oe EE A Remote Type Device Module Port Address Alarm Type Panel Alarms ACU 1 TAMPER RA TAMPER Input Module Module RIM 1 1 7 RIM 1 1 7 OL OL Scone Local RRM 1 1 5 ace OL Hee cae Module For more details on Auto Configuration see Auto Configuration Setup Page on page 8 57 1 6 460932001 GE Security System Requirements NOTE Aside from auto configuring your system and specifically for day to da
9. lt Back Cancel 13 Select accept the terms in the license agreement and the Next button will become GE Security February 2 2005 8 15 TOPAZ Software User Guide available Click Next gt to continue 2 Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Al program Features will be installed Requires the most disk space Choose which program Features you want installed and where they Will be installed Recommended for advanced Users Installshield lt Back cancel 14 Select Complete then Click Next gt to continue e Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation TF vou want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard IMPORTANT Please remove all USB SuperPro keys before continuing Installshield E Cancel 15 Remove USB sentinel keys before continuing then Click Install A screen with a progress bar 8 16 460932001 GE Security Workstation will display while the Sentinel Driver files are installed 2 Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard E xj InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successf
10. 28 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Adding Relays to Map ES In the Device Tree locate the relay to add Place the mouse pointer on the mA relay icon click and hold the left mouse button Drag the icon onto the map and release the mouse button When you release the mouse button it will default to 2 a deactivated relay icon NOTE When placing a new relay point on the map the icon will default to a deacti vated relay mode type even if the point is activated When the color graphics is back online it will check for the current status of the relay point and change the icon accordingly Default DefaultRelayleons Icons E Deactivated Relay is deactivated E Activated Relay is activated If additional custom icons groups have been created for doors after dragging the relay icon on to the map and releasing the mouse button the Icon Groups window will be displayed Select the icon group you want to use for the relay icon you placed on the map by clicking on the icon group name After you have clicked on the name of a icon group the two icons configured for the group will appear in the blocks below each of the point designations To move the icon to a different location on the map click and hold the left mouse button on the icon and drag the icon to a new location on the map NOTE The relay icon on the map will be grayed out when the panel is offline not communicating with the server When com
11. Alarm Categories Page The Alarm Categories page allows you to group alarm events by name The System comes with 16 generic alarm categories The alarm categories appear in event reports and classify alarm events You can change any alarm category designation defaults are shown below to a description that is better suited to your facility or application It is helpful to group alarms points into categories like Intrusion Alarm or Maintenance Alarm so they can be recalled from history by that group etc To navigate the Alarm Categories page from any setup page click the Alarm Opt tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Alarm Options button on the right side of the page Then click the Categories tab button and the following page will display EE ocne oo o MEN User Category 3 EA been ooo UserCategory4 E fForced Open pt EN pea open i ME System Tamper Jser Category 7 6 f Device Offline Petes User Category 8 Ml i Access Denied Alarm User Category 9 User Category 10 The system default categories are 1 Door Contact 9 User Category 3 2 System Input 10 User Category 4 3 Forced Open 11 User Category 5 4 Held Open 12 User Category 6 5 System Tamper 13 User Category 7 6 Device Offline 14 User Category 8 7 User Category 1 15 User Category 9 8 User Category 2 16 User Category 10 GE Security February 2 2005 7 31 TOPAZ Software User Guide
12. Control of Readers Control System Functions Define Alarm Points Define Field Panels Add Operator Type Start by clicking the Clear button Operator Type Name Enter the Operator Type Name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters Operator Types This is a list of Operator Types that has already been configured To select a configured operator type from the list scroll through the list to locate the operator type you wish to use Click on the Operator Type Name to select The list of Restricted functions for the operator type selected will appear You may modify the list and save it as a new operator type by typing a new Operator Type Name in to the filed and click the save button See below for detailed information on how to modify and save the list 7 4 460932001 GE Security Operator Type Inactivity Timer The Inactivity Time tracks keyboard activity in order to log off the operator When an operator logs on to the system the timer if set to a time rather than NONE begins counting Each time the operator uses the keyboard or mouse the timer resets If the timer counts up to the time set in the Inactivity Timer field the current operator is logged off the system The Inactivity Timer is selectable for each Operator Type independently The default is None Allowed The Allowed field is the list of all 47 functions that can be assigned to the Operator Type when the Save button is clicked For a new Operator
13. EVENT 831 NEW system Input ALARM ALARM POINT BACE DOGR REXZ EVENT 633 NEW system Input ALARM ALARM POINT LOBEY DOGR REXZ GE Security RECALL ALARM EVENTS ALARM REPORT 2004 02 17 SECURITY AREL SYSTEM ALARM REPORT 2004 02 17 SECURITY AREL SYSTEM ALARM REPORT 2004 02 17 SECURITY AREA SYSTEM ALARM REPORT 2004 02 17 SECURITY AREA SYSTEM February 2 2005 Tue Tue Tue Tue Ti Tl Tl Tl aa DODO1 A DODOo1 azr DOOO1L aai26 DOOO1L Ob 2069 017 2021 TOPAZ Software User Guide Alarm History Reports Page The Alarm History Report recalls summarized history reports of alarms and troubles that have occurred during a specified period of time by alarm point or security area The report will calculate the following for any alarm in the report e Frequency The number of times the alarm occurred in the time period selected e Total Duration The length of time the alarm point was in alarm for each occurrence and then the sum total of all those occurrences e Longest Duration The longest time for any single occurrence when the point was in an alarm condition To navigate to Alarm History Reports click the Reports button located in the left browser window or the corresponding button Then click the Alarm Hist tab button at the top of the browser The following page will display Alarm History Log File Disk Drive lc Display Report g i Print Report n Fer
14. JACCOUNTING REX E ACCOUNTING Input Number Address a 1 JACCOUNTING RT 73 JACU 1 LOW BATT 3 ACU 1 POWER E Alarm Category Forced Open MN JACU 1 TAMPER x i o o ae E accounting Office Alarm Workstation ritchb Alarm Can be Masked M plain Door No ACK Workstation ritchb 8 j Alarm Reporting Delay fo z l M 7 Description You can then make any modifications or deletions After making changes click the Save Add button at the bottom of the Alarm Point Setup page to close it and return to the Device Tree The device tree will automatically be updated with the changes you made When you navigate to another page the Device Tree will remain in the view you left it NOTES e You cannot use the Auto Configuration or standalone Device Tree to add new devices You must add them by using the hardware page for the device you wish to add e At any time while on any other page of the TOPAZ system you can click on the Device Tre lt Device Tree button located in the main tool bar on the left side of the screen to access the standalone device tree page GE Security February 2 2005 8 61 TOPAZ Software User Guide Device Tree If you just click on the Di vice Tre the device tree Expand All Compress All To run Auto Configure you must click the Hardware button on the main tool bar on the left and then click the Auto Configurations button The device tree is also displayed on the Auto Configur
15. K oo Select Cardholder Available Security Areas aa Selected Security Areas a INE ISE zzi m PY Available Security Areas Aberdeen Schuyler J ACCOUNTING Barker Eileen Barron Devyn R George Jeremy A Selected Access Groups N Nowhere Everywhere Executive Officers Financial Officers Authorized for Conditional Unlock B Record Last Changed AA Save Activation Date This is the date the card becomes active with a default of today s date as retrieved from the server This is not necessarily the same as the date the card was entered into the TOPAZ system For example you can enter a batch of cards that will become effective next week The format of the date may be selected in Setup Site Settings A full calendar can be displayed and used for selecting this date by clicking on the 223 Calendar button Deactivation Date This is the date the card is no longer authorized for use and access will be denied The default is 20 years from the Activation date A full calendar can be displayed and used for selecting this date by clicking on the Calendar button GE Security February 2 2005 3 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide Executive APB Override This field will only apply if Anti Passback is first enabled under Setup Site Settings You can do this immediately by selecting the 6 Link Arrow button to the left side of Executive APB Override to go directly to the Site Settin
16. Not shown Locked Green Offline Magenta 4 2 460932001 GE Security Reader Control Page Control To send a command to a Reader first select one of the pre defined readers in the bottom portion of the window in the list under Reader Control Scroll through the list and click on the name of the Reader to send the command to Click on the desired command button located below the Reader list The possible commands that may be sent are listed below e System Control Places the Reader back to the mode that the door is set for at the current time as predetermined by the system s configuration Lock door Locks the Reader controlled door The door will remain locked until another command is sent either by the operator time schedule or linked condition etc to change the door to another state It will not respond to an authorized cardholder e Unlock Door Unlocks the door The door will remain unlocked until another command is sent either by the operator time schedule etc to change the door to another state e Momentary Unlock Unlocks the door The door will remain unlocked for the configured unlock time At the end of the unlock time the door will return to its prior state After clicking one of the above a message Operation Complete will display Click OK to continue If the ACU controller is not communicating with the PC then the message Device Offline will display Click OK to continue The color of the reader name
17. Save Add Delete i Add Operators 1 Start by clicking the Clear button 2 Operator Name Enter the Operator Name name or nickname of up to 8 alphanumeric characters The name is not case sensitive You may not duplicate an Operator Name 3 Password Enter the operator s Password of up to 6 alphanumeric characters In place of the charters typed for the password will be displayed 4 Operator Type Select an Operator Type to assign to the Operator Name and Password by clicking on the Type Name from the drop down list of operator types NOTE If you need to setup an Operator Type click on the c link arrow This will open an additional window with the Operator Type page to allow you to setup additional types When setup has been completed close the window by click ing the Save button and continue working in Operator Setup page 2 460932001 GE Security Operators Setup 5 Show QuickStart at Login Click to place a W check mark in the field to show the Quick Start QuickStart screens when this operator logs onto the TOPAZ system 6 Once all the entries have been made to the Operators Setup page click the Save Save button 7 A message Operation Complete will display NOTE At anytime the Clear button can be clicked to reset all fields back to factory defaults Modify Operators 1 Under System Operators click on and highlight the name of the operator that you wish to modify 2 Next make any
18. You can make any changes desired to the category names and click the Sae O Save button A message Operation Complete will display i Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete all category names 7 32 460932001 GE Security Holidays Holidays Page The Holidays page allows you to predefine up to 32 Holidays to be used with Time Schedules to authorize access control alarms and output relays Holidays are normally used to make the date assigned behave like another day off for example a Saturday or Sunday If no Holiday is assigned for a given date then the normal access rules apply for that date e Add New Holiday e Holiday Types e Modify Holiday e Delete Holiday To navigate the Holidays page from any Setup page click the Holidays tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Holidays button on the right side of the page The following page will display Description Lobor Day Holidays Date Holiday Type 1 Holiday T 2 December 27 2004 oliday ype 7 Save Add Delete Clear Adding a New Holiday 1 Start by clicking the Clear button to clear all the fields for data entry 2 Inthe Description field enter the name of the holiday up to 27 alphanumeric characters 3 Select the Date for the holiday by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the fields and clicking on the desired date A cale
19. Access was granted through a Card Reader set up for Elevator Control This access event code is only used by Local Elevator Control in the ACU 2 or dpC ACCESS AUTHORIZED DURESS ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED ACCESS DENIED Access was granted because this cardholder is under Duress Access on Duress is user configurable under the Site Configuration Menu ACCESS POINT NOT DEFINED Access was denied because the reader is not defined ACTIVE ALARMS A cardholder has presented a valid card and PIN to enter the area but entry was denied because the area alarms have not been Mask ANTI PASSBACK VIOLATION Access was denied because the cardholder has already used his card to enter the security area without an intervening exit from the security area AREA SECURED I E ALARMS ARE UNMASKED Access was denied because the Security Area going into is Secured Alarms are Unmask If you do not want this event enter No to Keypad Masking Allowed in the security Area configuration BAD CARD READ OR FORMAT Access was denied because the card reader did not get a good card read CARD EXPIRED Access was denied because the Deactivation Date in the Cardholder s Database has expired CARD INACTIVE A cardholder has presented a card requesting access to the area but acce
20. Before Alarm ga of Invalid PIN Attempts Disable y Before Card Deactivation rao Ja Le Ve Event Report Card Name With None Month Day Year g Encode Card Format None Day Month Year Skip Command Confirmations E Priority 1 is Highest Priority Alarm ME Grant Access on APB Violation Quick Start INSS General Information Grant Access on Duress The default is no selection meaning no access will be granted if the cardholder generates a Duress alarm with their PIN A cardholder uses the Duress feature by swiping his card which tells the system the card number and then enters his PIN number with five added to it For example if his PIN is 1234 his Duress PIN would be 1239 If you wish to allow access when the cardholder causes a Duress Alarm providing the cardholder would normally be authorized access to the area then click on the box next to the selection to place an X in it 7 16 460932001 GE Security Site Settings For more information on Duress see Duress on page G 2 Invalid PIN Attempts Before Alarm Set the number of times 1 through 9 a cardholder may enter the wrong PIN before the alarm ACCESS DENIED WRONG KEYPAD TOO MANY ATTEMPTS is generated The default for this field is 3 NOTE The system is set to generate an alarm every time a wrong PIN is entered If you do not want an alarm for each wrong PIN you will have to modify a differ ent alarm on the Reader Events page see
21. Each of the browser pages is an independent area A frame is a section of a browser page What happens in one frame may or may not affect the information in another The frames are different sizes If more information is available than can be displayed in the frame then scrollbars will appear at the right side or the bottom of the frame Scroll up and down or left to right with the bar s to display the additional information Navigation Bar Structure TOPAZ is a browser based system enabling you to use the mouse pointer to click on icon buttons to navigate through the system You can click on one of the buttons or on any of the main buttons on the left side of the navigation bar to access any of the main sections of the software GE Security February 2 2005 1 37 TOPAZ Software User Guide Tab Buttons At times additional pages may be made available by clicking on certain buttons in the main navigation bars The tab buttons are accessed from the navigation toolbar at the top of each page as shown below for Setup Time Sched a gl q p 4 Site Settings bl Custom Fld Y Facility A Variable Crd Y At times additional tab buttons will appear after clicking on one of the top level buttons in the navigation bar as shown below for Alarm Options to show Instructions and Categories _ ra o y y x a 4 Access Grp Site Settings Custom Fid Facility Code Variable Crd y Categories 4 The main navi
22. InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation TF vou want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard IMPORTANT Please remove all USB SuperPro keys before continuing Installshield 12 Remove all software sentinel keys from the USB port before continuing Click Install to continue GE Security February 2 2005 1 21 TOPAZ Software User Guide j Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the Following license agreement carefully Rainbow Technologies Inc License Agreement IMPORTANT Read this before using your copy of Rainbow s software This document is a legal agreement between you either an indridual or an entity and Rainbow Technologies Inc Use of the software indicates your acceptance of these terms As used in this License Agreement the term Software means the Rainbow software included on the media or hardware provided wath this License Agreement 1 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS The Software is a proprietary product of Y Ido not accept the terms in the license agreement taste x lt Back cancel 13 Select accept the terms in the license agreement and the Next button will become available Click Next gt to continue 2 Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 3
23. Max Connect Time Enter the maximum time in minutes that the panel may stay connected For example if the time is set for 15 then at the end of 15 minutes the panel will automatically disconnect or hang up The default is 60 minutes Max Disconnect Time Set the Maximum Disconnect Time for the ACU panel This ensures that the panel will be regularly updated If the server has not communicated with the field panel for the time set it will contact the ACU and send updates download history events etc The default is 1440 minutes or 24 hours Ignore Daylight Savings Select if daylight saving time is to be ignored Yes or No for this ACU only If the ACU panel being configured is located in an area that does not observe Daylight Saving Time then this field should be set to Yes Time Offset Hours The Time Offset is the difference in hours between the server clock time and the ACU clock time to enable you to adjust for time zone differences For example if the ACU is located in another part of the country where the time is 2 hours later the time offset would be 2 hours Comm Overdue Message From the drop down list select the message to be displayed anytime communication fails to the ACU These messages are from the list of Alarm Instructions configured under Setup Alarm Options Alarm Instructions For information on how to configure a message see Setup Alarm Options Instructions 8 28 460932001 GE Security
24. Reader Name From the drop down list of pre configured readers scroll through and select the reader to be recalled in the report by clicking on the Reader Name Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection 6 8 460932001 GE Security Reader Setup Report Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of r
25. Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should start Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon 6 50 460932001 GE Security Recall Access Events Report Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop Security Areas From the drop down list of pre configured areas select the Security Area for which all Access Events are to be recalled The default is all security areas If a single security area is selected the readers option will not be available Only one or all security areas can be recalled in a single report If more than one security area is desired additional reports must be run for each area Readers Select the Reader for which Access Events are to be recalled The default is all readers If a single reader is selected the security areas option will not be available Only one or all readers can be recalled in a single report If more than one reader is desired additional
26. The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue 6 62 460932001 GE Security Employee Reports Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the PARRA os Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Employee Printout If the report does not find any matches for the options that have been entered the screen will return the following message The following is part of an example of an Employee Report sorted by Employee Name with fields Card number Activation Date Status and Access Group 1 2004 02 17 Tue 14 00 34 Emergency Contacts PAGE 1 at CARDA ACCOUNTING EMEPRNAME EMERTELE RELATION 1 1234 5675 0000123456 2 John Aberdeen 555 1212 Father 1234 56758 0000564231 O David Lester 515 6543 Partner 1234 5675 D000064531l2 Recardo Bogata 555 6545 Hushand 1234 S567S O000654321 2 Linda Jackson 555 9665 Wife TOTAL RECORDS 4 GE Security February 2 2005 6 63 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentio
27. 1 0 0 eee eens 6 5 Field Panel Setup Report 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 6 6 Reader Setup Report ieda irra 0 a a ee eee eee eee eee 6 8 Alarm Point Setup REDON a s vtve eddie ode eee Eo Pere is A pe 6 10 Relay Setup Report sia Eee a ee AA ee ee ae BASES 6 12 Serial Port Setup Report 2466 ace eb eee rr ewe a bev oad ob wee w eee oe by 6 14 Security Area Setup Report 0 0 0 0 cee eens 6 16 Access Groups Setup Report nnana aa aaaea ee ee eee eee 6 18 Time Schedule Setup Report 2 0 0 0 eee tenes 6 20 Holiday Setup Report 4a seas eee re ees e e he os eed a da oe oe 6 22 Instruction Message Setup Report nananana aa 0 eee eee 6 24 Access Event Reporting Options Setup Report 0 0 0 0 cc ee 6 26 Elevator Control Setup Report 6 28 Operator Type Report we wo dira Morea oe ae ww erate eae be el ae SoBe a a Id 6 30 CapabilitiGS ReDOM lt 2 at Cosa ade She pie ae hee eed de eee 6 32 Recall Event Reports Page i443 wu oe eee i nee ele A he ba eda eee ee 6 34 Recall All Events Report o oo oococoono ete eee eee 6 35 Recall By Event Number Report 0 0 0 00 eee 6 37 Recall User Actions Report miii la Alca 6 40 T 2 460932001 GE Security Table of Contents Recall System Device Events Report 0 0 0 ccc eens Recall Other Events Report 0 0 0 ccc ee eee eens Recall Access Events Report 0 0 00 cc eee eens Recall Alarm Events
28. 13 13 Ti Ti 19 19 19 15 15 a2 Ja Ja 27 GE Security Recall By Event Number Report Recall By Event Number Report To navigate to the Recall by Event Number reports page from the Main Reports page click the Recall Events tab button at the top and or then click the Event tab button in the Recall Events pages The following page will display NOTE Recalling events by number is an extremely slow process Where possible recall events by time Recall Event Number Display Report Ol Print Report e Log File Disk Drive Ic gt Print Report Output To File Start Date February 11 2004 y ey E Output File Name O REEE AI MT WEEE Beginning Event Number Ending Event Number Cancel Report Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive Zip Jaz etc make sure the removable disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should s
29. 53 54 55 56 Sector not found The disk may be damaged unformatted or not compatible The printer is out of paper or not enough disk space to create a spool file The system cannot write to the specified drive The system cannot read from the specified drive A device attached to the system is not functioning The file is already being used by another process The process cannot access the file because the file is locked by another process The wrong diskette is in drive The program could not open the requested file The FCB limit was exceeded The system has detected an overflow in the sharing buffer The system cannot write to the write protected drive An unknown device was specified The device is not ready The device does not recognize the command Data Error If error occurred on the hard disk retry the command IF error occurs again the hard disk may have to be reformatted If error occurred on a diskette insert a formatted diskette and retry the command Invalid command length Seek Error The disk may be damaged unformatted or not compatible The specified disk or diskette cannot be accessed Format the disk Sector not found The disk may be damaged unformatted or not compatible The printer is out of paper The system cannot write to the specified drive The system cannot read from the specified drive The device is not ready The network request is not supported The remote computer is not available A
30. 7 Recall All Events You can click on a Page such as RecallAllEvents Recall All Events to go to the Recall All Events Help page as shown below Recall All Events Report This procedure recalls all logged events by time period To navigate to the report from any page within the Reports pages click the Recall Event tab button The following All Events page will display Other Ewnta Access Event Alarm Event Recall All Events Display 1 26 460932001 GE Security Navigating the Help Startup Log on 4 Navigating After the TOPAZ software has been properly installed double click the TOPAZ icon on the Windows desktop to startup the TOPAZ program After a brief initialization period the log on window shown below will appear in the center of your computer screen The Server Workstation Display Log on Window Following the System initialization the Workstation Log on Window fills the monitor lt lt NT o Version 145 Build 2065 To log on to TOPAZ place the mouse arrow in the box labeled Operator ID click and type your Operator ID Then move the mouse arrow to the box labeled Password Click and type your password NOTE If this is a new system you may use the default Operator ID of master with no password Neither the Operator ID nor the Password is case sensitive You may change the default password by following the procedures under the Operator section on page 7 2 GE Security Fe
31. 8 30 Facility Code o o oooo 7 21 Field Panel o oo ooooo o 8 23 HOIGAYS eet bb CdS EEE Ged 7 33 LAN Communication 8 4 Operator Type oooooooooo 7 4 Operators tudo daa 7 2 GE Security February 2 2005 photos to a Badge Design 9 12 Public Access Elevator 8 36 REAU cert dae 8 39 RIIV sidad do coda das 8 54 Security Area esoes i hoeattdwence sat 7 10 Serial POLE imac lao Re aan 8 2 Site Settings oooooooo 7 16 Text to a Badge Design 9 8 Wiegand Card Format 7 23 Workstation 8 6 Address EM ni P 7 FOS A wie Gra Oh dae ws eee ie P 7 Web Site ud ad P 7 Alarm ACKO BV ce aia adas 1 32 Categories Setup 7 31 Comments 00000 ee eens 1 32 Database Repair 4 16 Detail Information 1 32 History Report o o o o 6 56 Instruction Setup o ooo o 1 29 WIASKING sutba Reka ees Bee ate we i 8 49 A true dats zeae A dad E 8 49 Alarm Control Buttons 1 35 Alarm event Graps 24 622 Sis wee es ds 1 35 Alarm Event Details 1 35 Alarm Point Control Page o oooooooooo 4 4 Mask Unmask Control 4 5 Set Priority 0 0 02s 8 49 Setup Page riada er kei 8 47 Setup Report o o ooooooo o 6 10 AS ld tae 4 4 Status Page
32. ACU Building 546 Rm 2343 Research Lab amp Check Distribution Center After all the changes have been made to the Panel page you must click on the Save Add button to save the changes to the server s database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e lf Duplicate Record is displayed then the Panel Name has been repeated Enter a new name and try saving again e If Duplicate Polling Address is displayed then a field panel with the same polling address already exists Check to make sure the correct address for the panel was selected e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try saving again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data Modify Field Panel 1 To modify a Field Panel you must first select the panel to be modified Do this by clicking on the name of the Field Panel in the list to be modified in the Configured Panels window on the right side of the screen Wait for the panel s configuration information to be displayed in the main window and the Panel description to be displayed in the Description window below the Configured Panels window GE Security February 2 2005 8 25 TOPAZ Soft
33. BACK DOOR FO BACK DOOR HO BACK DOOR OL BACK DOOR REs BACK DODR AT CONFERENCE SMOKE DEMO RELAY O Adding Alarm Points to Map Configuring Color Graphics The red check mark indicates that the point has been added to a map In the Device Tree locate the alarm point to add Place the mouse pointer on the af alarm icon click and hold down the left mouse button Drag the icon on the map and release the mouse button When you release the mouse button after dragging the alarm icon onto the map it will open the Icon Group window Then you can assign the icon group that will be used for the point you placed on the map GE Security February 2 2005 10 25 Topaz Software User Guide From the Icon Group drop down list select the Icon Group you want for the point by scrolling through the list and clicking on the name on the group Alarm Icons E4 Alarm Icons Static Static Icon Groups Secure Masked Trouble so Cancel Cancel After you click on the name of a icon group the four icons configured for the group will appear in the blocks below each of the point designations Masked Trouble To move the icon to a different location on the map click and hold the left mouse button on the icon and drag the icon to a new location on the map NOTE When placing a new point on the map the icon will default to a green secure icon even if the point is an active alarm When the color graphics is back t
34. Contact Relationship 3 20 Custom Field Names 7 19 Custom Field Page 3 22 Database Diagnostic Repair 4 16 Database Report 6 2 Department o oo ooooooooo 3 20 Mide a a 3 12 Masking Privilege 3 18 Personal Information 3 20 Recall Search 3 4 Security Area Assignment 3 8 SUPErVISOF a das Blea eS 3 20 Time Schedule 3 9 Trace ACCESS 000 cee ees 4 8 Cards BUUONs i 3 i awe O 3 1 Clear Button oooooooooo 1 35 COIN Central Office Implemented Systems P 6 Color Graphics o ooooooo o 1 31 Acknowledging an Alarm 10 12 Adding Alarm Points 10 25 Adding Cameras 04 10 36 AGGINGQICONS nie 10 24 Adding Map Links 10 37 Adding Maps o ooo ooo 10 18 Adding Readers 10 28 Adding Relays 10 29 Alarm Icons 0000 eee eee 10 3 Alarm Point Masking 10 13 Camera lconS o ooooooooo 10 8 Color Coding Security Areas 10 31 GE Security Configuration Buttons 10 19 Configuration Mode 10 11 Custom Icon Groups 10 39 INTF QUCUION sata ais ae eras 10 1 Map Control Buttons 10 11 Map ICONS iaa 10 3 MaD ENKS a 400
35. Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop GE Security February 2 2005 6 43 TOPAZ Software User Guide Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Clic
36. This field works in conjunction with readers that are configured to Conditionally Unlock during a time schedule When this option is selected the door will not unlock until a designated cardholder accesses the area after the start of the unlock Time Schedule Example The lobby reader door is configured to conditionally unlock at 07 00 7am At 7am the door will allow cardholders to access the lobby but will remain locked to Non Cardholders until a cardholder that is Authorized for Conditional Unlock accesses the lobby reader When configuration of the Access Page is complete click the Sae O Save button to save the cardholder record After clicking the Save button one of the following messages will appear e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again GE Security February 2 2005 3 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide Photo ID Page Introduction to Photo Badging The Photo Badging facility is available as standard software in all versions of the GE Interlogix TOPAZ Series system The server or workstation configured as an enrollment station requires special hardware as described below The verification station which does not have the capability to take photos or print badges needs no special hardware for the display of photos or badges The GE Interlogix Photo Badging Software gives you a full Bad
37. When you press the Save button the window will close and you can continue working in Elevator Cab setups e f you configure a new field panel from the Reader Setup page you must save that new panel s data If you do not you will not be able to attach that reader to the eleva tor Starting Relay Number Select from the drop down list the first relay for that cab For a given cab the relays must be assigned in sequence and a single relay number cannot be used for more than one cab The relay numbers range from 0 to a maximum of 35 for a maximum of 36 relays per ACURT2 and from 0 to a maximum of 39 for a maximum of 40 relays per ACURT4 field panels For example if you have 3 elevator cabs serving the same 9 floors of a building you might assign relays 0 8 for cab 1 relays 9 17 for cab 2 and relays 18 26 for cab 3 NOTE The drop down list will contain only those relays that are appropriate for the selected ACURT2 or ACURT4 panels After all the changes have been made to the Cab setups page you must click on the Save Save button in order for the changes to be saved to the server PC s database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e lf Duplicate Record is displayed then the Elevator Cab Name has been repeated Enter a new name and try again e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again
38. all field names will be set to blank on this screen and on the cardholder screens The information pre viously added for those fields will still remain in the cardholder database Modify a Field 1 You modify an existing name by changing the text in the field up to 12 alphanumeric characters 2 Once the text in the fields appears as desired click the Sae O Save button to save any new field names A message Operation Complete will display 4 Any new names will now appear in the Cardholder page as new field names Caution A You may rename a field at anytime but the data already entered will not move with the field name For example if a field is named Address and you have entered address information into that field in the Cardholder page and then rename the field to License Number The address information will still reside under the same field now with the new name of License Number Delete Fields You cannot delete the custom field label name All you can do is change the names of those fields Any information entered on a cardholder screen for a given custom field is stored in that field permanently or until you erase the information on a cardholder screen 7 20 460932001 GE Security Facility Code Facility Code Page The Facility Code page allows you to enter as many as 16 Facility Company Codes for different sets of cards The Company Code and Facility Code are a set of numbers encoded into the access card tha
39. and Black and White These are explained in more detail later in this section on Badge Design GE Security February 2 2005 9 13 Topaz Software User Guide The other available attribute selection is Print If command This command operates when a condition is placed on a specified database item The Print If function is an extremely powerful tool in designing badges specific to individual cardholders and is explained in more detail earlier in this section Line The line drawing tool is a way to add simple lines to the badge design To add shapes see Triangle Rectangle Circle amp Ellipse Start drawing the line by placing the mouse arrow at the starting point on the badge Click and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse arrow to the ending point Release the mouse button A light gray line will appear on the badge with a black positioning box on each end The Line can be moved by placing the mouse over one of the positioning boxes and then click and hole the left mouse button Move the positioning box to the new ending point and release the mouse button To remove a line select the line by clicking on the line to reveal the positioning boxes Once the line is selected click on the Edit menu on the main tool bar and select Cut The line will disappear from the badge design Line Attributes With the line selected positioning boxes are visible click the right mouse button to open the attributes window The Color and Li
40. click on the check box The IKE reader will allow the authorized cardholder into the area but will not mask the alarms Door Strike Relay If you are using a relay other than the default selection for the door lock select a relay number for the door strike by clicking on a relay number in the drop down list The default selection for reader O uses relay 16 located on the ACU reader 1 uses relay 18 and so on For more information on relay addressing see Elevator Control on page 8 30 Allow One Minute Grace Select this option if you want the Door Held Open timer to extend for one additional minute after the normal Held Open time During this time the reader s LEDs and buzzer if equipped will signal a violation If the controlled door re closes before the minute expires the door Held Open Alarm cancels and is never sent to the Workstation GE Security February 2 2005 8 41 TOPAZ Software User Guide Lock Type There are two types of lock that are used in different situations depending on how the lock should respond to a power failure e Fail Safe Select if the electric lock installed requires power to keep the door locked If power were to fail the door would then automatically unlock e Fail Secure Select if power would be required to unlock the door In the normal condition with no power to the lock it would be locked In the event of a power failure the door would remain locked Unlock Door on REX Select this
41. or Motion Det so that the group can be recalled from history It is selected from a drop down list NOTE If you wish to configure an Alarm Category click on the 6 Link Arrow button to the left of Alarm Category field and the Alarm Category configuration page will drop down Configure the Alarm Category and click the Save button to return to the Alarm Setups page Alarm Instructions The Alarm Instruction field contains the name of one of the configured Instruction Messages It is selected from a drop down list NOTE If you wish to configure an Alarm Instruction click on the S Link Arrow but ton to the left of Alarm Instruction field and the Alarm Instruction configuration page will drop down Configure the Alarm Instruction and click the Save but ton to return to the Alarm Setups page Alarm Workstation The Alarm Workstation field links the alarm to a workstation where it will report for acknowledgement ad processing It is selected from a drop down list No Ack Workstation The No Ack Workstation field is used to route an active alarm if it is not acknowledged at its usual workstation Select the workstation from the drop down list of configured workstations If your system does not have a workstation assigned the default will be the server Active The Active field is used to indicate if the alarm point is active Place a check mark in the box indicating alarm point is connected and the system is to start monitoring the point
42. this color will be surrounded by a black square The color will also show in the large color frame to the left of the color adjusters To adjust the tint you can place the mouse pointer over the up or down arrow next to the tint number of the Red Green or Blue color adjuster and click the left mouse button to change the value of the selected tint The tint values may be set between 0 and 256 As the tint is adjusted the actual color will be shown in the large color frame at the left of the color adjusters and also in the selected palette color surrounded by the black box This particular color will then be saved as part of the standard color palette for future use You may select the thickness of the lines in the figure using the line width selector on the right of the Color and Lines section You may also select rounded comers and the ability to fill the figure with a color selected from the color palette GE Security February 2 2005 9 15 Topaz Software User Guide Alterations Chroma Cut Chroma Key Ghosting Black amp White and Allow Rescale These selections allow you to adjust the color attributes of the selected bitmap in the Photo and Bitmap Alterations section of the attributes screen as shown below gt Photo and Bitmap alterations l Chroma Key M Chroma Cut l Ghosting M Black and White W Allow Rescale Chroma Cut and Chroma Key These allow you to remove color from an image Chroma Cut removes the color from the i
43. 1 FIGID INGGX cria A P 8 Hexadecimal Number 8 24 FIS DALE catas it ss a 3 20 Holiday Setup Report o ooooooooooo 6 22 Holiday Types o o oooooocoooo 7 33 Ignore Daylight Savings 8 28 Image Adjustment Controls 3 12 Importing Photos BAGONG wasran as dads ae abe bowler ret a 3 13 Inactive Card iia ada a 3 3 Install TOPAZ Server a ia 1 14 TOPAZ Workstation 8 8 Install a Workstation 8 7 Installation Sentinel Driver 1 21 8 14 Installation CD SADAT aoa aa ee a o ee 1 14 Installation files 1 8 Installing the Server 1 14 Instruction Message Setup Report o ooooooooo 6 24 Internet browser architecture P 8 Internet Explorer SCUINGS yla cir weet ada 1 8 Trademark of 3 62 svn tritio bas P 5 Internet Explorer 6 0 o o oooooo 1 7 Provided by GE Security 1 8 1 14 Invalid PIN Attempts 7 17 J Jpeg Photo Quality 3 13 GE Security K Keypad Turn On Keypad Enter 8 45 Keypad Reader 0 0000 e eee 8 42 L LAN Communication Page 8 4 LIVE video 62a ee eae eo Shed oe EOS SEES 1 36 Lock Reader 0 000 c eee eens 4 2 LOCK VV DC init be Be ee ee Rae ee eh nd 8 42 Fail Safe Fail Secure 8 42 LOFO sarane dees Soe
44. 2 and 3 until the color you want appears in the currently selected color window 4 Click the Add to Custom Colors button and the color will now appear in the Custom Colors block you selected earlier 5 Click on the color block to select a color for the security area 6 Click OK and you will be back to the Security Area Configuration window The Color you selected will appear in the color block in the Security Area Configuration window and the security area icon on the map will be outlined with the new color as shown below Security Area Configuration EJ Security Area Name ACCOUNTING Color Clear Polygonal Cancel Click OK to exit the Security Area Configuration window fA ACCOUNTING Save your configuration changes by clicking the ed Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen NOTE If you do not save your changes when you exit the program all changes will be lost Outline Security Area The security area on the map can be outlined with the same color as the icon s outline When the area is masked the outline of the area will be filled in with an overlay of mesh the same color as set for the security area as shown below Area Unmasked Area Masked A A E AT e ed a tata NOTE The security area does not require an outline If you do not want the mesh to appear when the area is masked then you should not outline it To outline the security area you mus
45. 3 28 Bala Rate did 8 2 Before Installing Topaz 1 8 Browser Screen 0 0 00 1 27 Button VIGGO era shad dose Mes ey o Mn Setters dia 1 35 Buttons Alarm Control 1 35 SNUIIOWIT isaac Ra Gre ane orn t 1 36 WMO cd Sloe chats O Ao Se ee Sete net 1 38 Buttons Main Navigation 5 oc Henne em oe a ea A aeaa 3 1 As ey deta AN Ranke ok a 4 1 EVENS sud ee ae a de 2 1 Hardware 000 cee oo 8 1 REDONS ridad ie did 6 1 SGUD Asi aont berk ki Ete Gee ok ey eae 7 1 A aah a ock een NN aes 5 1 Buttons System Control LOQUO aan 55 20 gece dd eek ad dee a 1 36 Refresh Alarm Queue 1 36 Refresh Main Frame 1 36 Shutdown Topaz 005 1 36 2 Revision A C Capabilities Report 6 32 Card Access Page 02000 eee e eee 3 7 Batch Add Page 3 24 Batch Delete Page 3 28 Card Setup Page 3 2 Custom Field Names 7 19 Custom Field Page 3 22 Information Page 3 20 Mag Stripe Card Format 7 24 Masking Page o oooooo ooo 3 16 PHOIOMD Page siria dea 3 11 Wiegand Card Format 7 23 Card Deactivation Invalid PIN 0 00002 eee 7 17 Lost Terminated 3 3 Card olaluS ors sh oS aa eta ad 3 3 Cardholder Access Privileges 3 7
46. 5 ej EE alarmOC_masked bmp IY alarmFire_on bmp Y alarmGlass e alarmbi_on bmp ff dlarmFire_secure bmp alarm lass_t El alarmbi_secure bmp ft alarmFire_trouble bmp fi alarmHO m e alarmiv2_ trouble bmp E dlarmFO_masked bmp le alarmH _ on e alarmDuress_masked bmp E alarmFO_on bmp fer alarmHQ_ ser ls alarmDuress_on bmp E alarmFO_secure bmp E slarmHO_tro e alarmburess_secure bmp E alarmFO_trouble bmp B alarmHT_ma a alarmbDuress trouble bmp ht dlarmGlass_masked bmp B alarmHT_on e alarmPire_masked bmp IF alarmGlass_on bmp e alarmHT_sec pe de w A Histo La gt bio Computer Te ikea lal a BE el RS ba ach ly awe z he Mae lt Files of type Locate the icon bitmap for the designation you clicked on and double click the bitmap file name to add it to the designation icon you selected The icons are normally located in the aacgfx directory unless when they were created they were saved to a different directory Click OK when you have completed adding the icons for all the designations The new icon group is now added to the Icon Cfg tree list Modify Reader Icon Group There is only one Standard Reader icon group which has five designations Locked Unlocked controlled timer and offline Header Icons Ed Map Cfg Device Cfg Icon Cfg pe e Standard Reader PB Alarm Icons a Reader Icons Locked Unlocked Controlled Time
47. Alarm Event To select the Recall Events page from the Main browser toolbar on the left side of the browser window click on the Reports button and then click on the button corresponding to Recall Event or from any Reports page click on the Recall Event tab button The following page will display Recall All Events Display Report Q i 7 Print Report Log File Disk Drive c 1 i T ee PA Output To File e Start Date February 11 yJ 2004 7 Laza A en Output File Name ene EEE A seis nee ENTE an ex Run Report Cancel Report These reports are covered in detail below 6 34 460932001 GE Security Recall All Events Report Recall All Events Report This procedure recalls all logged events by time period To navigate to the report from any page within the Reports pages click the Recall Event tab button The following All Events page will display Bl Recall All Events a Display Report Q i A Print Report Log File Disk Drive c s _ FA Output To File a i E Eu A E El n 9 r PA mm Output File Name a EE ae a a F EIEE Run Report Cancel Report Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removable disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day
48. Always Reports ADMIN NWW FO y A Masking Schedule None Masking Action Mask gt j I Alarm Links to Relay None gt ACU 2 LOW BATT ACU 2 POWER ACU 2 TAMPER ADMIN NW DC First Camera This is the first camera that is linked to this alarm Select the pre configured camera from the drop down list To configure a camera click the Video Camera tabs at the top of the screen and complete the page that displays For information about configuring a camera See Video Camera on page 8 65 Video Switcher Alarm Camera lf an approved optional video switcher is connected to one of the serial ports of the server the PC can send a signal to the video switcher to trigger one of its alarms cameras Enter the alarm camera number of the optional video switcher that is to be activated when the alarm point becomes active NOTE When using a GE Video Switcher use the number of the camera to be called for the Video Switcher Alarm field Video Switcher Preset lf an approved optional video switcher is connected to one of the serial ports of the server the PC can send a signal to the video switcher to trigger one of its presets Enter the preset number of the optional video switcher that is to be activated when the alarm point becomes active GE Security February 2 2005 8 51 TOPAZ Software User Guide Dial up Report If this alarm point is connected to a dial up field panel you can specify if you wa
49. Area Name in the cardholder s record The numbers 0 amp 1 deny access so any number 2 or greater will indicate that the employee is allowed access to the selected security area 2 When filtering by an Access Group select the name of the Access Group from the drop down list in the Filter By field Use Equal for the condition and leave the value field blank This will recall all cardholders authorized for the group in the filter by field When Not Equal to is selected for the condition this will recall all cardholders who are NOT authorized for the group in the filter by field 3 Ifthe value entered into the Value field is not the correct format for the data in the Filter By field you will get a File Not Found error message when saving the report GE Security February 2 2005 6 61 TOPAZ Software User Guide save Add To save a report you have modified or a new report press the Save Add button NOTE You must press the Save Add button for a newly created report to be saved as a Template in order to run the report If you do not save it and you press the Run Report button you will get a report with no records shown and when you press the Can cel Report button your changes will be lost and the report window will close Your changes will be erased from the screen Delete To delete a report template select the Template Name and press the Delete button The message Are you sure you want to delete this recor
50. At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window GE Security February 2 2005 8 33 TOPAZ Software User Guide Elevator Floor Definition Page The Elevator Floor Definition page allows you to setup the relay links to floors and Security Areas for access authorization To navigate to the Floor Definition page from any page in the Field Panel Setup pages click the Elevator tab button at the top of the window and then click the Floor Def tab button The following page will display NS E E f Serial Port y LAN Comm Y Workstation A Reader Alarm Point Relay j TEE Auto Config Video Y L Setup Relay Floor Name A Security Area Configured Panels 7 AREA 1 1 0 y gt o 3 2 a Z gt NewElevator mI a n D D ee pa re None None Description a Y an i t Floor Definition The column of relay s on the left of the page are Relay s in the ACU panel Floor Names and Security Areas for authorization will be assigned to each relay that is used Relay Topaz allows up to 36 relays 0 35 in the ACU panel in the column on the left of the window The blue panel on the left of these relays indicates the location and relay number on the selected panel This will make linking the correct floor to the correct relay easier You will need to know wh
51. Buttons At this point you can start another application or continue to shut down the Windows operating system in the recommended manner Caution A Shutting down the TOPAZ program at the server terminates all communications to the field devices Alarms and events will no longer report to the server until the pro gram is restarted and a download is initiated Although the alarms and events are stored at the local field panel ACU until the server is back on line the amount of data stored is determined by the on board memory of these devices GE Security February 2 2005 1 39 TOPAZ Software User Guide 1 40 460932001 GE Security Chapter 2 Events Button Events Page The Events page is opened as an independent browser page that appears as an overlay onto the existing browser page The Events page contains all events as they occur df 06 59 55 ALARM REPORT NEWW Forced Open ALARM ACCOUNTING FO IDEO This window shows all system events alarm system device and access events as they occur An event contains information that the system s server records to its database Each event is given a sequential event number and a description However depending on how event processing is set up not all events are displayed and some event numbers will appear to be skipped over To close the Events window click the X in the right top corner of the window to return to the existing Main System browser The system updates th
52. Database vos coco wind ee ee oe oe oo 4 19 Elevator Control 6 28 Pea Crest gosta eet AG eae ena P 6 Field Panel o ooo oooo o 6 6 Routing Time Schedule 8 21 DIONOAY s sdaide kander PRS be eT eee i 6 22 RO 292 inde at sk oe Seen aa 1 7 Instruction Message 6 24 Operator Type o oooooooooo 6 30 S A epei keia noi et ears cee ae 6 8 Sales Email Address 00000000 P 7 rt Suey She Schedule security Area oooooooooo 6 16 Reader Action 0 0 cece eee 8 45 serial Port coco 6 14 SO pernos caos ceo ase G 4 VE CNEUEN Oa 6 Revision A GE Security Shutting DOWN it co tow oe adas ARE 1 38 Shutting Down TOPAZ 1 38 Site Settings ok coset diaria 7 16 Skip Command Confirmations 7 18 Social Security Number 3 20 software Installation Auto Insert Notification 1 14 Stant UP iaa atada 1 25 Status AAMPOM Esc da 5 4 Field Panel o oo oooooooo 5 2 ROQUE uni ad 5 3 FRGIAY atada Me oh 5 5 Status Button 0 0 0 0 0002 eee 5 1 Stolen Card oooooooomoomo eee 3 3 system Capabilities Report 6 32 Components 0000 eee ees 1 1 Control Buttons 1 36 EMTOFCOJES dali a A 5 FUNCIONS axe prioritaria 1 1 Navigation Bar o o o o 1 30 Navigation Buttons 1 37 Setup Report o o
53. Deleting Items From Template To delete an unwanted field item from the template select the item by clicking on it to cause the handles to appear Click on the Edit menu and select the Cut option from the menu NOTE The Cut option is the only way to delete an item from the template Move Forward Move to Front Move Backward and Move to Back The badge may be designed to have a virtually unlimited number of layers on which objects may be placed The Move commands allow you to move the individual Picked object forward or backwards through GE Security February 2 2005 9 17 Topaz Software User Guide the layers so that individual objects may be superimposed over other objects This is often used to ensure that counterfeiting of a badge is made more difficult The badge has a 1 Rectangle 2 Tnangle and 3 Circle lf after selecting the rectangle you perform a Move to Front the rectangle will move to in front of the circle becoming the first item to the front lf you select the rectangle again and perform a Move to Back the rectangle will move all the way to the back to behind the trangle to its original location Ifthe Rectangle is selected and you pertorm a Move Forward the rectangle will move to in front of the tnangle and behind the circle lf you select the Rectangle and perform a Move Backward the Rectangle will move again back to its original location behind the triangle 9 18 460932001 GE Security Edi
54. Double click on the Windows Firewall icon 5 wizard Modern Faxes da 3 Click this icon to open 17 the Firewall controls d Scheduled Security Tasks Cenky a e y lt q User Accounts ndows Wireless Link Wieless l Frewal Network Set 3 When Windows Firewall opens click the Exceptions tab Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Pepa Widows Firewall i bloc lt ing comng network connections escept for the programe and services selected below Adding exceptions allows sone programe to work setter but might noreaze your security risk Programe and Senices igi and inter Sharing W Renote Assislance O Renote Jesk op O UHF Framework Add Program Add Port Display a notification wher Windows Firewall blocks progam Wehat ara the risks af allcwing exceptions GE Security February 2 2005 1 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide 4 Click on Add Program to add two components of TOPAZ to the list of programs that may pass through the Firewall Add a Program To alow communicatons with a program by adding it to the Exceptions list select the program al click Browse to search for one that is not listed Progiarms lA Amerca Online 8 0 HJSOL Zysten Information SS FreeCell W Hears DE Internet Besckganmon y Inlemel Check s F Internet Esplorer OP Internet Hearts AF internet Reversi db Internet Spades Lii ul Minesweeper af a ath C Program
55. Flest merica Online amp 0 aoleve Browse 5 Using the Browse button locate mp exe It will be located in the folder where TOPAZ was installed The default location is C Program Files GE Security Topaz folder as shown below BJ C Program Files GE Security Topaz File Back p 0 search EA Folders ce ig Exa Ez Address CiProgram Files GE Security Topaz Edit View Favorites Tools Help Folders kalatelRemoteclie 36 KBE Application 111 200 KILL EXE 120KB Application 10 3 2010 Program Files MECCom dll 361 KE Application Extension 10 16 21 E accessories Ej mp exe 13 981 KB Application 1 24 20 L Adobe mpuprun exe 289 KB Application 12 9 20 H Babylon ss Nice dll 233 K6 Application Extension 12 26 21 L B s Recorder GOLDS MICECM3Z DLL 68 KE Application Extension 11 27 20 43 C Media nlogapi dll 332 KE Application Extension 11 27 20 L Common Files oasis dll S2KB Application Extension 178 200 E ComPlus Applications DiasisCtrl dll 68KB Application Extension 11 21 21 H Diamond IL PLAYH263 dll 60 KE Application Extension 11 27 20 Ba GE Security laa scrout err OKE ERR File 1 27 20 fy scroutO txt 3KE Text Document 1 27 1201 J Installshield Installation Ir E scroutoz txt LEB Text Document 1 27 201 73 Internet Explorer S Sql4drnin dll 92 KB Application Extension 6 15 20 3 microsoft Frontpage 532 dll 36 KE Application Extension Ff2 2
56. Group window will drop down as shown below For example if you click on the Door Contact category you will see alarm Icons for the Door Contact category There are four icons currently assigned to each alarm category Secure On Masked and Trouble Notice the colors match the colors talked about earlier in this document such as if the alarm is on active it will be a flashing red If you change the icon to an icon with some other color then when the alarm is on 10 40 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics active it will be flashing the new color This can cause confusion for the operators It is suggested that when you modify or create new icons that you keep the colors in mind TEESE Map Cfg Device Cfg Icon Cfg ru E l Alam cons i po AC Power Failure Z Device Offline Door Contact Alarm Icons 3 ES Mame Door Contact alarm Secure On Masked Trouble ed Open E Break Detector Open E Cancel You must change the icon assigned to each designation secure on masked trouble one at a time by clinking on the icon under the designation name you want to change NOTE When you are creating a new icon group for a category you should keep each of the four icons the same and only change the color except for special appli cations GE Security February 2 2005 10 41 Topaz Software User Guide For example if you want to change the Masked icon click on the icon a
57. Internet TCP IP Address The server must know the Internet TCP IP Address of the workstation to allow the workstation to log on This TCP IP address is setup automatically the first time the Workstation runs the TOPAZ software If you are not sure about the TCP IP address contact your Network Administrator NOTE It is not recommended that you modify the Internet TCP IP Address Caution A If the TCP IP address of the server currently being used is changed The worksta tion will no longer communicate The next time a request is sent to the Host the workstation will not receive a response The Host will send the information requested to the original not the new TCP IP address If the TCP IP address is changed the new TCP IP address must be entered from the Host Event Printer Configuration To select an event printer click on the drop down list and click on the name of the local printer The Event Printer will print all events that are generated by the system The default is None If no printer is listed you need to configure a local printer connected directly to the workstation You cannot select the same printer for both Event Printer and Report Printer You must use two different printers After you configure the local printer properties you can select the Event Printer under Hardware Workstation Set the properties for the local printer available to this workstation Do the following to configure the properties for th
58. M 4 33 Home on lgs1 N E sfhareng on igs4 0 E 2 fea Control Panel If you prefer to use a different directory such as Program Files select the desired location for the TOPAZ software such as c Program Files TOPAZ and click OK then Next gt February 2 2005 1 17 TOPAZ Software User Guide i Topaz Setup IA loj x Type of Installation O Select the type of installation k af gt Sa fe Topaz Server Yes want to add workstations No don t want to add workstations El Topaz Workstation Wise Installation Wizard Back Next gt Cancel 5 This dialog window determines the type of installation you are doing Are you installing the Server Click the radio button next to Topaz Server Also consider whether remote workstations those not resident on the server computer itself will be used If other computers will be used as workstations click the radio button next to Yes want to add workstations If you are installing a workstation select Topaz Workstation For information about installing a workstation see Install a Workstation on page 8 7 NOTE You must install TOPAZ on the server computer before installing it on any workstation computer 5 Topaz Setup Ready to Install the Application Click Next to begin installation Click the Back button to reenter the installation information or click Cancel to exit the wizard Wise Instal
59. PC s database 5 You will receive one of the following messages e If Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the LAN Adapter Name has been repeated Use a new name and try again e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again 8 4 460932001 GE Security LAN Communication At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data Modify a LAN Adapter 1 Select the LAN Adapter to be modified from the LAN Adapters list by clicking on the name to highlight it 2 After making all the required modifications to the LAN Adapter Name and or TCP IP Address click the Save Add button If you change the name the old LAN Adapter will be deleted 3 Amessage Operation Complete will display Delete a LAN Adapter 1 To delete a LAN Adapter from the System you must first select the LAN Adapter to be deleted Do this by clicking on the name of the LAN Adapter in the Configured LAN Adapters list Caution Before deleting a LAN adapter make sure that no field panels are assigned to the LAN adapter you are deleting 2 After making sure the correct LAN Adapter to be deleted has been selected click the Delete button 3 A message Are yo
60. RANJAL SIMPSON DIANE F STAMLEY JOANNE Fl TAYLOR LINDSEY THOMAS DONALD At the bottom of the Select Cardholder window the Record Last Changed indicates the last Record Last Changed date any changes or modifications were made to the current cardholder record being displayed Feb 13 2004 13 DOS NOTE It may be necessary to use the scrollbar on the right side of the cardholder page to move the window up to show the Record Last Changed date Using the other Search By filters 1 Select filter that you want to use from the Search By button 2 The Select Cardholder window now contains all the cards in the system with the selected filter information displayed 3 Begin typing the first digits of the desired information and the first card matching the typed information will be highlighted When the correct card is highlighted click the highlighted card The employee information will fill the page NOTE When searching by Serial Number the numbers that will appear in the Select Cardholder field will be the number that was entered in the Card Stamp Number field on the Cards gt Setup page Modify Cardholder Record 1 Follow the Recall Cardholder procedure to recall a cardholder record to be modified 2 Make the desired changes to any field except the card number 3 Once all the changes for the cardholder have been made click the Save Add button at the bottom left side of the window to save the cardholder information
61. Reader t Alarm Pc tS 3 Status Monday February 16 2004 11 09 10 4M Microsoft Internet Explorer Name Panel DEMO RELAY 0 Gaslite Main DEMO RELAY 1 Gaslite Main DEMO RELAY 2 Gaslite Main 1 DEMO RELAY 3 Gashte Main Relay Output Point DEMO RELAY 3 Energize Energize Pes A a Vf SA Status The top portion of the window under Status lists all pre configured relays To check the status of a Relay scroll through the Status List in the upper portion of the window The color of the name will show its status as follows Status Color De energized Green Energized Red Pulse Output Not shown Offline Magenta 4 6 460932001 GE Security Relay Control Page Control Relay To control or change the status of a Relay Point scroll through the list of Relays in the lower portion of the window under Control Click on the name of the Relay to control Once the name is selected highlighted click on the desired function Control Single Relay e Energize Energize Output This command will activate or turn ON the relay until another command is sent by the operator time schedule or linked condition to change the relay to another condition USES De energize Output This command will de activate or turn OFF the relay until another command is sent by the operator time schedule or linked condition to change the relay to another state i EROS Pulse Output This command will activate or turn ON the relay The relay
62. Report nananana naana ccc eee ees Alarm History Reports Page veis sade eee ar IE ad wer eed od oe ed Employee Reports Page 0 cc eee eens CHAPTER 7 SETUP BUTTON 34 500 eoittd onde deter A bie ties eee eee Poe we Setup BUKOM PAGS inc da id hades Lod eae eee eee Operators Setup Page isis nta ed eds die oti dyed Die eee ak Sad ai i Operator Type Pages lt n east wale ada Red oe eR Aa RR Le AE asa TIME SCNCOUIGIP AGC ica ds aid a Eek hee Ba eal ek i ean ead GR a SOCUMIY AI Ca Rage cid ii vk Rie ete a eid ad mda eS ed meu ed ACCESS GIO AGS e bn exe adh oh ud ope cet ae ee oe ace oa ganna nde eat dog at we db Site Settings Page usado tek avd eee L MOREE A ee nen Pees eee CUSIONLMFICIOS PAGS mi ooh neces dee nie ee orto wh tee ce a Saath aie beeen dd Faculty ode Pad id pate eh od Soil Vane Stn Bea te et Dake ata eee a Sad Be aie eee Vallable Cald Page s4 2 2 5 3 3 04 5 pasted bom tk amp idad dein dude oe eye era Reader Event Pag 244 naan a Gok and DA a waked wd wee ey asia BE eat wo PALIN OVO A a T eee Se at ot ace eas eae ha acter ome the a Ee tS Alarm Instruction Page id Rice Ook Se be ashen a ed aca a ete ane aed aera es See Alarm Categories Page lt td eee kine teed mae eb odie dde PHONO AVS AG Cre aot ote east Sree Got nha Gaacd Gee BUS GO Gd ake Ge Wee od ai ee eee WE oe CHAPTER 8 HARDWARE BUTTON 23 00 00 02204eesuo da pieis Bet Ot bones A Oe ee eee ea Sendal Pon FAS srta eae nich cata Se Aco a Sib a Ne ee etd B
63. Save button You will then return to the Access Trace page Instruction Message Select from the list of pre configured Instruction Messages the message to be displayed to the operator when the trace event occurs NOTE If you need to configure an Instruction Message click the 6 to the left of the field to call up the Instruction Messages configuration page When you have GE Security February 2 2005 4 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Save Save button You will then return to the Access Trace page Once the reader name is highlighted and workstation selected click on the PAE SLE Start button to start the trace The selected Reader will be removed from the Traces Available list and will now appear in the upper Traces In Progress list A message Operation Complete will display Stop a Trace To stop a trace for a specific Cardholder or Reader in the lower portion of the window under Traces In Progress click on the Cardholder name or Reader name that you wish to stop tracing Once the name is highlighted click on the Stop Stop button to stop the trace The selected Cardholder or Reader name will be removed from the Traces In Progress list and will appear back in the Traces Available list After clicking one of the above a message Operation Complete will display 4 10 460932001 GE Security Reset APB Page Reset APB Page Anti Passback The Reset APB page allows y
64. Test Modem and Serial Port and say Go The modem LEDs SD and RD should blink several times This sends the correct AT commands necessary for the modem to work correctly NOTE It is recommended you use a minimum of two dial up ports modems for data and alarms As the system grows or as the alarm load increases it may be necessary to use more Server modems to handle the traffic The Topaz systems administrator will also need to know the ACURT2 or ACURT4 Controller s Serial Number For additional information on dial up communication see Dial up Modem Optional in the Topaz Hardware Installation User Guide GE Security February 2 2005 8 29 TOPAZ Software User Guide Elevator Control e Overview e Configuring the Elevator Control e TOPAZ Field Panels and Elevator Control e Cab Setup e Floor Definitions Overview The Elevator Control Software ECS is an enhancement that allows TOPAZ to manage floor access This feature is turned on in the Field Panel configuration page TOPAZ associates cab and floor numbers with a security area and a relay Once a field panel is configured for the elevator control function it can only be used for elevator control The relays on an elevator control field panel are always in the activated on state A valid access will deactivate the relay s for the authorized floor s on the cab being used The Elevator Control Software can support up to all 32 readers configured as elevator cabs even if
65. The server will not start monitoring the point until the configuration is saved If the point should not be monitored until a later time leave the box unchecked This allows the system to be programmed while the hardware is being installed without generating constant alarms Input Number Address The Input Number Address field is used to indicate the location on the ACU to which the alarm is wired If you are not sure what the alarm number is contact the installer 8 48 460932001 GE Security Alarm Points Priority The Priority field indicates the level of importance this alarm should have The range is 1 to 16 The default is to have 16 the highest priority To change this to 1 being highest click the Priority 1 is Highest Priority check box on the Site Settings page See Priority 1 is Highest Priority Alarm on page 7 18 For example a Smoke Detector alarm might be given a higher priority number so it would be reported ahead of other alarms The highest priority will appear at the top of the list in the alarm queue The Duress alarm defaults to a priority 15 due to the usual setting that priority 16 is the highest priority User ACK Required The User ACK Required field is used to require acknowledge by the operator when the alarm is generated and displayed on the Workstation If the operator does not acknowledge the alarm in a predetermined time limit the Workstation will display Operator Failed To Acknowledge and log
66. This will pull down a menu list which lists all of the different items which may be inserted into a badge template The Draw menu offers the following items Options e Photo Photo e Signature Signature Text Text tua Database itmap e Line sima e Triangle als e Rectangle Triangle e Circle Rectangle e Ellipse Circle Ellipse Photo and Signature These two commands allow you to specify the position shape and size of the cardholder s photograph or signature Once you have selected either of theses items the menu will disappear You should then select the position of this item on the badge To select the position place the mouse arrow at the top left hand corner of the desired position press down and hold the left mouse button and drag it to the bottom right hand corner of the desired position The screen will show a rectangle with large square dot corners called Handles These Handles indicate that the object has been Picked for editing The rectangle will have a gray background cl dl A A AA eee a a l Click and hold left mouse button in upper left corner and drag to right bottom corner When the item is selected handles for adjusting are located at all four corners You can move the rectangle around on the template by placing the mouse arrow inside the selected field showing the handles then hold the left mouse button down and drag the rectangle to the new position T
67. a reference field that may be used at Relationship the option of the system owner Security Area SA 1 to SA 8 Alphanumeric Up to 12 characters 1 8 e This optional field specifies the name of a Security Area that the cardholder may access There can be eight Security Areas e Additional Security Areas are assigned to a cardholder when there are access privileges required that are different than those already assigned Time Zone for SA 1 TZ Numeric Up to 3 characters Security rea to e This field specifies the Time Zone number that 1 8 SA8 TZ applies to a Security Area assigned to a cardholder Social Security SSN Numeric 9 characters Number e Data for this reference field is transmitted with contiguous numbers For example if the Social Security Number is 555 12 3456 data will be transmitted as 555123456 Card Status STATUS Numeric 1 Digit Enter one of the following values for each card VALUE DESCRIPTION OK This is the default Lost Access will be denied Stolen Access will be denied Inactive Terminated Supervisor s SUPRVISR Alphanumeric Up to 32 characters Name e This is a reference field that may be used at the option of the system owner Cardholder s TELEPHON Numeric Up to 6 characters Telephone e This is a reference field that may be used at Extension the option of the system owner e The default is 000000 Badge TEMPLATE Alphanumeric Up to 8 characters Template e This field defines the Photo badge tem
68. and card number Most TOPAZ installations will not require a format change If you do wish to change the format you are using you can do so with this screen Wiegand Card Formats are defined in terms of bits a bit is either zero or one To add a Wiegand Card Format 1 Select from the drop down list of Wiegand Card Format s a number from 1 to 15 Once a record is selected the screen displays the remaining fields for this format 2 Select from 1 to 63 bits for the Card Length Most TOPAZ installations use a 37 bit format which will be described in an example below Another popular Wiegand Card Format is a 26 bit format GE Security February 2 2005 7 23 TOPAZ Software User Guide 3 The default is to use parity You may turn parity off by selecting No Parity to place a check mark in the box 4 You can select the location of the first bit for the Company Code as the Start value For the normal TOPAZ installation the Start value is 2 meaning the Company Code will start in the second bit in the string of bits Bit 1 is normally used for parity The Length is the number of bits to use for the Company Code For a Start value select from 1 64 bits and for a length select from 0 16 bits 5 You can select the location of the first bit for the Facility Code as the Start value and its Length For a Start value select from 1 64 and for length select from 0 16 bits 6 You can select the location of the first bit for the Card Numbe
69. and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for Recall All Events Tm Pi 6 36 ss CG WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD STARTED EVENT 66 SYSTEM EVENT Ci WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD COMPLETED EVENT 67 SYSTEM EVENT SYSTEM INITIALIZED EVENT 66 SYSTEM EVENT WORESTATION 1 ROUTED TO WORESTATION 1 EVENT 69 SYSTEM EVENT CG WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD STARTED EVENT 70 SYSTEM EVENT Ci WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD COMPLETED WurniT A 71 SVS THEM FIF TIT 460932001 2004 02 11 2004 02 11 2004 02 11 2004 02 11 2004 02 11 anna soe fad Wed Wed Wed Wed Wed Tar 13 13 Ta
70. are 4 Digits 5 Digits and 6 Digits The default is Disabled Extend Held Open on REX Select this option if you want the Held Open Timer to automatically extend for as long as the Request to Exit REX input is activated The Held Open timer does not start counting until the REX is released Select the feature by clicking on the box placing a check mark in it If not selected the Held Open Timer starts counting as soon as the door opens and the timer will expire even if the REX stays activated with the door open At the end of the time an alarm would be generated Relock Door e After Door Opening Select if you want the door to be relocked as soon as the door opens e After Door Closes Select if you want the door to relock only after the door closes This option if selected will keep the door locked even after the set lock time and will only relock the door after the door is closed This option is used for dead bolt and other similar type locks Relock Door on Strike Timeout Select if you want the door to remain unlocked even if the door is still open until the strike timer expires The door cycle will also end at that time End of cycle means that alarms are immediately enabled including the forced open alarm for doors with a door contact 8 42 460932001 GE Security Reader Setup NOTE If the door is monitored by an alarm contact and the reader is set for Over lapped Access and is open at the end of t
71. are now ready to take photos with the software F 4 460932001 GE Security Glossary Glossary of Terms Access Group A grouping of security areas and time zones for a set of cardholders Action An Action is a pre programmed automatic activity that the system will perform in response to Time Zone or Event activity Previously used only as part of Global Automatic Alarm Masking Automatic Remote Control or Access Automatic Remote Control setups The term Action is now extended to cover Local automatic functions which previously used the term command such as those formerly known as Local Alarm Output Commands Alarm point The generic name for a configured programmed security monitor circuit previously referred to as Monitor points This is the physical connection point for alarm wiring on an ACURT or other field hardware It also refers to the software function and option set inside an ACU that generates or defines an alarm signal Alarm point verification An optional program that is initiated from a keypad reader or a specially configured alarm point This program allows someone to do a walk through test of alarm points and activate them without generating alarm events to the workstation The tripped alarms however will not broadcast to the workstation Alarm State State A condition that an Alarm Point can detect and report An Alarm Point s state is the result of changes either to the Alarm s Detector Wiring or the
72. assigned to the color graphics system they will be listed in the map tree in the left window To display other maps in the window select the Maps tab at the top of the Maps Devices Tree window This will display the list of maps that have been added to the color graphics system The map tree is a hierarchical list of maps consisting of Overview maps and Detailed maps Any time there are maps assigned under an overview you may need to expand the overview to see the list of detailed maps under it Overview Map A map that has been initially added to the system Detail Map A detail map is a portion of the overview map above it in the hierarchy shown when the tree has been expanded m maps under the overview map click the example To view any map in the map window click on the map name in the tree Map Icons The icons control different results depending on the icon type The icons on the map represent alarm points reader doors relays security areas map links and cameras When the mouse arrow is passed over an icon the name of the icon will display in the bottom left corner of the map window Alarm Icons The interactive map alarm icons will change color to show the alarm status in real time Green The alarm is in a normal secure condition and is not masked Green Flashing The alarm has returned to normal condition but needs to be acknowledged and cleared Red The alarm has been acknowledged bu
73. assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases five may not be usable on a given line Radio Frequency This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual may cause interference to radio communica tions It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursu ant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equip ment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the owners will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference at their own expense NOTE The use of shielded interface cables with this equipment is required 460932001 GE Security Contact Us lf Problems Arise If any of your telephone equipment is not operating you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network If the telephone company notes a problem they may temporarily discontinue service When practical they will notify you in advance of this disconnection If advanced notice is not feasible you will be notified as soon as possible When you are notified you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Contact your te
74. badge shown below uses a few of the design features This badge was designed and saved into the system in approximately five minutes Background Rectangle Conditional Database Information Ee i shosted Photo ais Bar code 11 l i Tt Wl I i L You can orient the design for either portrait or landscape badges You have great flexibility in what may be placed on a badge The following features may be incorporated into a badge template The template is then used for printing cardholder badges GE Security February 2 2005 9 1 Topaz Software User Guide 1 Cardholder Photo The Cardholder s photo is stored in the Cardholder record and is automatically accessed when the Display Badge Print Badge or Display Photo selections are made The photo can be implemented with several different format selections including Chroma Key Chroma Cut Ghosting Black and White format and Rescaling 2 Cardholder Signature The Cardholder s signature is also stored in the cardholder record and is acquired from an optional signature panel attached to any enrollment workstation within the system NOTE An optional signature capture pad is required for this feature 3 Logos These are bitmaps of any object or scene that can be imported into the system from any external software package They can be used as backgrounds or as smaller symbols and can
75. button located to the left of the Dial up Panels list to start the requested communication function A message Operation Complete will display Load Panel Program Firmware Updates From the Field Panel list select the panel to load The PROM File can be received in a number of ways e g floppy disk E mail or CD Once you receive the file it is recommended that you copy the file to the hard drive of the server and then reference the updated file from the hard drive Running an update from the floppy drive can be VERY slow It is also recommended after updating one panel you check all the features in the updated panel to make sure that it is functioning properly then continue updating the other panels on your system one at a time When typing the PROM File Name in the field you must enter the entire file path for example C acu2024003 s19 4 14 460932001 GE Security Database Page Enter the update file name in the field window or click the __ Browse Browse button to locate the update file and click the Load button located to the left of the Field Panels list to start the program loading A message Operation Complete will display Database Page The Database page allows you to repair a damaged database To navigate to the Database page from any page within the Control pages click the Service tab button at the top of the window and then the Database tab button or from the Control page click the Service Function button on
76. button is clicked a message Are you sure that you want to shut down the system will display 2 Are you sure that you want bo shut down the system a Cancel If you wish to continue shutting down the TOPAZ application click OK TOPAZ will shut down and exit to the Windows desktop NOTE If you are working at a Topaz workstation the TOPAZ SHUTDOWN button will only stop the local software application It will not shutdown the server If you want to stop the server click this button on the Server machine 1 36 460932001 GE Security System Control Buttons Main Browser Window The third section of the Main browser page is the larger portion of the screen as shown in part on the left The main portion of the Main browser page has a set of navigation buttons that duplicate the Main System loo navigation buttons at the left side of the screen As you move the mouse pointer over the buttons they will change Status color slightly If the left mouse button is clicked while the button is changed it will navigate to that section of the TOPAZ Reports System You may use either set of buttons to navigate to the selected section of the TOPAZ system Setup Hardware Navigating Sections Of The System TOPAZ has 7 basic navigation sections e Events e Cardholder e Control e Status e Reports e Setup e Hardware The following will describe each of these sections its function and how it is used
77. clicking on the plus button by System at the top right side of the page You can also expand the entire tree by clicking the Expand All Expand All button or you can compress the tree by clicking the Compress All button Clicking this button will open the tree to show the Communications ports and LAN Adapters ACUs communicating over the LAN configured on the system as shown below The E ICON by Readers indicates that no additional information resides under that part of the tree Opening more of the tree would look something like the image below Expand All Compress All When you leave the Auto Configuration Device Tree page and later return the Tree will appear opened to the same place as it was when you left At anytime you can click on any one of the underlined names to bring up its appropriate configuration page and re configure or edit that item 8 60 460932001 GE Security Auto Configuration Setup For example if the ACCOUNTING FO alarm in the tree above were clicked on it would bring up the Alarm Point configuration page as an additional browser page with Auto Configuration remaining in the background as shown below System COMM Al Gaslite Main Main AC Readers f A Alarms E Alarm Point Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by InfoGraphic Systems OF x O LE MA sep J an Compress All ACCOUNTING FO Alarm Input Points B ACCOUNTING FO ACCOUNTING OL gt
78. device tree as shown below The device tree lists all the alarm points readers and relays that are currently configured in the system for the device Maps Devices Maps Devices B DEMO ACU 2 D1 Poling Address 4 DEMO ACU 2 D1 Polling Add Qk ADMIN GLASS BREAK QE ADMIN MOTION g BACK DOOR 4 2 BACK DOOR DC BACK DOOR FO QE BACK DOOR HO CONFERENCE SMOKE La DEMO RELAY 0 S DEMO RELAY 1 S DEMO RELAY 2 The device tree is used to locate the map an icon is currently assigned to add icons to the maps and control the device points If you click on a device name in the tree that is already assigned to a map the map it is assigned to will display in the map window and the icon on the map will highlight Device Point Icons There are three types of point icons under the e device icon in the device tree Alarm Paint Reader You can control a point listed in the device tree by clicking on it and the corresponding control buttons will display in the toolbar above the tree You can then click the desired button to control the selected device point GE Security February 2 2005 10 17 Topaz Software User Guide Configuring Color Graphics Adding Maps To add a map to the Map Tree you must place the TOPAZ Color Graphics system into the configuration mode Do this by clicking the 3 Go to Configuration Mode con in the right end of the toolbar The icon will change to the 2 Go to Online Mode icon showing you
79. e Add an Elevator Public Access e Modify an Elevator Public Access Delete an Elevator Public Access For an overview on the Elevator Control see Overview on Elevator Control on page 8 30 To navigate to the Public Access page from any page in the Field Panel setup pages click the Elevator tab button at the top of the window and then click the Public Access tab button and the following page will display NOTE After clicking the Public Access tab the tabs for Dial Up Elevator Floor Def and Cab Setup will no longer be available and will appear like this exam ple BRE To access these tabs again you must first click back on the Field Panel Setup tab Public Access Elevator pa Areas Public Access Area Name Human Resources Security Areas None y A Time Schedule Business Hrs1 y SA Elevator Start Action Public Access Enable y SOE AT Public Access Disable y Save Delete Clear Public Access Elevator Area This is a list of Public Access Elevator Areas that have been configured If you have not configured any areas yet the list will be empty To modify an existing area click on the name in the list to select it The following information will assist you in configuring new areas 8 36 460932001 GE Security Elevator Control Public Access Area Name Enter the name of up to 26 characters for the public access area This will indicate the Security Area that will be open to the publ
80. ek varo a ewe aE 1 36 Log on Navigating 1 27 LOSECGATA sic vents dede E de 3 3 M Mag Stripe Card Format 7 24 Main Browser Window 1 37 Map Button ola do rad ua Roa 10 1 Map DUHOM asociar di ds 1 35 Mask A Sin a ade we eget 4 5 Masking Defined 0 0 0c ee ee 3 16 Masking Alarm Points 8 52 Microsoft NET Framework 1 15 N Navigating The System 1 37 O ODBG sesenta cee ess G 3 ONLINE Help raseria ot dee eet bee eee es 1 25 Open Database Connectivity G 3 Operating Color Graphic Maps 10 2 Operator Setup Page 7 2 Operator Type Setup Report o oooooooo 6 30 Operator Type Page o oooooo 7 4 Override Anti Passback 3 9 Overwrite existing files 1 20 8 13 p Page Help viciado Be ed wide P 8 1 25 Parity Serial Port 8 3 Password ht oa ao lt betis k 1 27 7 2 Deut 2d dt taa 1 27 Personal Identification Number PIN 3 8 7 16 Phone Emergency Contact 3 20 GE Security February 2 2005 Phone Connection o ooooooooooo P 6 Phone Extension 0000000 3 20 PNOO BAdGIAG sword wa oe 3 10 Photo ID Design Badge o o o 3 14 Importing Photo 3 13 Print Badge Larissa doe we owe Ses 3 14 Take PNOO viii a 3 12 PIN COGG d
81. error Illegal file category type Illegal file type ISAM index file key does not match data file ISAM file is corrupted Illegal CAA field in LIS header detected Illegal SDA field in LIS file system control block address Ifssda Corrupted FIS file header detected File system could not allocate a semaphore Attempted record lock of record already locked by another user Another user is modifying this record Only one user can modify a record at a time Illegal record operation code Redundant write sector to be unlocked not locked Redundant write sector to be locked already locked Disk driver parameter out of range Disk driver operation timed out before completion or define InvalidSubCmd for Pecos Interface Attempted insert new key but key found Thread not found Queue error 460932001 GE Security 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1200 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 GE Security TOPAZ System Error Codes Bad downloaded event type or command Received SCP msg from device not being downloaded Bad download state variable Bad access event type or command Requested bytes to write did not write Attempted to log out of range event type Invalid Mailbox number No buffer found after receive buffer semaphore signaled Nomem on push No buffer on pop but should be The DOS environment cannot be created
82. exist click Yes to con tinue When the dialog window asks whether to replace all files with the same name without questions click YES Specify Directory xi i Please press OK to select the directory to copy the Workstation hta File 9 This dialog window will appear if you selected Yes I want to add workstations back in step 5 Click OK and another Browse window will appear Select where the Workstation hta file should be saved This file will be used when installing a workstation on another computer Make certain that the location selected is accessible by the workstation computers After selecting the location click OK Operation Complete xj A a UL Workstation hta Successfully Written bo C TORAZ 10 The dialog window indicates that the file was written successfully Now wait a few seconds and the Sentinel Driver installation wizard will start 1 20 460932001 GE Security Installing a Host PC Server Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit The InstallShield Ri Wizard will install Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit on your computer To continue click Mest E Cancel NOTE If this is the first time you have installed TOPAZ on this computer you should follow the remaining steps If this is an update you may cancel out of the Sen tinel Driver wizard 11 Click Next gt to install the sentinel drivers 2 Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit
83. floor name and Security areas in sequential order If there are no Security Areas in the drop down list then you must first create your site s security areas by going to Setup page then Security Areas For more details on how to configure a Security Area see Setup Security Areas on page 7 10 Configured Panels You can select a field panel by clicking on the name listed Description You can enter or change the description of this field panel After you have completed assigning the floors and Security Areas click on the Save Save button for the data to be saved to the Server s database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data GE Security February 2 2005 8 35 TOPAZ Software User Guide Elevator Public Access The Elevator Public Access page allows you to define multiple public access scenarios for elevators At the start of the time schedule elevator buttons associated with the selected security areas will be enabled allowing anyone to have access to those elevator floors On this page you can
84. grayed out In the case of the Photograph and Signature objects the available attributes are Chroma Key Chroma Cut Ghosting Black 8 White and Allow Rescale These are explained in detail later in this chapter Text and Database These two commands allow you to specify the position shape and size of the text and database field information to be shown on the badge Text refers to Constant text that is entered by the badge designer and will always appear on the badge in the same form Database refers to Variable information which is extracted from the cardholder database and is specific to the individual cardholder Once you have selected either of theses items the menu will disappear You should then select the position for these items on the badge To select the position place the mouse arrow at the top left hand corner of the desired position press down and hold the left mouse button and drag it to the bottom right hand corner of the desired position The screen will show a rectangle with large square dot corners called Handles These Handles indicate that the object has been Picked for editing A dialog window will appear on the screen 9 6 460932001 GE Security Entering Information If the Text command has been selected the dialog box will provide an open field into which you can enter the text to be placed on the badge in that position omes Once you click the left mouse button on the OK button the text will appea
85. in the batch to any reader attached to the system 3 24 460932001 GE Security Batch Add Page 3 Swipe the first card and the last card 4 Return to the computer with the Batch Add Page showing 5 The card numbers will display in those fields This method is useful if you have a reader close by and or the card numbers are not stamped on the cards Some firms order cards with the encoded card numbers different from the numbers stamped on the cards for security reasons They may use an offset value for example the card number is 10 more than the card stamp number or a formula to determine the offset value mak ing it more difficult for anyone to gain access who has a card and does not know the card number Starting Card Stamp Number Enter up to 8 digits for the Starting card Stamp Number This would be the number on the back of the first card being added to the system NOTE The Card Stamp Number is incriminated one number at a time For example if you enter 5299 for the starting number and you are adding 100 cards then the Card Stamp number on the first card will be 5299 and the last card will be 5398 Starting Employee Number Enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters for the Starting Employee Number to be added to the system The employee number will increment by one for each card added to the system Deactivation Date Select the date that all cards being added to the system will be deactivated The default date is 20 years f
86. installed and connected to the system to monitor the condition of the door Description Enter the description of the reader up to 50 alphanumeric characters This could describe the location and area the reader protects Save After all the changes have been made to the Reader Setup page you must click on the Save Save button for the changes to be saved to the Server s database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Reader Number has been repeated Enter a new number and try again e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again GE Security February 2 2005 8 43 TOPAZ Software User Guide At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data Modify Reader 1 Select the reader to be modified from the Configured Readers list 2 Make all the desired modifications to the reader 3 Click the Sae O Save button 4 A message Operation Complete will display Delete Reader Caution DO NOT delete a reader until all associated alarm points cameras and relays have been deleted from the reader first To delete a reader from the system you must first s
87. list all configured field panels Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text that can be opened in Notepad 6 6 460932001 GE Security Field Panel Setup Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the screen A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report scre
88. selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 12 460932001 GE Security Relay Setup Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for Relay Setup A S E e i RELAY CONFIGURATION RELAY MAME DEMO RELAY O RELAY E o PANEL MAME Gaslite Main RELAY ACTION SCHEDULE NEVER BEGIN ACTION Activate END ACTION Deactivate DESCRIPTION CONTROLLED EY ALARM POINT NO RELAY NAME DEMO RELAY 1 RELAY E 1 PANEL MAME Gaslite Mai
89. the Video Capture folder then on the Winnov folder and finally double click on the VIDMP REG icon I get the error No Such Interface Supported on some screens This can occur if one or more of the following files is missing damaged or improperly registered To resolve this problem in nternet Explorer follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Quit all programs that are running Click Start and then click Run Type regsvr32 urlmon dll and then click OK When you receive the DilRegisterServer in urlmon dll succeeded message click OK If this does not resolve the problem repeat steps 2 through 4 for each of the following files in step 3 replace Urlmon dll with each of the file names below Shdocvw dll Msjava dll Actxprxy dll Oleaut32 dll Mshtml dll Browseui dll GE Security February 2 2005 A 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Shell32 dll Windows XP and Windows 2000 only The following link to Microsoft Support can provide more information http support microsoft com default aspx kb 281679 EN US A 4 460932001 GE Security TOPAZ System Error Codes TOPAZ System Error Codes Error oO 0 N OO Ol 10 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GE Security Description No Error Invalid function number File not found Retry the command using the file name Path not found Retry the command using the correct path Too many open files no handles left Wait until another program
90. the Cardholder Database is not what encoded on the card ACCESS DENIED LOCAL ANTI PASSBACK VIOLATION e Access was denied locally in the ACU 2 because the cardholder has already used his card to enter the security area without an intervening exit from the security area ACCESS DENIED LOCAL SA RE ENTRY TIMER VIOLATION e Access was denied locally in the ACU 2 because the cardholder requested access within the Re entry time as defined in the Security Area Configuration ACCESS DENIED LOCAL TAILGATE VIOLATION e Access was denied locally in the ACU 2 because the cardholder has already used his card to exit the security area without an intervening entrance to the security area ACCESS DENIED SCP DEVICE ERROR e Elevator Access was denied because an SCP device was offline or deactivated ACCESS DENIED SECURITY AREA NOT DEFINED e Access was denied because the security is not defined You may get this event if the Database has not been fully downloaded to the remote panel ACCESS DENIED TAILGATE VIOLATION e Access was denied because the cardholder has already used his card to exit the security area without an intervening entrance to the security area ACCESS DENIED TIME ZONE NOT DEFINED e Access was denied because the time zone is not defined You may get this event if the Database has not been fully downloaded to the remote panel ACCESS DENIED USING LOST CARD Access was denied because the Card Status in the Cardhold
91. the Save button Delete a Security Area Caution Before deleting a security area remove the area from all cardholders and move all alarms and readers from the area to be deleted 1 From the Security Areas list select the Security Area to delete by clicking on the name After a name is selected highlighted the current configuration will display in the other fields on the page 2 After checking to making sure the correct area is selected click the Delete button 3 A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 Amessage Operation Complete will display 7 12 460932001 GE Security Access Group Access Group Page The Access Group page allows you to add one or more Security Areas to an Access Group and define the Time Schedule to each area You can do the following functions within the Access Group setup Add Access Group Delete Access Group Modify Access Group Rename Access Group Add Remove Security Areas in Access Group Modify Time Schedule For Security Area in Access Group To navigate to the Access Group page from any Setup page click the Access Grp tab button at the top of the page or from the main Setup Page click the Access Groups button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Access Groups Access Group Name Executive Officers Executive Officers Available Security aroas i CEA z A Available Security Areas gt
92. the Time Schedule setup page to allow you to setup an additional Time Schedule When setup has been completed close the win dow by clicking the Save button Duress Events Video Switcher Video Switch Alarm Number Enter the alarm number of the video switcher that should be activated when the reader s duress alarm is generated This field requires a video switcher alarm input For more information on duress see the Glossary page G 2 Video Switch Preset To activate a preset on the video switcher when the duress alarm is activated enter the preset number of the video switcher that is to be activated Reader Alarm Video Recorder Topaz allows cameras on digital video recorders to be linked to readers so that alarms generated at a reader can be recorded for investigation See Video Recorder on page 8 63 for information on configuring a Digital Video Recorder First Camera This is the first camera that is associated with an alarm event generated by this reader Select the camera from the drop down list of available cameras See Video Camera on page 8 65 for information on configuring a camera Save After all changes have been made to the Reader Options page click on the Sae O SAVE button for the changes to be saved to the Server s database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Re
93. the drop down list the time limit allowed for the alarm to be acknowledged The default is None will not expire and the options are 5 10 15 20 25 30 45 seconds and 1 1 5 and 2 Minutes After the timer expires at the Alarm Workstation then the No ACK Workstation signed in the Alarm Point Setup will receive the alarm for acknowledgement After all the changes have been made to the Workstation page you must click on the Save Add button in order for the changes to be saved to the Server PC s database You will receive one of the following messages e If Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e lf Duplicate Record is displayed then the Name entered for the workstation has been repeated Use a new name and try saving again e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try saving again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Delete a Workstation To permanently delete a workstation from the system you must 1 Delete the TOPAZ software from the workstation computer GE Security February 2 2005 8 21 TOPAZ Software User Guide On the server under Hardware Workstation select that workstation by name Press the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue go oe a The workstation name will
94. the function to be modified on the Restricted list The current Level of Restriction for the function will appear in the Level of Restriction field Click on the down arrow to see the choices as shown below and click on the level you want for the function s No Access That Operator Type cannot access or view any information l Pere ULE UE on that function screen The default restriction for a new Operator Type is No Access l No Access ho Access Display Only That Operator Type can view the information on that function screen but cannot add modify or delete any of the information 7 Display Onl You can set the same Level of Restriction for many functions at the same time by selecting the functions and then selecting a Level of Restriction to be applied to all the selected functions You can select more than one function with SHIFT Click or CTRL Click as described above You can set a different Level of Restriction for each function For example you can set Display Only for the Cardholder database functions and set No Access for the Control Anti Passback function Save Add Once all the entries have been made to the Operator Type page click the Save Add button A message Operation Complete will display NOTE At anytime the Clear button can be clicked to clear the Operator Type Name field and reset all Functions back to the Allowed list Modify Operator Type 1 Click on the name
95. the right side of the screen then the Database tab button The following page will display Alarm Database Repair Cardholder Database Repair Cardholder Database Diagnostic with APB Repair pm a gt C Rear Bo To run one or more of the following Database Repair options click on the white button to the right of the desired option This will place a black dot in the button indicating it has been selected Only one option may be selected and executed at a time NOTE It is highly recommended that you backup your database before performing a database repair To backup go to Control Page Back Up Restore GE Security February 2 2005 4 15 TOPAZ Software User Guide Caution A Since running the Alarm Database Repair or the Cardholder Database Repair pro grams changes files it is important that you be experienced and properly trained in using them In addition if your site has both a server and the workstation it is sug gested that the repairs be done at the server If copying of files is required the copying must be done at the server Alarm Database Repair Checks the alarm file for integrity and sends the repaired files to the dms2 folder Cardholder Database Repair Compares and rebuilds the cardholders file in dms2 Cardholder Database Diagnostic with APB Repair Selecting this option will check and repair the integrity of the Anti Passback table in the dms1 folder You do not need to shut
96. the selected map To add a map link locate the Map Link icon in the Device tree it is located in the first level of the tree Place the mouse pointer on the Map Link icon click and hold down the left mouse button Drag the icon on the map and release the mouse button GE Security February 2 2005 10 37 Topaz Software User Guide When you release the mouse button the Map Link window will display Map Link Link Hame peo ooo Map ta link Cancel Highlight the map that you want the link to jump to Click the in the map tree to expand it if needed to locate the desired map In the Link Name field enter the name for the link When you have completed configuration of the map link click the OK button The Map Link icon on the map will change to a Map Link icon with the link name next to the icon as in the following example Biotech Building To relocate the icon click and hold the left mouse button to drag the icon to a new location on the map To delete or remove a map link icon from the map click and drag the icon back to the tree window and release the mouse button The icon will disappear from the map and the red check mark on the icon in the tree will be removed Save your configuration changes by clicking the 5 Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen 10 38 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Custom ICON Groups You may create
97. to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 26 460932001 GE Security Access Event Configuration Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Access Event Reporting Options setup ly M ar ACCESS EVENT CONFIGURATION ACCESS EVENT CODE NUMBER E JDESCRIPTION ACCESS AUTHORIZED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Y N NO DISPLAY Y N YES PRINT Y N NO AUTOCLEAR Y N NO ACCESS EVENT CODE NUMBER 1 DESCRIPTION ACCESS AUTHORIZED AREA DISABLED ACENOWLEDGEMENT Nji NO DISPLAY Y N YES P
98. to follow you into a security area with only one reader such as a parking lot or turnstile Once a card is used on an entry reader any attempt to use the same card on any other entry reader assigned to the same area before that time expires will generate an APB violation alarm and access will be denied until the total time has expired There are two ways to reset the delay time for a given reader 1 Ifthe card is used at another reader outside that area 2 Ifthe time delay expires For more information on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 9 Keypad Masking Allowed must be selected if you want the cardholder to be allowed to mask alarms Masking means that alarms for that area are turned off Using Keypad Masking In order for Keypad Masking to work three conditions must all be set in the following order 1 Under Setup Security Areas click on the area name under Security Areas to place the name under Security Area Name Then select the check box next to Keypad Masking Allowed 2 In order to mask any alarms the cardholder must first be allowed access into that Security Area Under Cards Access select the cardholder then the area under Available Security Areas and move that area to the Selected Security Areas column 3 The cardholder must have that Masking Security area selected Under Cards Masking move the area from Available Masking Areas to Selected Masking Areas 4 Click the Sav
99. user intervention See Action Card number Encoded information stored on the card and used to identify the bearer Depending on the format the card number can accommodate up to 12 digits CG Color Graphics Bitmap file that enables you to view and control maps alarms and cameras Company Facility Code Encoded data stored on the access card used with the Unit ID code UIC or Universal Access System UAS This code identifies that the card has authority to access the site Conditional Unmask A program setting that will not allow unmasking a security area if an active alarm exists in the security area This option is useful when using key type switches to mask unsecured or unmask secure a security area Description A text field that gives you additional information about the item being setup In some cases Alarm Dialogs or in the Event window the text field is automatically displayed but generally this information is available only within the record District 1 workstation The PC assigned as the server Districts allow the routing of alarms and data to different workstations by area or time zones Door Used primarily in Command Menu for indicating lock unlock commands Door strike A common term for a locking mechanism controlled by a reader or access control relay There are two types of door strikes e Fail safe needs power to lock e Fail secure needs power to unlock Duress A Duress alarm is an a
100. who uses this computer Only for me Marjorie Wise Installation Wizard Back Next gt Cancel 4 The next window asks you to enter User Information Type the name of the user in to the Full Name field and the name of the organization into the Organization field Select the radio button beside Anyone who uses this computer This is used to permit the system to communicate with and respond to the Video Recorder Click Next gt to continue 1 16 460932001 GE Security 5 Topaz Setup Destination Folder Select a folder where the application will be installed The Wise Installation Wizard will install the files for Topaz in the following folder To install into a different folder click the Browse button and select another folder fou can choose not to install Topaz by clicking Cancel to exit the Wise Installation Wizard Destination Folder C Program Files GE Security Topaz Browse Wise Installation Wizard Cancel Installing a Host PC Server This dialog window determines were the TOPAZ files will be stored on the system If you do not want to use the default directory you may follow this procedure a Click on the Browse button Browse and the Browse for Folder window will display b GE Security Browse for Folder Find Directory My Computer H E 3 Floppy amp ey C Ea D Removable Disk E Removable Disk F Apps on Is L aS Common on gel
101. will remain activated or ON for less than one second and then de activate After clicking one of the above a message Operation Complete will display Click OK to continue If the ACU controller is not communicating with the PC then the message Device Offline will display Click OK to continue GE Security February 2 2005 4 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide Access Trace Page The Access Trace page allows you to setup a real time trace for Cardholder s or Reader s In a Cardholder trace the movements of the selected cardholder in and out of access points are monitored In a Reader trace any activity at that reader is reported The trace can be configured to be active only during a selected time schedule and can be sent to a selected workstation PC An Alarm Instruction Message may also be linked to the trace so that the message is displayed along with the trace event e In Progress e Start a Trace e Stop a Trace To navigate to the Access Trace page click the Access Trace tab button at the top of any Control page or from the main control page click on the Access Trace button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Point Y Relay i F i A Workstation f ge fthdjaplc3unh y Access Trace by Reader Access Trace by Cardholder fs LOBBY DOOR Aberdeen Schuyler R td Time Schedule Always zl Bogata Janet Oxley Jason R xXx AA None y Start Access Trace by Reade
102. you wish to reset After the name is highlighted click the button in the top Set All Cardholders section A message Operation Complete will display Click OK to continue For an overview on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 Set Selected Cardholders to Security Area This function is to enable you to reset the APB of only one cardholder at a time to a selected Security Area This is used to allow the specified cardholder who has access to the APB Security Area to be allowed to re enter that area after exiting the APB area without swiping their card For example if a cardholder who is in a specified Security Area left the area by tailgating behind another cardholder and did not swipe their card upon exiting The TOPAZ system thinks the cardholder is still in that area This will allow the security staff to reset that Security Area to allow reentry for that one cardholder only To reset the selected cardholder to a selected Security Area click on the Cardholder Name in the Available Cardholders list and then click on the Security Area the cardholder is to be reset to After the Cardholder and Security Area names have been highlighted click the FM button in the lower Set Selected Cardholder section A message Operation Complete will display For more information on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 4 12 460932001 GE Security Panel Page Service Panel Page The Panel
103. 00 423 Microsoft Office E sysflag dat 1 KE DAT File 11 21 21 23 Microsoft Script Debugger E SYSFLAGA DAT LKB DAT File 11 21 21 H Microsoft SOL Server E SYSFLAGE DAT LKB DAT File 11 21 21 E NavhT 5 Topaz bat 2KB M5 DO5 Batch File 1 23 20 2 NetMeeting El Topaz3 256 ica 3KB Icon 11 30 21 ce Officelipdate videomanager dll 68 KE Application Extension 1 14 20 29 Outlook Express videomanager exe 63 KB Application rye 74 objectis Disk Free space 3 80 GB 25 7 ME J My Computer FA 6 Highlight mp exe in the list and click Open to add it to the Add a Program window Highlight 1 12 mp exe in the Add a Program window and click OK 460932001 GE Security System Requirements 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 but this time add mpuprun exe Windows Firewall pe eee al Genaral Exceptions Advanced Widows Firewall iz bloc lt ng ncomng network connections escept for tre program and services selected belaw Addinc exceptions allows sone programe to work setter but might ncrease pour security risk Programe and Senaces O File ar tira S Hairy 4 Renote Assislance O Renote Jesk op O UPnP Framework H mp exe H mpupruon exe Add Program Add Port Display a notification wher Windows Firewall blocks progam What ara the risks af allcwing exceptions Ok Cancel 8 The program will now appear in the Programs and Services section of the Exceptions tab Make cer
104. 0004 e Geko A 10 10 Map SIZING sic shee dil ae a on a 10 15 Map eC uc eee roe OA 10 16 Masking Alarm Points 10 5 OPTION 06 kate dl a 10 2 Reader Control 10 15 Reader Door Icons 10 6 Relay Control o o o 10 14 Relay ICONS 1 003 ere ds ara 10 6 Security rea Icons 10 7 SGUD ir a de 10 18 TOOID Al lt a eae Pee 10 10 Color Legend Alarm Point Control 4 4 Alarm Point Status 5 4 Alarm Queue 000 02 ooo 1 30 Auto Configuration 8 59 Panel Status rip 5 2 Reader Status 4 2 5 3 Relay Status ooooooooooo 5 5 Comments Access Events o ooooooooooo 1 35 Alarm Events o 1 33 Company Code Facility Code 7 21 Configuring Elevator Control 8 30 Contact US sacada andadas P 7 Control Access Trace 000 cee eee 4 8 Alarm POUNG anes oo edt Se ew A ee 4 4 Backup Restore Database 4 18 REIES Yair cakes Se eae eo aes 6 ea 4 2 ROS seid i ora ae oa 4 Reset Anti Passback 4 11 Service Database 4 15 Service Field Panel 4 13 Control Button oooooooo 4 1 COPYTIQITE 44 6 40650 CE dr ea oi P 5 Custom Alarm Categories 7 31 Custom Card Format 7 23 Custom Cardholder Field Name
105. 04 072028 p Description MAIN ENTRANCE TO ACCOUNTIN TCD Ct Elica CARD UNDEF 1234 5678 000012341 Badge Number 1234 5678 00001 23465 Acked By a ANA z d TE Instructions Comments E The Access Details page contains the following information e Message The message assigned to the event during Reader Event setup e Description The description assigned to the reader during Reader setup e Badge Number The whole badge number including company code facility code and card number assigned to the cardholder e Cardholder Name The name of the cardholder assigned to the badge during Cards setup e Instructions The instruction message text assigned during Alarm Point Option setup e Reader Name The name of the reader used for this access event by the cardholder assigned to the reader during Reader setup e Date Time The date and time the access event occurred e Device Name The name assigned to the ACU field panel to which the reader is attached 1 34 460932001 GE Security Alarm Queue Window e Area The name assigned to the security area under Security Area setup e Acked By The name of the operator logged on to the system when the alarm was acknowledged e Comments Comments typed in by the operator Alarm Control Buttons ACK Button The ACK Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge the alarm Select the alarm in the
106. 04 11 26 Day Atter TD wrasse acer ar END OF REPORT HOLIDAY S PURGED FROM DATABASE GE Security February 2 2005 6 23 TOPAZ Software User Guide Instruction Message Setup Report The Instruction Message Setup Report recalls how Instruction Messages have been setup To navigate to the Instruction Message Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Instruction Messages tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Elevator Op Type Display Report G Instruction Message Setup Print Report e Output To File e All Instruction Messages Yes Output File Name Instruction Message Name Run Report A i Cancel Report us All Instruction Messages If Yes is selected all Instruction Messages will be listed on the report If No is selected then an Instruction Message must be selected from the drop down list under Instruction Message Name Instruction Message Name From the drop down list of pre configured Instruction Messages scroll through and select the Instruction Message to be recalled in the report by clicking on the Instruction Message Name Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in
107. 11 Wed 14 10 36 OPERATOR ID Master WORESTATION 0001 MENO Logged Off EVENT 50 OPERATOR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 14 10 44 OPERATOR ID WORESTATION 0001 MENO Logged On 6 42 460932001 GE Security Recall System Device Events Report Recall System Device Events Report The Recall System Device Events Report recalls all system and device events that occurred during your selected period of time To navigate to the report from the Main Reports page click the Recall Events tab button in the top navigation toolbar and then click the Sys Device tab button The following page will display System Device Events Display Report o Print Report e Output To File Output File Name O EEE E DT Cancel Report Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removable disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should start Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month
108. 1101110 Max irum Max irun Max Lint Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number GE Security at at af af of at af of af of at af of af ot at af af of ot at Readers Employee Cards Visitor Cards Temporary Employee Cards Temporary Visitor Cards Alarm Points Remote Control Points Security Areas SLP Logical Devices Serial Ports Alarm Trouble dictions Remote Control Actions Alarm Masking Actions Remote Control Operations Alarm Masking Operations Remote Control Time ones Alarm Masking Time ones Alarm Trouble diction Messages Guard Tours Unacknowledged Alarms Time one Intervals February 2 2005 10 q 64 10000 4096 4096 SOO 64 63 4001 4001 4001 4096 4096 4001 4001 ole 126 255 TOPAZ Software User Guide Recall Event Reports Page These reports can display and print out a complete listing of all events recorded to the current on line event log file events that occurred while the server was shut down or events that have been archived or backed up The fields on the Recall All Events screen can be modified to reduce or expand the report range The Recall Event page will allow you to retrieve historical information by the following types of events e All Events Event Number e User Action e System Device e Other Events e Access Event e
109. 2 2005 3 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide Display Badge To display a badge you must first select a cardholder from the Select Cardholder window Then click on the Display Badge button The photo if available for that cardholder will appear in the top right corner of the screen and the full badge for that cardholder will appear in the large Badge Preview window Take Photo Verify that the correct cardholder s record is displayed before taking the photo Then click on the Take Photo button NOTE A video card if camera is not USB and camera are required before you can take a photo Also make sure the color and resolution for your computer s monitor is set to 1024x768 and 16 bit High Color The cardholder s image will appear in the live video screen in the upper right of the new screen shown below To the right and below the live video image are adjustment bars in scroll bars which you may use to center the subject in the screen area You may also adjust the Resolution bar to make the image sharper or softer Resolution Wideo od alel Breghiness Controls j ilf Contrast i A e H alel Hue Jpeg Photo Dumie Vertical acrollbar Horizontal acrollbar Current Photo Image Palette To the lower left of the live video image is an area that displays the current photograph if any in the cardholder database for that subject In the left upper part of the screen are the a
110. 2 Video Option Requirement 1 7 Video Switcher 8 51 W Warning Overwrite Existing dll files 1 20 8 13 Warranty Information P 5 Web Site Address P 7 Wiegand Card Format 7 23 Windows Trademark of P 5 Workstation Alarm ColorGraphics 8 21 Ev n PIME uri dai an 8 18 Installation 8 8 Report Printer 8 20 TCP IP Address 8 18 User Information 8 10 Workstation Installation 8 7 Workstation Page o o oo momo 8 6 Workstation hta writing the file 1 20 Workstations Remote Installation 8 11 will they be used 1 18 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank l 8 Revision A GE Security GE Security This Page Intentionally Left Blank February 2 2005 AV136191 GE Security e 12345 SW Leveton Drive e Tualatin e Oregon e 97062 e 800 547 2556 www GE Interlogix com
111. 2 bit InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Al program Features will be installed Requires the most disk space Choose which program Features you want installed and where they Will be installed Recommended for advanced Users Installshield x lt Back Cancel 1 22 460932001 GE Security Installing a Host PC Server 14 Select Complete then Click Next gt to continue 2 Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation TF vou want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard IMPORTANT Please remove all USB SuperPro keys before continuing Installshield 15 Remove USB sentinel keys before continuing then Click Install A screen with a progress bar will display while the Sentinel Driver files are installed InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit Click Finish to exit the wizard E Cancel Back 16 Click Finish GE Security February 2 2005 1 23 TOPAZ Software User Guide 17 You will now be returned to the desktop and the following message will display CA al For proper installation of the files your syste
112. 2005 4 17 TOPAZ Software User Guide Back Up Restore Database Page e Back Up Database e Restore Database The Back Up Restore page will allow you to back up and restore programs and data files To navigate to the Back Up Restore page from any page within the Control pages click the Back Up Rest tab button at the top of the screen or from the main Control Page click on the Back Up Restore button on the right side of the screen The following page will display 1 Restore p The top portion of the page is for backing up data and the bottom portion is for restoring data i Back Up Database It is recommended that you back up your database on a regular basis If you encounter a problem and need to restore your database the restoring can only go back as far as your last backup There are two options for doing the backup Either the Logfile can be Reset allowing new data to be written over the old data or the Logfile is not Reset and new data is added to the end of the file Back Up to Drive 1 Enter the Drive letter for the location where the files are to be backed up Zip Jaz etc 2 After selection has been made 1 If you want to Reset the log click the button to start the backup process 2 Ifyou do not want to Reset the log click the button to start the backup process 4 18 460932001 GE Security Back Up Restore 3 One of the following messages should display e f Operation Complet
113. 5 A 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide e Make sure you are logged on as the Administrator If not log in again as the Administrator and reinstall TOPAZ When I start TOPAZ I get a dialog box that asks about connecting to your Internet Service Provider Go to the Windows Control Panel Under Internet Options on the Connections tab under Dial up setting select Never dial a connection My computer hangs Either the keyboard or the mouse is not working Bring up the Windows Task Manager either press Ctrl Shift Esc or press Ctrl Alt Del and select the Task Manager End the following processes mp exe mprun exe and mshta exe Then try to run the program again When I run Auto Configuration it did not find the device have plugged into that COM port or it does not detect any field panels The TOPAZ Auto Configuration is set at the factory to connect to the ACUs at 9600 baud If you have changed the ACU baud rate reset it to 9600 baud Then try Auto Configuration again If that does not correct the problem you may have a wiring error Insure each field panel is wired correctly and each field panel has a unique polling address on the serial port Then try Auto Con figuration again I get an error message that the workstation cannot connect Make sure the network cable is connected to your computer If that does not fix the problem you may have a faulty network card See your PC technician The TOPAZ shows the same screen
114. 6 TASE INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dmsi mkopftoo dt EVENT 6 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASE INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dms1scpdew dt TOPAZ Software User Guide Recall User Actions Report The Recall User Actions Report will recall a description of the action performed by the system operators during a selected period of time If an operator has performed an operation other than displaying or printing information the description will include a more detailed explanation of the operation such as creating a monitor point or deleting a disk file NOTE The program cannot verify the person that used a password was indeed the operator assigned to that password only that the operator who performed the action was using that password Consequently you should advise all system operators NOT to reveal their passwords to anyone else including other sys tem operators To navigate to the report from the Main Reports page click the Recall Events tab button at the top and then click the User Action tab button The following page will display RUTA EXTRA Recall ent LO ET Recall User Actions Display Report O Print Report e Output To File Output File Name eme PEE ESC MT EEEE Cancel Report Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removabl
115. 7 Software Installation n ira be eb OS A ee ew Se Os He Oe 1 8 Setup for Internet Explorer 0 anaana aa aaa eee eee eee 1 8 Installing Virtual Machine sia a es Ad a ea 1 9 Seting AP SpZ Firewall sceri uds a dt et a le eed 1 11 Installing a Host PC Server o oo oooo eee eee eens 1 14 USING SOFTWARE uta il we at are ed ee a Sections A ea ea adi as 1 25 Start UD aii da sas aaa 1 25 Lu A A E E OR ER 1 25 Startup Log on amp Navigating oooooo ee eee 1 27 The Server Workstation Display o ooooooooooooa eee nes 1 27 The First Time Topaz is Started o ooooocononon eee ees 1 29 Alarm Queue Window cadera aos Geos Edda A ye 1 30 System Control ButtonS 00 A AAA IA A ARA A A See 1 36 Main Browser Window wie h en a9 aod eee ete ang aw AD See Rew Re ed wack Stade wee de aw Babee 1 37 Navigating Sections Of The System 1 0 ee ees 1 37 Navigation Bar STUCIUTS 01000 is IA A a AA AAA AA o 1 37 Shutting Down the Software o ooo ee ee eee eens 1 38 CHAPTER 2 EVENTS BUTTON rarei pias Best he ees Sie ee ee ee ee ee pl aoe oh ae Sid 2 1 VSI A A A ated Se teu aids eas OE A 2 1 CHAPTER 3 CARDS BUTTON 53 00d aa E RA A A Re aa Aa 3 1 Card SetU AGC aa se Bind E oS a Re Se E ee a eae Bo Da ae eS ee 3 2 GE Security February 2 2005 T 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide ACCESS Pad mdd td oh aw ot OE eo dae ee aed ee E de ed ae 3 7 Fe QUO AN PaE fa Sih Se kn a a aa ila che hae w
116. 7 Name Eo oo Custom Cardholder Field 8 Name A Custom Cardholder Field 9 Name Birth Date v Custom Cardholder Field 10 Name Custom Cardholder Field 11 Name Save Clear These custom design fields are called Custom Cardholder Field 1 Name through Custom Cardholder Field 11 Name on the Custom Fld page This page allows you to customize the label name of these fields as they will appear in the cardholder database When deciding which label to use for each Custom Field remember the maximum size allowed in each field as shown below e User Field 1 4 can contain a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters e User Field 5 7 can contain a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters e User Field 8 11 can contain a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters Once the new label name has been entered on this page the cardholder information which fits the custom field can be entered on the Custom Fields Page on page 3 22 Add a Field You add a field by entering the name up to 12 alphanumeric characters in one of the available blank fields on this page NOTE If the Clear button is clicked before the Save button any changes to fields or will be lost Click on another page button and then back GE Security February 2 2005 7 19 TOPAZ Software User Guide on the Custom Fld button This will redisplay the original field names that were saved Caution If you click on the Clear button then click on the Save button
117. 8 49 Date Format You can choose from one of two formats for the date e Month Day Year default The date will display in this format for example Jan 13 2000 e Day Month Year The date will display in this format for example 13 Jan 2000 Select one of the above date formats by clicking on the white circle next to the selection to place a black dot in it Once all changes have been made to the Site Settings page click the Sae O Save button A message Operation Complete will display 7 18 460932001 GE Security Custom Fields Custom Fields Page The Custom Fields page allow you to custom design 11 fields for any data field needed on a cardholder in addition to the default fields in the cardholder database For example you can add Address Emergency Notification etc To navigate to the Custom Fields page from any Setup page click the Custom Fld tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup Page click the Custom Cardholder Field button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Operators Y Time Sched Ysecurity Area Access Grp Site Settings Facility Code Variable Crd Reader TA Alarm Opt Holidays Custom Cardholder Field 1 Name Address 1 Custom Cardholder Field 2 Name Custom Cardholder Field 3 Name Custom Cardholder Field 4 Name AS atus Custom Cardholder Field 5 Name A Custom Cardholder Field 6 Name Custom Cardholder Field
118. A SECURED SCHEDULE AREA DESCRIPTION Finance Office AREA MFG OFFICE TEN4NT PARTITION MAME PASSWORD PROTECTION No PUBLIC ACCESS No ANTI PASSBACK YM YES AREA LOADING YM NO TWO MiN MIN ACCESS YM No MAX OCCUPANCY O 32767 O CURRENT OCCUPANCY o DIAL UP YM NG TIME DELAY FOR REENTRY 30 Minutes EEYPAD MASKING ALLOWED NG ALARM MASKING DELAY 0 seconds AREA SECURED SCHEDULE AREA DESCRIPTION Manufacturing Administration AREA SYSTEM TEN4NT PARTITION MAME PASSWORD PROTECTION No PUBLIC ACCESS No ANTI PASSBACK YM No GE Security February 2 2005 6 17 TOPAZ Software User Guide Access Groups Setup Report The Access Group Setup Report recalls how Access Groups have been setup To navigate to the Access Group Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Access Grp tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Display Report a Print Report Output To File e Output File Name Run Report Cancel Report The report will list all access groups Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use out
119. A Selected Security Areas Time Schedule zz Jaa Ss AAA ACCOUNTING MFG OFFICE SYSTEM SaveiAdd M Add New Access Group 1 Start by clicking the Clear button to clear all fields 2 Enter the Access Group Name of up to 28 alphanumeric characters 3 Inthe Available Security Areas list select a Security Area to add to the group by scrolling through the list and clicking on the name of the area so it is highlighted 4 Click on the b Right Arrow to move the Security Area to the Selected Security Areas list Repeat the above steps until all desired areas have been added to the Selected Security Areas list If you move the wrong security area you can move it back by clicking on the 4 Left Arrow GE Security February 2 2005 7 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide NOTE If you need to setup a Security Area click on the E link arrow This will open an additional window with the Security Area setup page to allow you to setup additional security areas When you press the Save button the window will close and you can continue working in Access Group setups The default Time Schedule for all areas selected is Always If you want to change the Time Schedule for any given Security Area follow the steps below 1 Click on the security area in the Selected Security Areas list to highlight it 2 Click on the down arrow next to the Time Schedule list field This will give a drop down list of pre configured time schedules to c
120. A message Operation Complete will display Dial up Connection To download to a dial up panel scroll through the list of pre configured Dial up Panels and select the panel to download to by clicking on the name in the list so that it is highlighted Next select one of the four download options e Download amp Hang Up After the download is completed the panel will Hang Up disconnect e Download amp Stay Connected After the download is completed the panel will Stay Connected not hang up e Break Connection Hang Up This option will force the selected panel in the Dial up Panels list to Hang Up disconnect e Initialize Test Modem amp Serial Port This option will conduct a test of the selected computer s serial port and attached modem selected from the Dial up Ports list NOTES e If Initialize Test Modem amp Serial Port is selected the Dial up Ports list will be avail able to select the port to be tested Select the port before continuing The Dial up Pan els list will not be available for the port test e When using dial up the modem baud rate should be set to 9600 with no parity Also a Robotics Sportster external modem must be used at the host computer The desired option can be selected by clicking on the white circle to the right of the option This will place a small black dot in the circle indicating the option is selected Once the panel or port name is highlighted and the option is selected click on the Call
121. AME Forced Open This door has been forced Open send Guard to investigate Call Ape xXx Security 555 1231 INSTRUCTION MESSAGE NAME Glass Break send Guard to Investigate Initiate work order with Engineering for repair 555 2314 END OF REPORT GE Security February 2 2005 6 25 TOPAZ Software User Guide Access Event Reporting Options Setup Report The Access Event Reporting Options Setup Report recalls how Access Events have been setup To navigate to the Access Event Reporting Options Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Access Reporting Options tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Elevator Y Op Type Display Report g Access Reporting Options Print pe Output To File Output File Name The report will list all Access Event Reporting Options Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file
122. AZ Access Control System February 2 2005 TOPAZ Quick Start TOPAZ Software User Guide Auto Configuration Auto Configuration is a unique software feature that automates the systems setup of hardware and cardholder programming efforts All the installer or end user needs to do is log on and TOPAZ will automatically detect and define all the field devices connected to each port on the computer It will also define a default value for all device system and cardholder data Such pre defined and pre configured data includes the creation of basic reader access groups time intervals time schedule holidays activation date cardholder access group assignment reader alarm point defaults default alarm definitions and alarm message text as well as the physical hardware hierarchy and its graphical tree representation The TOPAZ software initiates polling on demand by user command as described below of the file server s maximum five 5 serial communication ports and one 1 LAN port It records an inventory of all port communication interfaces that is serial card modem LAN card and CCTV switcher and all their downstream devices for example ACUs Readers Alarm Points Relay Outputs System Alarms device off line tamper battery low Workstation and CCTV Switch Initiation of the Auto Configuration Feature You can start Auto Configuration by either of the following ways e Ifthis is a new TOPAZ installation without any comm
123. An option was selected that was illegal No such directory Attempted to reference a file directory that does not exist Bad File Name Attempted to reference a file with an illegal file name Duplicate file name Attempted to create a file that already exists File does not exist Attempted to reference a file that does not exist Drive does not exist Attempted to reference a disk drive that does not exist or define InvalidACU for Pecos Interface Bad Access File already exists Request number of bytes to read was not read Request number of bytes to written was not written Not enough disk space Unable to allocate file Disk is full Not enough memory available to perform operation Directory entry corrupted ISAM key is corrupted Unable to write record File is full Duplicate Key Attempted to insert a key that already exists Invalid Function No file handles left Close Open Access Denied Bad handle Bad memory An internal error was detected in the file system define InvalidReader for Pecos Interface Illegal time unit value Illegal coordination value Illegal file open type code Bad semaphore number Attempted to open file with a logical channel number already open 460932001 GE Security 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 GE Security TOPAZ
124. Bad Download Command Bad District Download Command Bad MP Server Command Bad application Request Command MP Server Number Out of Range server Shutdown Not Dial up Bad Color Graphics directory Bad District Download Color Graphics Command Bad Color Graphics Districts Bad District Download Color Graphics File Command Bad District Download Color Graphics Change of State Command Bad District Download Color Graphics File District The file or directory is corrupted and non readable The disk is corrupted and non readable There is no user session key for the specified logon session The service being accessed is licensed for a particular number of connections No more connections can be made to the service at this time because there are already as many connections as the service can accept TCP IP Connection not open TCP IP No more Connections available TCP IP District logged attempted login to district already on line TCP IP Invalid sign on message TCP IP Invalid message header 460932001 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 9020 10001 10003 10004 10006 10009 10013 10014 10015 10022 10024 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 10047 GE Security TOPAZ System Error Codes TCP IP Invalid Message length TCP IP Invalid receive state TCP IP Invalid transmit state TCP IP Out of mailboxes TCP IP Invalid mailbox TCP IP Thread not found fo
125. COMMENTS gqe fh4japlesunh Below is a sample of a displayed System Error events report RECALL SYSTEM ERROR EVENTS EVENT 1 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASK INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dms1lscpder dt EVENT 2 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASE INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dms1rctEg00 dt Below is a list of the types of event that will be recalled from the Other Events Report if All is selected Acknowledgement Ack Timeout Commentary system Error Remote Control Local Time Command Alarm Masking Routed Alarm Secure Area Monitor GE Security February 2 2005 6 49 TOPAZ Software User Guide Recall Access Events Report The Recall Access Events Report will recall all access events for a selected time period and all security areas and all readers or a specific security area or reader To navigate to the Recall Access Events Report page from within the report pages click the Recall Events tab button in the top navigation bar and then click the Access Events tab button The following page will display Recall Access Events Display Report o Log File Disk Drive Ic gt Display Report Output To File e a KITA Cardholders AS 5 E ME Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removable disk has been inserted
126. Click on the Internet icon 5 Click on the Custom Level button 6 Under Cookies under Allow per session cookies not stored select Enable e For Microsoft Windows 2000 service pack 2 is required Service Pack 2 can be obtained from Microsoft e The workstation s on line event printer must be configured to print directly to the printer In Window s Printer Properties on the Scheduling Tab select Print directly to Printer e Eltron Photo badging printers uses Eltron s printer drivers Please use the Add Printer wizard to add the printer driver The drivers are located on this CD in the Printers Eltron directory e Fargo Photo badging printers uses Fargo s printer drivers Please use the Add Printer wizard to add the printer driver The drivers are located on this CD in the Printers Fargo directory NOTE If using a K panel ribbon you need to specify how the resin panel should be applied when printing This can be done in the Advanced tab of the printer s Document Defaults Click on Ribbon and change the Front and Back Option to Color on both sides Then click on Black panel options and set it to Use Always The settings are normally used when printing bar codes for infrared readers e The Winnov video capture card may fail to register into NT resulting in a black picture when attempting to take a photo If this occurs click on Browse This CD then double click on
127. DS AAA B 1 Ala DUG INUMDCS sora as ars B 6 Reader Physical Alarm Zone Numbers 0 0000 ee eee eae B 6 Reader Logical Alarm Zone Numbers o o o oocooo ee eee eee B 6 RIN ZONG INDULNUMDEES seur ii Vee ee ee eee ery ad B 6 Rea NUMDES nas in Ea ici a td ita sia a ais B 8 ACU2RT and ACU2RT4 Relay NUMbers o oo ooooocoonon eee B 8 APPENDIX C OPERATOR IYPE FUNC HONS serra Ad ie ee wee Game are C 1 APPENDIX D Anti Passback OVCIVICW oi A A AA a D 1 Sep Ste SENGS ici a ld A A do ome et D 1 Sep SEGUY ATC ici e A ves di Ad Re D 1 T 4 460932001 GE Security Table of Contents Contror RCSCL APB osas rd tone ee NOA o oes D 2 APPENDIX E CARD FIELD DEFINITIONS 2422 ste ieee cheemen A EEA AA DA ERA E 1 APPENDIX F USB GAMER A east a ORES a DE dE A A ROG A RR A AA F 1 Installing USB Camera Driver 0 0 0 0 000 ee eee eens F 1 Camera oc rta A A Race Oe F 2 Camera SOLO CE uersu seach ii A e da F 4 GEOSSAR wiss c erena E ae cet oye ete a G 1 Glossary of TEMS ri al a A Med E Sed ed ete iD is G 1 INDE Nu io adidas 1 GE Security February 2 2005 T 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank 460932001 GE Security Chapter 1 Getting Started About the TOPAZ System The GE Security s TOPAZ Security System is a PC based Facility Security System for access control alarm monitoring interactive color graphics photo badging and CCTV Closed Circuit TV Control The system uses
128. Dial up Field Panel page 29 For information on how to generate a list all the configured Instruction messages see Reports Instruction Message Setup Report on page 6 24 Save After all the changes have been made to the Dial up Field Panel page you must click on the Sae O Save button for the changes to be saved to the server s database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data External Modem Setup The switches on the back of the modem must be configured with switches annn 5 and 6 set to the UP position all others should be in the down position as shown to the right JL 12345678 NOTE You will NOT need to install the modem or drivers in Windows When you power up the external modem LEDs AA TR and CS should be illuminated all other should be off Software Setup After installing the modem make sure dial up panels are configured in the Topaz server software as SCP Dial Up set to 9600 baud No parity and Active From Control and Service Functions you must setup the modem Choose Initialize
129. Event button on the right side of the page The following page will display j Operators Y Time Sched Wsecurity Area Access Grp EZ Settings Custom Fid Facility Code Variable Crd Alarm Opt Y Holidays Event Name ACCESS AUTHORIZED ANTI PASSBACK VIOLATION i AREA AT MAXIMUM LOADING AREA DISABLED AREA UNSECURED ALARMS MASKED DELAYED ALARM UNMASKING STARTED DELAYED ALARM UNMASKING STARTED OVERRIDE ACCESS AUTHORIZED ENTRY GRANTED TO MASK ALARMS a mE HEZE a ae To select how events related to access attempts will be handled 1 Select from the list of Event Names by scrolling through the list and clicking on the name of the event to be configured Acknowledge Select Yes No if the operator should or should not be required to acknowledge the event when it occurs Display Select Yes No if the workstation should or should not display the Access Event when it Occurs Print Select Yes No if the events printer should or should not print the Access Event when it Occurs Auto Acknowledge If the Auto Acknowledge field is set to Yes the reader event will be dis played in the alarm queue window and will not require any action by the operator It will clear after a period of time The Auto Acknowledge field is not affected by the Acknowledge field 2 After all Events have been setup click the Sae O Save button to save all changes to the Server 3 After clicking the Save button the message Ope
130. Explorer Name Panel Category Status ACU 1 LOW BATT Gaslite Main System Input Offline ACU 1 POWER Gashte Main System Input Offline ACU 1 TAMPER Gaslite Main System Tamper Offline 1 BACK DOOR DC Gaslite Main Door Contact 6 Offline Print To check the status of an alarm point scroll through the list of configured alarm points until the name of the alarm point you are looking for appears in the list The color of the text for the alarm point name shows the status of the alarm point The color definitions are listed below Status Color Masked Blue Secure Green Alarm Red Open Peach Short Peach Ground Peach Circuit Fault Peach NOTE The status of Alarms may also be checked on the Control Alarm Point page If you want to print the contents of the Status window click on the Print button at the bottom of the page 5 4 460932001 GE Security Relay Status Relay Status Page The Relay Status page allows you to check the status of any configured output relay in the TOPAZ system To navigate to the Relay Status page click on the button next to Output Relay on the main Status page or click the Relay tab button at the top of the window while in any Status page The following page will display Panel DEMO RELAY 0 Gashte Main DEMO RELAY 1 Gaslite Main DEMO RELAY 2 Gaslite Main I DEMO RELAY 3 Gaslite Main Print To check the status of an output relay scroll through the list of pre configured output relays until the name o
131. Fail Safe Fail Secure 8 42 FAO E hoe ah ane Ate td A 1 Field Panel DARU socia add 8 27 External Modem Setup 8 29 Ignore Daylight Savings 8 28 Setup Report o oocooooooo o 6 6 Time Difference Offset 8 28 Field Panel Control 4 13 Dial up Panel 4 14 Download Data 4 13 Flash PROM o o o ococonono o 4 14 Field Panel Status o o 5 2 File Name POLO adams atera dto dj 3 13 Firmware Updates Field Panel 4 14 Rasmi PROM uso riada a aia een 4 14 Floor Definition Elevator Control 8 34 Floor Name Elevator Control 8 34 Frequently Asked Questions A 1 G Generate Employee Reports 6 60 Getting Started asii ras 1 2 Global Help P 8 1 25 E See eee OOK eee G 1 Grant Access on Duress 7 16 l 4 Revision A H Hardware Alar PONT sai A 8 47 Elevator Cab Setup 8 32 Elevator CONTO 0224 45 04 wae da 8 30 Field Panel e030 coe dann mida bla Y 8 23 LAN Communication 8 4 Public Access Elevator 8 36 Reader Options 0 2 8 45 Reader Setup o oooooooo 8 39 ROAY Kok Aa ha ee Ad eS 8 54 DCM PORE ancianas aoa ace a a 8 2 Workstation Setup 8 6 Hardware Button 8
132. File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 28 460932001 GE Security Elevator Control Setup Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the PEA Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Elevator Control Setup Elevator Cab Configuration Elevator Cab Name Elev Cab 1 om Building 1 Scp Device d Reader 0 Operation Mode Standard Mode Input Type Input Is Relay Number Cab Start Floor 1 Skipped Floor o Skipped Floor Count 0 Relay Sec Area Floor Name 0 FLOOR 2 nd Floor on Building 1 1 PLOOR 3 3rd Floo
133. Guide System Device Events 6 43 Search User Actions cierra ee be we 6 40 Cardholder 0 00 eee eens 3 4 Recall Other Events Report 6 46 Security Area Recall System Device Events Report Options 6 43 Alarm Point Options 8 48 Recall User Actions Report 6 40 Anti Passback Control 7 11 Record Last Changed 3 5 Setup Report 006 6 16 Refresh Main Frame 1 36 Time Delay for Re entry D 1 Relay Security Area Page o ooooo 7 10 de energize 00 eee eee 4 7 Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facility Energize ico Exe ote Bowed 4 7 G 4 PUSO suea 24 2b ected ead aw hae eee et 4 7 Sentinel Driver Installation 1 21 8 14 Setup Report o oo ooooooo 6 12 Serial Port Relay Active When Alarm is Masked 8 55 Setup Report 2006 6 14 Relay Control Serial Port Page o oooooooooo 8 2 Color Legend ooooooooo 4 6 Serial Port Parity 8 3 De energiZe o ooo oooooooonooo 4 7 Server Installation 1 14 ENSTOIZO aba Sra da dod eK aie 4 7 Service Pulse Relay o ooooooooo 4 7 Database Page 04 4 15 Slash oe 4 a eet ed 4 6 Panel Page 0000 eee eeee 4 13 Relay Control Buttons 4 7 Settings Relay Control Page
134. Hra 1 MFG OFFICE 3 Business Hrs 1 OUTPUT GROUP 4 GROUP MAME Executive Officers 34 TZ 54 T SYSTEM Always ACCOUNTING Alvas HFG OFFICE Always END OF ACCESS GROUP CONFIGURATION GE Security February 2 2005 6 19 TOPAZ Software User Guide Time Schedule Setup Report The Time Schedule Setup Report recalls how Time Schedules have been setup To navigate to the Time Schedule Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Time Sched tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display r Elevator Time Schedule Setup Display Report G Print Report o aati All Time Schedules Yes gt wild Mb i Time Schedule Name Output To File e Output File Name Run Report WU Cancel Report All Time Schedules If Yes is selected the drop down list of configured time schedules will disappear and all configured Time Schedules will be listed on the report If No is selected then a time schedule must be selected from the drop down list under Time Schedule Name Time Schedule Name From the drop down list of pre configured Time Schedules scroll through and select the Time Schedule to be recalled in the report by clicking on the Time Schedule Name Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the rep
135. In order to remove an alarm from the queue you must first acknowledge it and then clear it as described below If you have the Video Option the alarm event will have the word video in the information text When you select an alarm with video the Video button will become available to the left of the queue i l 7 A Af lend A T See 31 00 Main Entrance HO When an alarm is activated video is recorded and the clip is linked to that alarm event As long as the alarm point remains active this is the only video clip that will be linked to that alarm event If the alarm point is secured but has not been cleared from the queue and an second event activates the same alarm point the new alarm event will produce a new video clip of the second triggering event However if the alarm has not been cleared from the Alarm Queue the only video that can be viewed from the alarm queue will be the first video associated with that alarm point The later video clips will have to be accessed from the Event Queue See The Video Option on page 2 1 For any alarm in the queue that is linked to the Color Graphics MAP feature you can triple click on that alarm or click on the MAP button to bring up the Color Graphics map assigned to it For more details on Color Graphics see Map Button on page 10 1 GE Security February 2 2005 1 31 TOPAZ Software User Guide Acknowledging an Alarm Event To acknowledge an Alarm event click on the t
136. MANUAL NUMBER 460932001 Revision A February 2 2005 1 00 V H GE Security TOPAZ Software User Guide GE Security e 12345 SW Leveton Drive e Tualatin e Oregon e 97062 800 547 2556 www GESecurity com TOPAZ Software User Guide Revision Level Revision B Revision B 1 a Revision B 1 b Revision B 2 Revision C Revision C 1 Revision C 2 Revision C 3 Issue Date January 3 2003 Added Added Added Added Added Modified Modified Removed Removed March 18 2003 Added May 5 2003 Modified Modified Modified Modified June 16 2003 Modified Modified July 9 2003 Replaced Removed July 31 2003 Modified August 11 2003 Added Updated August 19 2003 Removed Added August 25 2003 Added Added 460932001 Revisions Description Alarm Reporting Delay to Alarm Point Setup Public Access configuration screen Auto Acknowledge for reader events Reset button on Control Services Panel screen Operators Type screen Inactivity Timer System Requirements Alarm Queue footer buttons relocated Clear button on Facility Code screen Clear button on Alarm Categories screen Logfile Reset Options on Backup Cover Artwork to GE Standard Repagination of Appendices for better use Site Setting page to add Priority O check box Variable Card Page section System Requirements Reader Options page to include IKE Reader Allows Ingress screen Illustrations to include the GE logo R
137. MER VIOLATION e A cardholder has presented a valid card and or PIN and access was authorized but the cardholder tried to enter or leave the same security area before the Anti Passback Timer Delay for Re entry had passed ACCESS AUTHORIZED TAILGATE VIOLATION e The cardholder has presented a valid card and or PIN and access was authorized but the cardholder was Tailgating ACCESS AUTHORIZED AREA UNSECURED ALARMS MASKED e Access was Authorized and the Alarms Masked Unsecured ACCESS AUTHORIZED DELAYED ALARM UNMASKING STARTED e The cardholder has presented a valid card and PIN to Unmask the area and request was authorized and the alarm delay timer was started allowing the cardholder time to exit the area without set off the alarm ACCESS AUTHORIZED ENTRY GRANTED TO MASK ALARMS e The cardholder has presented a valid card and PIN to Mask and enter the area The request was authorized and the alarms were Mask ACCESS AUTHORIZED EXIT PUSH BUTTON e This is to notify you that someone has exited the area using the Exit Push Button Because it was the Push Button the system cannot give a Cardholder Name This GE Security February 2 2005 B 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide event is only available on the ACU 2 Card Reader ACCESS AUTHORIZED FACILITY CODE Access was granted based only on the Correct Company code and Facility code on the card Access on Facility code is set up in Reader Configuration ACCESS AUTHORIZED FLOOR OK
138. Menu will appear as shown below and provide a selection list If the Install Menu as shown below does not appear within one minute follow this procedure 1 Open Windows Explorer 2 Double click on the drive of the CD 3 Inthe root directory double click on the file start bat The TOPAZ Install screen will display NOTE Before installing the TOPAZ Workstation make sure that Topaz server has been installed and that the computers are communicating If you have Internet Explorer 6 0 already installed on your computer check to see if the title bar states Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by GE Security If not you must install the Virtual Machine that is located on the CD For more information see Installing Virtual Machine on page 1 9 GE Security February 2 2005 8 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide 1 Topaz Installation CD Click Install TOPAZ to start the installation setup Topaz x The Wise Installation Wizard iz extracting files to your local computer please walt Eancel If this is the first time TOPAZ has been installed on your computer and the Microsoft NET Framework is not installed the Wise Installation Wizard dialog window shown above will display Extracting and installing the NET framework may take several minutes Please wait while the Hourglass progress icon rotates When the framework is completed the TOPAZ Installation Wizard will begin If the NET framework is already
139. OTE Because of the versatility of the software which allows you to configure your own icon it is possible that the colors explained above are not the actual col ors used Ask the system administrator if your system has custom configured icons and confirm your systems icon colors represent the different alarm con ditions GE Security February 2 2005 10 27 Topaz Software User Guide Save your configuration changes by clicking the ed Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen NOTE If you do not save your changes to the configuration when you exit the pro gram all the changes will be lost Adding Readers to Map 1 In the Device Tree locate the reader to add Place the mouse pointer on the B Reader icon click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the icon onto the map and release the mouse button When you release the mouse button it will change to the Reader Locked icon If additional custom icon groups have been created for doors after dragging the reader icon on to the map and releasing the mouse button the Icon Groups window will be displayed Select the icon group you want to use for the reader icon you placed on the map by clicking on the icon group name After you have clicked on the name of a icon group the four icons configured for the group will appear in the blocks below each of the point designations To move the icon to a different location on the map c
140. PAZ Systems software A workstation can be a server or an auxiliary PC networked to the server G 4 Revision A GE Security Index A About the TOPAZ System 1 1 Access Assign Group to cardholder 3 9 Company Mode 8 45 Event Report o o oo oo oo 6 50 Facility Code o ooooo o 8 45 Access Code Definitions B 1 Access Events Comments 0 1 35 Detail Information 1 3 Setup Report ooooooooooo o 6 26 Access Group SOUP cocinados add da 7 13 Access Groups Setup Report oo oooooooo 6 18 Access Privileges Cardholder nnana diria 3 7 Access Trace By Cardholder 4 8 By Reader 0 00 cece eee 4 9 STE ip cti ed 4 8 o A aus Bape Goes ae Bee 4 10 Access under Duress 7 16 ACK BUNOS id ad he ona hee do 1 32 Acknowledge A Bt create een Ges 1 32 A Rees Atl eke 1 35 Operator Failed To 8 49 Using Color Graphics Map to 10 12 Actions Reader Options 8 45 Activation Date o o oooooooo 3 7 ActiveX Settings 0 o 1 8 ACUSE e P 6 REPAS OF uri P 7 ACU Field Panel 8 23 Add Access Groups 20000 eee 7 13 Alarm Instruction 1 29 ANG A eta larder ae semen a 3 1 Custom Field Names 7 19 Elevator Control Setup
141. Point Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Alarm Point tab button in the top navigation bar The System Setup report pages will display CENA sn seu I A ST Security Area Time Sched Holidays Instructions Alarm Point Setup Print Report Output To File All Alarm Points Yes Alarm Point Name Apr E ane Display Report a te E Alarm Points If Yes is selected all Alarm Points will be listed on the report If No is selected then an alarm point must be selected from the drop down list under Alarm Point Name Alarm Point Name From the drop down list of pre configured alarm points scroll through and select the alarm point to be recalled in the report by clicking on the Alarm Point Name Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For exam
142. RICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION OPERATOR TYPE CONFIGURATION NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Alarms Only ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENU MENT MENT MENT MENT MENU MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT MENT February 2 2005 Additional SetupCtrl Bac Ctrl Backup Cardholder Ctrl Trace Ctrl Passhack Control Guard TotCtrl Out Corel Output Ctrl Reader Ctrl rea Loadinlefine F Define Panel Hardware Define LAN Multiple Server Define Define Define Define Define Define Reader Relay Remote Cobefine F Port Video WS Batch Jddd DeleteProcess Process Employeed uto Con Auto Contig Ctrl Service TOPAZ Software User Guide Capabilities Report The Setup Capabilities Report provides detailed information as to the maximum capabilities that are configured on your system For example how many card readers you can address the number of cardholders you may add show optional programs supported by your system and located at the bottom of the report will show how much space is left in your TOPAZ archive file To navigate to the Setup Capabilities Report page click the Report button in the
143. RINT YN NO LUTOCLEAR Y N NO ACCESS EVENT CODE NUMBER 2 DESCRIPTION ACCESS AUTHORIZED FACILITY CODE ACENOWULEDGEMENT N NO DISPLAY Y N YES PRINT Ni NO LUTOCLEAR YM NO ACCESS EVENT CODE NUMBER 3 DESCRIPTION ACCESS ON COMPANY CODE WRONG FACILITY CODE GE Security February 2 2005 TOPAZ Software User Guide Elevator Control Setup Report The Elevator Control Setup Report recalls how elevators have been setup To navigate to the Elevator Control Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Elevator tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Display Report fe Print Report amp Output To File gt E Repo Output File Name Hardware Run Report E i di i E T mr Cancel Report The report will list all Elevator Controls Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to
144. RM GRACE PERIOD N No LOCK DOOR AFTER DOOR CLOSES N No MASE LOCK MONITOR DURING VALID YM No MAG LOCK BOND SENSOR Y N No OPERATE DOOR STRIKE WHEN EXIT PUSH BUTTON USED Y N YES EXIT PUSH BUTTON ZONE DEFAULT DOOR CONTACT ZOME DEFAULT DOOR STRIKE RELAY NUMBER 16 DORESS VIDEO SWITCHER ALARM NUMBER O READER FORMAT WIEGAND 6 OR 37 BIT VARIABLE CARD FORMAT O GE Security February 2 2005 6 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide Relay Setup Report The Relay Setup Report tells how relays are configured setup in the system To navigate to the Relay Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Relay tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Display Report fe E Print Report e E E Output To File gt Output File Name Y k Run Report E b Ce Repa Cancel Report The report will list all configured relays Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the
145. S EE is a 00 DICES DICES 00 DICES oe DICES can PNM ANAA A GA 0 M 0 0 0 0 0 5M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 33 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 40 OO oo oo oo OO 39 dg OO OO OO OO 15 OO Oe DURATION HH OU DD 00 00 00 D0 D00 00 A 0D 00 0D 00 0D api OO D00 DD0 D00 D00 Sal D0 aea ES m SS A em A e E m A me EE a P EA e IE a EA m E a EA me A S E ea ES e A e A m ES a A e E Gd MM a 04 02 17 13 47 59 START TIME FLAGS 351 YY MM DD HH MM 33 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 40 oo oo oo oo oo 39 dg OO OO OO OO 15 OO Oz 04 02 17 04 02 17 040217 040217 113 a la a a TI sa aa ao dd 19 220 41 oy lt y The table below describes all the fields report columns and line entries that can be included in an Alarm History report Whether or not the field is included is a function of the type of report and the report options specified 460932001 GE Security Alarm History Reports Start Date Time Beginning date time for the reporting period you are requesting End Date Time Ending date time of reporting period TYPE Depending on the level of the report this report column identifies a report line entry as either CAT Category or TRB Trouble C no category number There can be multiple category or trouble number report or T no trouble number l
146. System Error Codes Not enough memory available to open logical channel Attempted to reference a logical channel number not defined Maximum file descriptor ID number exceeded Illegal FIS operation type code Error freeing LIS memory block Unbalanced double quotes found in a screen schema SCRIO error value Illegal screen commentaries by basic strings SCRIO error values Screen schema name not alphanumeric SCRIO error values Number of screen variables tildes does not equal number of fields SCRIO error values screen field number duplicated in commentary SCRIO error values Screen field numbers too large SCRIO error values Illegal screen field commentary SCRIO error values screen field size missing in commentary SCRIO error values screen field size too large in commentary SCRIO error values Screen field variable type missing in commentary SCRIO error values or define InvalidRelay for Pecos Interface Screen field I O type missing in commentary SCRIO error values Illegal screen field variable type in commentary SCRIO error values Illegal screen I O type in commentary SCRIO error values screen filter size incorrect SCRIO error values screen variable initial data size incorrect SCRIO error values Screen variable pointer not on even boundary SCRIO error values Screen parameter value too large SCRIO error values screen variable field not found SCRIO error values Screen prompt timed out SCRIO erro
147. TWARE PRODUCT j 7 do not accept the license agreement Wise Installation Wizard Heset Back Next gt Cancel The next window will be the End User License Agreement Read it carefully then select accept the license agreement The next button will become available once the agreement is accepted Click Next to continue GE Security February 2 2005 8 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide ie Topaz Setup E JO A E User Information Enter the following information to personalize your installation Full Mame Sichyler Henderson Organization GE Security The settings for this application can be installed for the current user or for all users that share this computer You must have administrator rights to install the settings for all users Install this application for f Anyone who uses this computer Only for me Marjorie Wise Installation Wizard Back Next gt Cancel 4 The next window asks you to enter User Information Type the name of the user in to the Full Name field and the name of the organization into the Organization field Select the radio button beside Anyone who uses this computer This is used to permit the system to communicate with and respond to the Video Recorder Click Next gt to continue iF Topaz Setup E JO x LE d Destination Folder Select a folder where the application will be installed The Wise Installation Wizard will install the files for Topaz in
148. This changes the black outline of the icon and area name to a selected color The area of the map that covers the security area may be outlined as well The color of the outline on the map will be the same color as the outline of the icon as in the example below Area Unmasked Area Masked Pat ena mle pr eee eee eee ae e a DODDA ny igs eee 3 gt He i h i h i a Ea E Notice that the alarm icons change from green to blue when the area is masked Masking Security reas To Mask or Unmask a security area right click on the security area icon to display a menu next to the icon From the menu you can select any of the options that are not grayed out In the following example the only options are Mask and Toggle Mask Any alarms assigned to the area that are configured as non maskable will not be masked FA Toggle Mask Click on the option you want to select it You can also place the mouse arrow on the icon highlighting it This will make the Mask Unmask and Toggle Mask icons appear in the top left portion of the toolbar While the security area icon is highlighted click the desired button on the toolbar Camera Icon Camera Icon optional Camera Icon optional The camera icon When clicked it will display the camera window which shows the live Camera Image and any control options available for the camera 10 8 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics The following example shows the c
149. Type by default all the functions are listed under Allowed lf you want to restrict an Operator Type to have limited use of a function 1 Select the function under Allowed by clicking on it If you want to select more than one function at a time you can use these shortcuts e hift Click If you click on one function and move the cursor to another function and then hold the SHIFT key down and click you can select ALL functions from the first to the second e CTRL Click If you hold the CTRL key down and click on one function you can select or unselect it 2 Click on the gt Right Arrow to move that function to the Restricted list 3 Then change its Level of Restrictions as described below For a list of operator functions see Appendix C Operator Type Functions on page C 1 Restricted If you want to remove the restrictions from a function to make that function fully allowed 1 Select the function under Restricted by clicking on it If you want to select more than one function at a time you can use these shortcuts described above 2 Click on the 4 Left Arrow to move that function to the Allowed list Level of Restriction If one or more functions are listed under Restricted the Level of Restriction field will display There are two choices for level of Restriction No Access the default or Display Only GE Security February 2 2005 7 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide To change the Level of Restriction click on
150. USB Port you should see the following screen with a live image from the camera F 2 460932001 GE Security Camera Setup bat YidCap File Edit Options Capture Help Audio Format Video Format Video Source video Display Compression Preview Overlay W Microsoft WDM Image Capture Win32 Version 5 0 2134 1 From the Options drop down list select Video Format ideo Format Eo jx Stream Settings Digital Image Format Resolution Pixel Depth bite and Compression Size bytes AQ we 1420 460800 From the Resolution drop down list select 640 x 480 From the Pixel Depth and Compression drop down list select 1420 Click OK to continue Exit the program NOTES e Make sure that the resolution and color of your computer s monitor is set to 1024 x 768 and 16 bit High Color e Before taking photos you must run the Camera Select software GE Security Topaz Software User Guide Camera Select You must tell the system which camera you have connected Browse the software installation CD or the software directory on the C Drive of the computer and locate the cameraselecte exe icon Rt cameraselect exe Double click on the Es icon to start the software AT Camera selection x C Logitek QuickCam 3000 Logitek ClickS mart 510 Select the camera you are using by clicking the radio button Then click the OK to complete the selection process You
151. Up to 32 characters Name e This data usually contains the name e This is a significant field and is the actual Card Serial CARDSN Numeric 1 to 8 digits Number e This is a reference field and does not affect access control operation The number represents a card s serial number and is typically printed on the card This is not to be confused with the actual encoded card number described above number encoded on the access card along with the Company and Facility Codes Each cardholder must be assigned a unique Card De DACTDATE Numeric Date YYMMDD activation Date Delineated e This field defines the date a card is to with slash automatically become de activated Access marks will be denied after this date YY represents the last two digits of the year For example 1997 would be entered as 97 MM is a two digit number representing the year 01 through 12 DD is a two digit number representing the day of the month 01 through 31 The system defaults at twenty years from the date when the card was assigned Department DEPT Alphanumeric This is the value that was entered in the Department field of the cardholder information screen Emergency EMERNAME Alphanumeric Up to 32 characters Contact Name e This is a reference field for the name of a cardholder s primary contact in the event of an emergency and may be used at the option of the system owner card number which is nine digits long If assigned n
152. User Guide Add Areas for Masking 1 To select the Masking Area that the cardholder will be authorized to Mask Unmask click on the name of the area listed in the Available Masking Areas window and click the gt Right Arrow button to add the Masking Area to the Selected Masking Areas window Repeat this step until all desired Masking Areas are added to the Selected Masking Areas window 2 To remove a selected area from the Selected Masking Areas window click on the Masking Area name to remove and click the Left Arrow button This will move the area back into the Available Masking Areas window 3 Once all the Masking data for the cardholder has been selected click the Sae O Save button at the bottom left side of the window to save the masking configuration information to the database 4 After clicking the Save button one of the following messages will appear e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Do not click on Clear button before clicking on the Save button or newly entered data will be lost Using Keypad Masking Keypad Masking allows the cardholder to mask unmask the alarms associated with a security area by using their PIN as described b
153. Y AREA SYSTEM DOOL Roi CARDHOLDER MAME Bogata Janet I ACCESS POINT DESCRIPTION 6 52 460932001 GE Security Recall Alarm Events Report Recall Alarm Events Report The Recall Alarm Events Report will recall all alarm events for a selected time period for all security areas and all alarm points or a specific security area or alarm point To navigate to the Recall Alarm Events Report from within Report pages click the Recall Events tab button in the top navigation bar and then click the Alarm Event tab button The following page will display Recall Alarm Events Display Report al Print Report e Log File Disk Drive Ic PrimtReport Output To File emey an 22000 sf y Output File Name O oS 2 EREA mee o 2 Security Areas Alarm Points Cancel Report Uy Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removable disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report sh
154. Z Software User Guide 5 Topaz Setup JO x License Agreement Tou must agree with the license agreement below to proceed END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GE Infrastructure Software This GE Infrastructure End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and GE Infrastructure for GE Infrastructure software which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA Ifyou do not agree to the terms of this EULA do not install or use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT 7 do not accept the license agreement Heset Back Next gt Cancel Wise Installation Wizard The next window will be the End User License Agreement Read it carefully then select accept the license agreement The next button will become available once the agreement is accepted Click Next to continue 5 Topaz Setup _ User Information Enter the following information to personalize your installation Full Marne Sichyler Henderson Organization GE Security The settings for this application can be installed for the current user or for all users that share this computer You must have administrator rights to install the settings for all users Install this application for Anyone
155. a a iol dn eles Sea ce wk ede a S 3 10 Introduction to Photo Badging te soc domotica bh a E Pw ew ee eee ee 3 10 TAG MOTO IP AGC tii ad th sete Os we die Wo ak sea ad 3 11 WaASKINGi AGS Vai dias Rie oe aan a ww AS ah te aera we hie Bar dog Bones wet ene 3 16 IMPORMALON Page Vx SU AA A A Beane ee 3 20 Custom Fields PATO vto ron Gots Beret a ee ri oe goed ee a acd Sod td e BE 3 22 Balch AGGur AGG ai aa ii ds ad laa 3 24 Batch Delete Page iii a A A ai A a A a 3 28 CHAPTER 4 CONTROE BUTTON seen nasal idear aos eset OAE 4 1 Reader COMO RA a a ed O 4 2 Alarm Point Control Page 0 0 ee eee teen nas 4 4 Relay COMMON Pad iii deca rider nda 4 6 ACCESS Mace Fages choanenn a ea ehh Gan hues Gas aie eae ea Sn a he Smee ee 4 8 Reset APB Page Anti Passback 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee tent e eens 4 11 SONCE dias ea a e aid 4 13 Panel AGS estarias hidra dd dida aii dd edad dd edad 4 13 Database Prades cot ecg tye ae aaa God aaa da ada aaa 4 15 Back Up 1 Restore Database Page o ooooononnon eee ees 4 18 CHAPTER 5 STATUS BUTTON ds e a e 5 1 Field Panel StalUs Pad rial as E ai Ge Ma Ce ee e Lee Reise ee 5 2 Reader Stalls Pale nd a A dd o 5 3 Alarm PON AUS Pages 2 2449 sees dee DA a asia 5 4 Relay Status Page surta A ORS A E A mew aia dace Ree 5 5 CHAPTER 6 REPORTS BUTTON io sta tai did is is ai 6 1 Cardholder Database Reports Page oooooono eee ee eee ene 6 2 System Setup Report Page
156. a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection 6 24 460932001 GE Security Instruction Message Setup Report Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Instruction Message Setup 2 SS A e INSTRUCTION MESSAGE CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTION MESSAGE N
157. ack outline To relocate the icon click and hold the left mouse button to drag the icon to a new location on the map NOTE When placing a new security area on the map the icon will default to unmasked area icon even if the area is masked When the color graphics is back online it will check for the current status of the area and change the icon accordingly Security Area Unmasked Area is unmasked and will report any alarms generated that are assigned to the area Security Area Masked Area is masked The only alarms that will be a reported are non maskable and trouble alarms To delete or remove an icon from the map click and drag the icon back to the tree window and release the mouse button The icon will disappear and the red check mark on the icon in the tree will be removed Save your configuration changes by clicking the icon in the center of the toolbar the top of your screen 10 30 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Color Coding Security Areas The security area can be color coded and an outline of the area can be drawn in the same color When the area is masked the outline of the area will be filled with an overlay of mesh the same color as set for the security area as shown below Area Unmasked Area Masked ee MT LA If A e o EEE EI ACCOUNTING To color code and outline the security area you must be in the configuration mode After placing the security area on the map double click t
158. ader Name has been repeated Enter a new name and try again e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data 8 46 460932001 GE Security Alarm Points Alarm Point Setup Page The Alarm Point page is used to add modify or delete existing alarm points The Alarm Point page has two sub pages Setup and Options They are used to configure more specific information for the alarm point e Alarm Point Setup Page e Alarm Point Options Page To navigate to the Alarm Point page within the Hardware pages click on the Alarm Point tab button at the top of the window or from the main Hardware screen click the Alarm Point button on the right side of the screen The following page will display ee E ie Serial Port 1 LAN Comm Workstation Field Panel Y Reader l Relay TA Video b Options Alarm Name ACCOUNTING FO Alarm Input Points 13 ACCOUNTING FO amp amp E A IG ETERNA ee e Field Panel Gasiite Main Active e ACCOUNTING y Input Number Address f o Alarm Category Forced Open 7 Priority 5 y Alarm Instruction l Forced Open y User ACK Required Alarm Workstation riche E Alarm Can be Ma
159. ain when installing the recorder that a static IP address is assigned to it Video Recorder Name The Video Recorder Name field assigns a name to the recorder that can then be selected on various pages of the TOPAZ system This name must be unique and clearly identify the recorder It could reference the location of the cameras that it will be controlling For example Administration South or Building 1 West GE Security February 2 2005 8 63 TOPAZ Software User Guide Internet TCP IP Address The Internet TCP IP Address field is used to connect the recorder to the LAN and to the TOPAZ system The address must be a static IP IP addresses should be issued by your IT department and configured on the recorder before completing this form save Add Click the Save Add button to save the configuration to the database Connect to Video Recorder nn i Once you have saved the configuration click the Connect to Video Recorder a E the correct recorder has been configured button to verify that This button will launch the Wave Browser This browser allows the user to connect to a video recorder and test the various cameras by viewing live feed from that camera Address 2 http 10 0 0 67 wrcontrollte ssi Go Links gt ave Browser 110 0 0 67 Pwd Live Connect Goto a 2 2004 ka 6 Camera 6 are E 12 00 00 AM For information about how to use the Wave Browser refer to the documentation that came w
160. alarm queue and click the button The name of the operator currently logged on to the system will be recorded in the Acked By field NOTE The only field on the Access Detail page that can be changed or entered at anytime is Comments To close the Access Details window click the X in the upper right corner of the window CLEAR Alarm Event The CLEAR CLEAR button allows the operator to clear alarms After an acknowledged alarm has returned to normal condition the color of the text will turn to green and the event may be cleared from the Alarm Queue window To clear an alarm from the Alarm Queue window click on the alarm to highlight it and then click the CLEAR button DETAIL Button The DETAIL DETAIL button will display a sub window with the details for the alarm that is currently selected in the Alarm Queue MAP Button The 1 MAP MAP button will allow you to call up the available maps for alarms However to access this Map feature under Hardware Workstation you must have Alarm Graphics selected For more details on Color Graphics see MAP Button on page 10 1 Video Button E eee The VIDEO Video button will allow you to call up the camera that was linked to the alarm event that is highlighted in the alarm queue Click the Video button and the Video window will display as shown below When you click the View Event button the window will change to the clip of the event This shows the actual alarm event star
161. alf of the cardholders as the second Access Group ACCGRP2 using ACCGRP 1 as a filter would only return half of the cardholders who have Building 1 assigned to them Anti Passback APBINDEX Index Numeric The anti passback index is a unique number assigned to each card holder It defines the location within the anti passback table that records the current location of that cardholder This field is of little value as a filter since it does not tell the current location of the cardholder but only the location in the system where that information is currently stored Card Activation ACT DATE Numeric YYYYMMDD Date Delineated e This field defines the date a card is to with slash automatically become activated Access will marks be denied prior to this date YY YY represents the four digits of the year Examples 1995 or 2004 MM is a two digit number representing the year 01 through 12 DD is a two digit number representing the day of the month 01 through 31 The system defaults at the date the card is assigned GE Security February 2 2005 E 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide leading zeros 0 to complete the nine digit format The format of this field is compcode Functional Protocol Field Field Name Name Type of Value Description Card Number CARD Customized A unique decimal number from 000000000 Numeric 999999999 facilitycode cardnumber Example 1234 1234 1234567890 Cardholder s CARDNAME Alphanumeric
162. amera window with the location of the pan amp tilt Zoom focus iris preset features and how they operate Most cameras do not have all of these features Only the features that are available and configured for the camera will appear in the window Lobby Camera 3 Ea Close camera WTF aw Live video from camera in this window ME E Preset A Sr Pan the camera by clicking the left 44 and right arrows Tilt the camera by clicking the up fi and down arrows Initiate the camera s preset by clicking the 3 button in the center of the arrows Zoom the camera by clicking the 2004 and buttons Focus the camera by clicking the oe and buttons Adjust the camera s iris by clicking the E and buttons which will lighten and darken the image Close the window by clicking on the Animated Camera button in the bottom left corner or the in the top right corner of the window GE Security February 2 2005 10 9 Topaz Software User Guide Map Links A Map Link allows you to display the maps that have been assigned to the icon Map Link Allows you to quickly jump directly to the map you assign to the icon To activate a jump double click on the Map Link icon Toolbar The toolbar at the top of the map window contains buttons you can click to e Manually scroll through the map tree e Automatically scroll through the map tree e Select configuration mode e Is
163. and Year on which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds on which the report should start Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year on which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds on which the report should stop GE Security February 2 2005 6 35 TOPAZ Software User Guide Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport
164. and assign your own group of icons to any alarm reader or relay Icons must be modified and configured using a bitmap program such as Paint All Icons should be saved in the TOPAZ aacgfx color graphics directory on your hard drive The standard size of icon is approximately 35 x 35 pixels but can be any size However the larger the icon the more area of the map it will cover NOTE You must already be familiar with configuring the Color Graphics system before creating and assigning custom icons You must be in the configuration mode before you begin Once in the configuration mode you will see the Icon Cfg tab in the tree window as shown below Only the Alarm Reader and Relay icons will show and are the only icons you can customize gt Relay Icons Modify Alarm Icon Group Category Clicking on the Alarm Icons icon will open the tree and expand the list of icon group alarm categories GE Security February 2 2005 10 39 Topaz Software User Guide The list of default alarm categories is list below and a portion of the tree shown to the right Category Description AC Power Failure Device Offline m Fenn B Forced Open Glass Break High Temperature Device Cfg Icon Cig on Sea oe Low Battery T AL Power Failure Device Offline Door Contact Duress Fire Alarm 3 System Input B System Tamper To assign a different icon to a category click on the icon group for the category you want to change The Icon
165. are in the configuration mode Caution While in the configuration alarms linked to icons on the maps will not be m updated until the color graphics system is placed back online Save Configuration Located in the center of the toolbar Will save the changes made to the configuration When you have finished with the configuration click the 5 Save Configuration button and the following message will display Hap Editor Ea gt a 2 Do you want to apply the changes to all the system 7 Click the Yes button to save the changes and then click the El Go to Online Mode button to return to the Online Mode Click the No button to return to the configuration mode without saving any changes When you click the 2 Go to Online Mode button to return to the online mode if you have made changes and have not clicked the 5 Save Configuration button the following message will display Hap Editor 5 mn 7 Changes not submitted will be lost Continue Clicking the Yes button will disregarded your changes and return to the online mode 10 18 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Clicking the No button will close the message and return you to the configuration mode You can then click the 5 save configuration button to save your changes and then click again the 2 button to return to the online mode While in the configuration mode the buttons on the toolbar will not change unless you click on a dev
166. assigned if the employee is to use a keypad reader The default value for this field is 000000 Date Card was LASTUPDT Date Display only last modified e This field shows the date the card was modified Cardholder ONLAFLAG Numeric This is a numeric value which indicates the type of Type cardholder A one 1 in this field indicates that the cardholder is an employee a nine 9 in this field indicates that the cardholder is a visitor Authorized ONLFLAGS Numeric This field contains a value which is the sum of all Privileges the optional privileges assigned to this cardholder For example if this field contains a one the cardholder is authorized to perform guard tours If the cardholder is authorized for other privileges the numerical value of those privileges is added to the guard tour value of One and the resulting sum is stored in this field Organization ORG Alphanumeric Up to 4 characters Number e This is a reference field that may be used at the option of the system owner GE Security February 2 2005 E 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Functional Protocol Field Field Name Name Type of Value Description Does PHOTOEXISTS Alphanumeric Yes or No Cardholder e This field will return a Yes if a photo exist in the Photo Exist cardholder record Photo file name PHOTOID Binary Up to 8 characters e This field shows the photo file name for the cardholder Emergency RELATION Alphanumeric Up to 16 characters Contact e This is
167. associated media and printed materials SOFTWARE PRODUCT or SOFTWARE By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terme of this EULA Ifyou do not agree to the terme of this EULA pou are nat authorized to use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Do pou accept all of the terme of the preceding License Agreement IF you choose No Install will close To install pon must accept this agreement Yes No 5 Read the agreement and click Yes to begin the installation of the files a a Extracting javabaze cab A progress bar will show the process of the installation GE Security February 2 2005 1 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide Microsoft wm lt G The installation is complete 6 When The installation is complete displays click OK 1 10 460932001 GE Security System Requirements setting XP sp2 Firewall 1 To open the Control Panel click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel EF Control Panel File Edt wew Favorites Jools Help k E Back gt wa yo Search a gt Foders EE Address Central Panel 4 Si va Control Panel E Accessibility Add Hartware add ur Adini isLralive Ej Switch co Category View Options i Remow Tools See Also 7 p Y Folder Options Tonts Game Tnterrest windows Update Controlers Options Help ard Support cy we Es 2 Mouss Heber Network Setup Fhons and Pi Connections Wizard Modem e 3 0 2
168. at any time by clicking the De button on the Main tool bar on the left side of the screen If new devices are detected and or old devices are not found you will receive a message to that effect such as InfoGraphics TOPAZ System Workstation Server ritehb x Left Side of the Page The page is divided into two halves with a vertical line On the left side are two lists showing the devices which need your attention those Found and Not Configured and those Configured and Not Found Found and Not Configured On the left side under Not Configured you will see a list of devices that the system found which you have not configured yet if any such devices are found These devices should be configured before proceeding To do this click on all the devices you wish to have auto configured and then click the Configure button Those highlighted devices should no longer appear in that list and should now be located in the system device tree on the right side of the page along with all of the TOPAZ devices connected to that communication port Any selected device may be deselected by clicking Clear button 8 58 460932001 GE Security Auto Configuration Setup Configured Not Found On the left side under Not Found you will see a list of devices that the system has a configuration for but cannot find You should confirm that these devices are no longer installed and physically connected to the server It is possible
169. at are not grayed out In the following example the options available are Activate Toggle and Pulse Activate e Deactivate a Toggle Puls SS Activate When clicked the relay will activate and will not change until the deactivate command is sent by you or the system Toggle When clicked the relay will change to the opposite of its current state For example if the relay is activated when the toggle is clicked the relay will deactivate Pulse When clicked the relay will activate for just under one second and then deactivate Click on the option you want to select it You can also double click the relay icon on the map which will pulse the relay activating it for just under one second and then deactivate it NOTE The relay will pulse about 5 seconds but the pulse icon will show on the color graphics map for about 3 seconds Security Area Icons There is only one 1 icon for each Security Area The icon will change to indicate if the area is Masked or Unmasked Security Area Icon Unmasked Security Area he area is unmasked and will report any alarms generated that are assigned to the area Masked Security Area The area ls masked and alarm conditions will not be reported The only alarms that will be reported are non maskable alarms and trouble alarms GE Security February 2 2005 10 7 Topaz Software User Guide Color Coded Security Areas The security area may be color coded
170. at recorded the event clip click the View Live button When you have finished viewing the video clip click the PARANA 3 Close Window button to return to the Event Details window Caution Do not close this window using the X in the upper corner This can cause TOPAZ to lose communication with the video Always click the Close Window button to close the window 2 2 460932001 GE Security Chapter 3 The Cards button will navigate to the following pages allowing you to add Cardholders and configure their Access Privileges Photo ID etc e Cards e Access Privileges e Photo ID e Masking e Information e Custom Fields These functions are accessed through the navigation bar buttons at the top of the Cards page To navigate to the Cards pages click on the E Cards button in the main navigation bar on the left side of the browser window The following page will display Photo ID ustom Flid Last Cardholder Name f T Af Enter Cardholder Card Number 00001 23456 Aberdeen Schuyler J a Select Cardholder Facility Code Name i Gaslite Publish y Aberdeen Schuyler J eas Barker Eileen Search by Barron Devyn R Employee Number el et George Jeremy Card Stamp Number 00000011 Card Status valid oO R Issue Level o Save Add Delete Clear You can select a function to view or edit by clicking on the button at the top of the window The Cardholder Search w
171. ate and open the directory of the camera model to install ja la Ea OCDriver QuickCam Winder Readme tit Double click the setup exe icon to start the installation of the camera drivers selected and follow the installation instructions Camera Setup Before setting up the camera make sure you have first installed the drivers for the camera See Installing USB Camera Driver on page F 1 You should now plug the USB camera the you wish to use into the USB port of the computer As described in the Installation of the camera drivers locate the directory for the camera you are going to be using on the system In the directory double click the vidcap32 exe icon to start the setup software Setup for USB widcap3z exe Camera htm If the following message is displayed check the camera to see if the is plugged into the USB port Initialization Error Videap could not initialize the capture device Mo capture device found Checklist ls the capture hardware properly configured Check the switch settings and jumpers on the capture device ls a driver installed and configured Select the Multimedia icon from the Control Panel to verify the presence of a capture driver IF you need to install a capture driver choose the Add New Hardware icon f you need to configure a capture driver choose the Settings button Do you wish to continue or ewit If the camera is plugged into the
172. ation on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 Event Report Card Name With e None default e Employee Number Anytime the cardholder name is displayed or printed the Employee Number will accompany it e Card Number Anytime the cardholder name is displayed or printed the Card Number will accompany it Encode Card Format This optional field defines the format the photo printer will use to encode the cards during printing Options are None or Format 1 through Format 15 For more information see the section Variable Card Format on page 23 GE Security February 2 2005 7 17 TOPAZ Software User Guide NOTE The printer being used must support this feature Skip Command Confirmations The default is to have command executions confirmed with the message Operation Complete after execution You must click the OK button to continue If you do not want command confirmations displayed click on the white box next to the selection to place an X in it Priority 1 is Highest Priority Alarm This setting enables 1 to be the highest priority alarm It will then display at the top of the Alarm Queue window regardless of when it was received When unchecked 16 is the highest priority alarm and displays at the top of the Alarm Queue NOTE The default for this field is unchecked 16 is the highest priority This should be kept in mind when assigning priorities to alarm points See Priority on page
173. ation page Aside from auto configuring your system and specifically for day to day system hardware navigation and editing we recommend using the Device Tree 8 62 460932001 GE Security Device Tree Video Recorder Topaz supports alarm video recording This allows the system to link the video recorded during an alarm event to the alarm record A digital video recorder allow the video clip to actually begin prior to the alarm event allowing the actual event to be seen by the operator To navigate to the Video Recorder page click the Hardware button on the main navigation bar at the left side of the browser window then click the Y Silver button next to Video on the main Hardware page You can also click the Video tab at the top of the window from any Hardware page The following page will display yo A Video Recorders i Video Recorder Name Building 1 South z Building 2 West gt Internet TCP IP Address fi 0 0 0 69 aa Building 3 North Connect to Video Recorder SE C A A E will T pa p pr a Add a new Video Recorder Before configuring the recorders in the TOPAZ system they should be installed and functioning properly Make certain that you have the TCP IP address which has been assigned to the recorder available before you start the setup process NOTE While many Digital Recorders may use DHCP addressing Topaz must use Static IP addresses Be cert
174. ay in the map window click the y Delete Map button and the following message will display Map Editor Pon 7 Do vou want to delete the map or the node Y Click the Yes button to delete the map or No if you do not When you have finished with the configuration click the 5 Save Configuration button to save your changes GE Security February 2 2005 10 23 Topaz Software User Guide Adding Points to Map To add a point to a map select the map to add points to from the tree then select the Device tab Double click any type icon to expand the list of configured device points D1 Polling Address 1 Devices Devices AC Us currently configured in system DO Polling Address 0 Security Areas Areas currently configured in system Cameras Cameras currently assigned to maps ee Add map links Map Links currently assigned to maps There are six types of icons in the tree that you can add to a map Three 3 are device points e Device Points e Alarms e Readers e Relays e Security Areas e Cameras Optional e Map Links These icons are described in detail in the following sections Adding Device Points to Map Double click the Bk Device icon to expand the Device Tree for a list of currently configured points that can be added to the map 10 24 460932001 GE Security Map Cfg Device Cig oe DEMO ACU 2 D1 Polling Address 1 kZ ADMIN GLASS BREAK BACK DOOR BACK DOOR DC
175. be deleted from the list and the message Operation Complete should display At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data 8 22 460932001 GE Security Field Panel Field Panel Page The Field Panel pages allow you to do the following e Add New Field Panel e Modify Field Panel Delete Field Panel These pages have three sub pages e Setup default page e Dial up e Elevator They are used to configure more specific information for the field hardware To navigate to the Field Panel pages while in any Hardware page click on the Field Panel tab button at the top of the window or from the main Hardware screen click the Field Panel button on the right side of the screen The following page will display E El E al Port Y LAN Comm mn Y y Reader Alarm Point Relay fig YO Video l Dial Up Elevator Panel Name Gaslite Main Polling Address li Configured Panels A Gaslite Main Panel Type facu Active Y Maximum Readers ez Serial Number 5073 a a a P AAA 6 Server COM Port com Elevator Operation m Description Addr 4 Addr 5 Addr 5 TO ETE Addr a Ene SCCHURL ADE ANA z Expansion Port i Undefined Undefined Undefined y Undefined l Save Add Delete Fiel
176. be overlaid on top of each other 4 Rectangles Triangles Circles Ellipses You can draw and automatically size rectangles triangles circles and ellipses You can fill them with color from the extensive color palette within the system or you can leave them without a fill You can round the corner mix the width of the external lines and select the color Lines You can draw lines with varying styles thickness and color in any direction 6 Fixed Constant Text You can enter text onto the badge at any selected location and select the font from the extensive font list 7 Database Variable Text You can automatically add text from the Cardholder Database You can select the location and orientation and you can also define the font and whether full or partial rending of the data shall be used The fonts size automatically and you can choose the color for the text from the built in color palette 8 Bar Codes You can print the card number and employee number on the badge as a bar code You can select the location size and color of the bar code NOTE During the process of badge design it is recommended that you periodically save the badge template using the File menu on the Menu Bar at the top of the screen The first time a template is saved you must select a unique name for the template The name can be a maximum of eight 8 characters in length Use the Save As command the first time 9 2 460932001 GE Security Acces
177. be used click on the check box to remove the check mark Door Contact Zone Select the alarm point to be used as the door contact By default the field panel will use the zone at the reader Paired Readers If two readers are connected to the same door on opposite sides of the door you can configure them as Paired Readers To do this for each door 1 Both readers must be controlled by a single ACU 2 Door Contact must be used 3 Select the same Door Contact Zone for both readers IKE Reader If the reader you are configuring is an IKE reader you will need to check this box in order for the reader to work properly to activate and deactivate alarms Door Bounce Delay Door Bounce Delay allows you to select a delay from 1 7 seconds for the forced open alarm This prevents a false alarm from occurring for example when the door closes to quickly and the pressure from the hydraulic door closer allows the door to bounce open again before securing NOTE If using Elevator Control some older elevators require the relay to be acti vated longer If this is necessary in the software set the Door Bounce Timer to 2 seconds This should take care of any additional delay required by the ele vator IKE Allows Ingress This field only appears if IKE Reader is selected above In some security applications alarms can only be masked from inside the area When this is the situation and this IKE reader is used to enter the security area
178. bers RRM Relay Numbers Expansion Port Number 4 5 6 7 m6 ss 160 167 168 169 170 GE Security February 2 2005 B 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank B 10 460932001 GE Security Appendix C Operator Type Functions Alarm Processing Backup Restore Data Base Cardholder database functions Configure Maps Control Access Trace Control Anti Passback Control of Alarm Points Control of Output Relays Control of Readers Control System Functions Define Alarm Points Define Field Panels Define Hardware configurations Define LAN Adapters Define Readers Define Relays Define Serial Ports Define Workstation Display Map Event information displays Perform Auto Configuration Perform Service Function Run Alarm History Report Run Cardholder Database Report Run Employee Report Run QuickStart Run Recall Events Report Run Reports Run System Setup Reports GE Security February 2 2005 C 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide setup Access Groups Setup Alarm Options Setup Custom Cardholder Fields Setup Facility Codes Setup Holidays Setup Operators Setup Reader Events Setup Security Areas Setup Site Settings Setup System Functions Setup Time Schedules Setup Variable Card Formats Shutdown System Simulated Alarms Status of Alarm Points Status of Field Panels Status of Readers Status of Relays Status Views End of List 460932001 GE Security Appendix D Anti Pas
179. bove then select from the Masking Action list if the point is to be masked or unmasked during the time schedule selected Masking Action Choose one of the options e Mask Select if you want the alarm point to be masked without restrictions during the scheduled time At the end of the time schedule the point will unmask e Unmask Select if you want the alarm point to be unmasked without restrictions that is the alarm point should be monitored during the scheduled masking time At the end of the time schedule the point will mask Alarm Links to Relay You can select a relay number to be linked for this alarm by clicking on a relay number in the drop down list This allows you to link several alarm points to a single relay The relay must be on the same panel as the alarm point for this to function The relay will activate whenever the alarm point is in an active state and will deactivate when the alarm resets or returns to normal 8 52 460932001 GE Security Alarm Point Options After all the changes have been made to the Alarm Options page you must click on the Sae O Save button in order for the changes to be saved to the server PC s database The message Operation Complete should be displayed At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window GE Security February 2 2005 8 53 TOPAZ Software User Guide Relay Page The Relay pag
180. bruary 2 2005 1 27 TOPAZ Software User Guide Operator ID Password aa Now click on the Ps Enter button to complete your log on to the TOPAZ System 1 28 460932001 GE Security The First Time Topaz is Started The First Time Topaz is Started This will only apply if you are starting up the TOPAZ Software for the very first time If this is not the first time and you wish to use Auto Configuration see Auto Configuration Setup Page on page 8 57 After clicking the Ps Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Would you like to automatically configure hardware devices If you wish to have TOPAZ automatically configure the software and hardware for you click the OK button For more details see Auto Configuration on page 1 4 If you do not wish to auto configure your system click the Cancel button and the standard workstation browser navigation page will display as shown below 7 EA ee es A ee BE Hardware i MFG OFFICE Bere 106 36 00 ACCOUNTING FO ACCOUNTING Forced Open ALARM o Es my D 35 57 ACCOUNTING DC ACCOUNTING SHORT CIRCUIT lu TENET The main Operator Screen shown above is divided up into 3 sections GE Security February 2 2005 1 29 TOPAZ Software User Guide system Navigation Bar TOPAZ s Main Navigation Bar is on the left side of the main Operator Screen Use the mouse pointer to click on the icons or b
181. by clicking on it and then click on the 4 left arrow This will move that field name to the Available Fields on the left Filter By The Filter By Condition and Value fields enable you to specify criteria to select certain records in the Employee database You may select up to two filters for a report Select a field from the left side Filter By drop down list for example ACTDATE the employee s card activation date Condition If you use a data field for Filter By you can apply a condition to the information in that data field Using the previous example you might choose Greater than or equal to Value You can specify a value for the data field in Filter By Using the previous example you might choose 19991001 as the first of October 1999 Date format must be YYYYMMDD The above filtering will produce a report listing all employees who have a card activation date of Oct 1 1999 or later You can also specify a second filter such as Filter By ACTDATE Condition Less than and Value 19991101 The combination of both filters will list on the report only employees whose cards were activated in the month of October of 1999 NOTES 1 When filtering by Security Area use Greater than or equal to for the condition and the number 2 for the value This will recall all cardholders authorized for the area in the filter by field Access to an area is controlled by assigning a Time Schedule number 0 126 to the Security
182. ce event occurs NOTE If you need to configure an Instruction Message click the 6 to the left of the field to call up the Instruction Messages configuration page When you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Save Save button You will then return to the Access Trace Page Once the cardholder name is highlighted and the desired Workstation Time Schedule and Instruction Message have been selected click on the MLELA Start button to start the trace The selected Cardholder will be removed from the Traces Available list and will now appear in the Traces In Progress list Access Trace by Reader To start a trace for a specific Reader in the upper portion of the window under Traces Available click on the reader name in the Access Trace by Reader list Workstation If a workstation is being used from the list select the workstation for the trace to report to NOTE If you need to configure a Workstation click the A to the left of the field to call up the Workstation configuration page When you have completed the config uration close the page by clicking the Save Save button You will then return to the Access Trace page Time Schedule Select the Time Schedule for the trace to be active NOTE If you need to configure a Time Schedule click the A to the left of the field to call up the Time Schedule configuration page When you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Save
183. cess Groups window You can use up to eight 8 access groups per card To remove a selected area from the Selected Access Groups window click on the access group name to remove and click the 4 Left Arrow button If the desired Access Group is not available and you need to configure one click the S Link Arrow button to the left of Available Access Group This will open the Access Group configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Sae O Save button Security Area Time Schedule The Security Area Time Schedule defines the times during which the cards will have access to certain Security Areas or Access Groups Click on the name of the area or group then from the Security Area Time Schedule drop down list select the time for authorization Repeat until all areas or groups have a time schedule If the desired Time Schedule is not available and you need to configure one click the A Link Arrow button to the left of Security Area Time Schedule This will open the Time Schedule configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Sae O Save button When you have finished configuring the Batch Add Page click the Batch Add Batch Add button The message Operation Complete will appear indicating the number of cards that were added to the system InfoGraphics TOPAZ System AN Operation Complete 250 Records Added If not the message will advise yo
184. cess to detect and configure the hardware The process may take a few minutes If you have COM ports you will see Microsoft Internet Explorer Click OK to continue You may click to select one or more ports you wish to Auto Configure You may de select highlighted ports by clicking the Clear button or you may leave this page without further changes being recorded by clicking on any of the buttons in the main tool bar on the left side of the screen Once you have selected the ports press the Configure button the system will perform an automatic configuration to find new devices or changes to the system on those highlighted ports The message Operation Complete will display Click OK to continue The left side of the screen will display devices that have been either 1 detected as physically connected to the server but have not been programmed configured or 2 they have been programmed but are currently not connected The Auto Configuration Home screen displays the entire network of field devices found and configured found and not configured and configured but not found On the right side of the screen all devices are displayed in a dynamic Tree formation with Graphical Icon representations of the various device types for example workstation ACU reader alarm point CCTV switch and relay output and with the following text description colors Found not Configured Connected not Found Red o Found and Configured
185. ck an alarm in the Alarm Queue Window which is linked to Color Graphics the Color Graphics map will be displayed For more details on Color Graphics see Map Button on page 10 1 If you don t see a MAP button then Color Graphics has not been configured for the workstation To enable Color Graphics 1 Select the Hardware button on the left side of the main screen 2 Select Workstation Under Workstation select the name of your workstation The name should appear in the Workstation Name field Select Alarm Graphics by clicking the mouse in the check box placing a check mark in it 5 Click the Save Add button 6 Click the Refresh Alarm Queue button to show the MAP button GE Security February 2 2005 1 33 TOPAZ Software User Guide Now you can click once to select an alarm event in the Alarm Queue Window double click to call up the alarm details or click the MAP button or triple click the alarm text to call up the alarm color graphics If you have Color Graphics active but do not want to bring it up when you select an alarm in the queue window make sure you do not triple click on the alarm Access Events Access events are also logged in the Alarm Queue Window for example when access is denied To see more details on an access event double click anywhere on the access event in the Alarm Queue window The Access Details page will display as shown below Message PA Device Name IO Fea 20
186. commands To select the edit menu move the mouse pointer to Edit on the menu bar at the top of the screen and click the left mouse pointer A menu will appear with the following items Draw Options e Cut Cut e Copy Lopp Paste e Paste Move Forwa rd Move Borland e Move Backward puesta lla dic Mave lia Front e Move to Front eee e Move to Back e CenterLtoR ues af e Center T to B TAL e Attributes Attributes e Undo Unda Cut Copy Paste and Undo The Cut Copy Paste and Undo facilities follows the standard convention for these functions as in most word processing or drawing software packages If you are not familiar with these conventions the Cut facility if selected will remove any Picked object from the badge design The Cut object will be temporarily stored in memory so if the Paste command is selected next the Cut object will appear in the last selected position on the badge The Copy command operates in the same way as the Cut command but instead of removing the Picked object a copy will be stored in memory and the object will remain on the badge If you then move the mouse pointer to a new position on the badge and click the left mouse button selecting the Paste command from the Edit menu will pace a copy of the Picked object at the selected position Each subsequent use of the Paste command will place a copy of the picked object on the badge until either the Cut or Copy command is used for a different Picked object
187. condition for each point either Activate Deactivate or Momentarily Activate e For Alarm Points select the desired command to Mask Unmask or Conditional Unmask when executing the operation PIN Personal Identification number A series of numbers the cardholder enters at the keypad for access similar to PINs used at a bank ATM machine Readers Field hardware that permits access to a security area after input of the proper biometric card or number entry Readers are identified by Reader Names ranging from 1 to 12 characters GE Security February 2 2005 G 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Relay control point A relay with a name that performs a designated operation Reader Number A value that identifies a Reader s port and address on a SCP device The number range is from 0 7 defined by the Reader port the SCP connects to and the internal DIP switches in the Reader s interface Relay Any of the addressable electrical switches residing on field hardware attached to the TOPAZ system Request to Exit REX A type of alarm activated when someone presses on the exit crash bar manually turns a handle to open or slides a card in a reader to open a door Security Communications Protocol SCP device An ACU 2 or an intelligent field panel or Reader Security Areas A physical area with security controls Alarm points and readers are assigned to security areas Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facility SCIF A se
188. conditions door alarm forced open and held open When you double click on these icons the Show Details window will display Other alarm icons are for general alarms such as intrusion motion duress glass break high temp water leak etc There are default icons listed below Default Alarm Icons user assignable configurable Icon Description of Alarm Icon Represents 7 AC Power Failure Power to the field panel has failed AC Device Offline Communication to the field device has failed Door Alarm Magnetic door contacts on the reader doors Duress Alarm When a duress PIN code has been entered at the keyboard E Fire Alarm Auxiliary output from fire panel has activated B Forced Open When a reader door is open without authorization 10 4 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics Default Alarm Icons user assignable configurable Glass Break Alarm glass break detector has been activated while not masked Eaj Held Open When a door is not secured within the allowed time set in the reader configuration B High Temperature The temperature in the room has risen above the set threshold ECE Low Battery The DC Battery in the field controller has dropped below the required voltage Smoke Detector Auxiliary output from fire panel for a smoke detector has been activated Standard Alarm Other types of alarm points not covered by any other default alarm category B System Input Low Battery
189. ctly as entered in to the database for a Database item Selecting Upper Case causes the data to be printed entirely in Upper Case letters Selecting Lower Case causes the data to be printed entirely in Lower Case letters Selecting Mixed Case causes the data to be printed with the first letter of each word Capitalized and the other letters in lower case If the text contains a capitalized letter within a word like a person s name the mixed case setting will change that letter to lower case For example McDonald becomes Mcdonald Bar Codes The Bar Code command allows you to represent any numerical Text or Database Information in the form of a bar code on the badge The selections are e No Bar Code e Code 3 of 9 GE Security February 2 2005 9 9 Topaz Software User Guide e Code 128 e Code2of5 Date Format The Date Format command allows you to select the format in which dates may be represented on the badge The available formats are e dd mm yy e mm dd yy e yy mm dd e dd mmm yyyy Name Formats The Name Format command allows you to specify the format in which the Cardholder s name as entered in the system Cardholder database will be printed on the card when selected using the Database command The options are e No Change e Last Name e First Name e Middle Name e First and Middle e Flip Name By using the No Change selection you can choose to have the name printed in the same format as it was entered in
190. curity area designated for very secret or dangerous materials Government or Defense facilities normally use this feature Not available on TOPAZ Systems Server The computer that maintains the entire database files Summarized History Report This report will calculate the following for any alarm in the report 1 Frequency The number if times the alarm occurred in the time period selected 2 Total Duration The length of time the alarm point was in alarm for each occurrence and then the sum total of all those occurrences 3 Longest Duration From all the alarm occurrences for the alarm point during the selected time this will be the longest time for any single occurrence the point was in alarm condition Tour Point An alarm point that a guard must interface with within an assigned time when making rounds Unmask Placing an alarm point or area into a secured condition There are two types of unmasked states e Conditional unmasking Does not allow unmasking of any of the alarm points selected unless they are all in the secure condition e Unconditional unmasking Will unmask all alarm points selected regardless of the security state If at that time any alarm point is unsecured a report is sent to the designated workstation User A person with a valid user name and password authorized to operate and monitor access control through a workstation Workstation A computer terminal with keyboard and mouse that runs the TO
191. d follow the remaining steps If this is an update you may cancel out of the Sen tinel Driver wizard 8 14 460932001 GE Security Workstation 11 Click Next gt to install the sentinel drivers iz Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation TF vou want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard IMPORTANT Please remove all USB SuperPro keys before continuing Installshield 12 Remove all software sentinel keys from the USB port before continuing Click Install to continue i Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the Following license agreement carefully Rainbow Technologies Inc License Agreement IMPORTANT Read this before using your copy of Rainbow s software This document is a legal agreement between you ether an indridual or an entity and Rainbow Technologies Inc Use of the software indicates your acceptance of these terms As used in this License Agreement the term Software means the Rainbow software included on the media or hardware prowided wath this License Agreement 1 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS The Software is a proprietary product of Y Ido not accept the terms in the license agreement Installshield
192. d will display Click OK This will delete that report template from your computer Clear To clear the fields you have entered on this screen press the Clear button Photos per Page You can select up to 24 photos to be printed on one page on a printer This option only applies if Print Photos is selected Output Report There are four ways to output the report e Print Photos Will print the selected employees on the Photo Badging printer that is selected in Hardware Workstation No report will display on the screen The printed photos will print along with the Card Number and Card Name e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport
193. d Offline a Relay Icons Adding New Reader Icon Group If you need to add an additional Reader Icon Group click on the Icon Cfg tab and then click the Reader Icons icon 10 44 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics In the top left corner of the color graphics window click on the Add Icon Group button Map Cfg Device Cfg Icon Cfg r ike E Alarm cons a Relay Icons A blank Icon Group window for readers will be displayed Reader Icons Ed Mame n Locked Enter a name for the new group and select the icon for the designations Click OK when you have completed adding the icons for all the designations The new icon group is now added to the Icon Cfg tree list Modify Relay Icon Group There is only one Standard Relay icon group which has two designations and offline Relay Icons Name Standard Relay Map Cfg Device Cfg Icon Cig IS Alarm cons On Off Offline a Reader Icons MM gt Relay Icons gt Standard Relay Tj Cancel GE Security February 2 2005 10 45 Topaz Software User Guide Adding New Relay Icon Group If you need to add an additional relay group click on the Icon Cfg tab and then click the Relay Icons ICON In the top left corner of the color graphics window click on the Add Icon Group button Map Cfg Device Cfg Icon Cfg a ie F Alam Icons x Standard Relay A blank Icon Group window for relays will be disp
194. d Panel Setup The Field Panel Setup page is used specifically for adding or modifying new hardware Here is where you configure the ACU s address serial number communications port off line message and expansion modules Add Field Panel NOTE Before adding a new panel detailed information on the panel from the installer is required such as location type of panel address communication protocol etc GE Security February 2 2005 8 23 TOPAZ Software User Guide Start by clicking the button and enter the following information for the new field panel 1 2 Panel Name Enter a name for the field panel up to 15 characters Panel Type The only selection will be ACU In future software versions there will be more selections available to select from a drop down list Maximum Readers Select the maximum number of readers that this panel may be configured for 2 4 or 8 Polling Address Set the Address of the ACU panel by clicking on the address from the drop down list Notice that the list has numbers 0 9 and then A F The address is set in what is called Hex or Hexadecimal numbers with 0 F equivalent to 0 15 respectively The Polling Address must match the address of the field panel The polling address is manually set with a rotary or DIP switch in the field panel and should have been set when it was installed If you are not sure of the address contact the installer of the panel Active If the ACU panel i
195. d cardholder who has access to the specified Security Area to be allowed to enter that area even if the system has a record of his entering but not leaving that area For example if a cardholder who is in a specified Security Area left the area by tailgating behind another cardholder and did not swipe his card upon entering or exiting The TOPAZ system thinks he is still in that area This will allow the security staff to reset that Security Area to allow reentry for that one cardholder only D 2 460932001 GE Security Appendix E Card Field Definitions Functional Protocol Field Field Name Name Type of Value Description Access Group 1 ACCGRP 1 to Numeric This field is NOT recommended as a field filter through Access ACCGRP 8 Group 8 These fields hold the numeric ID of an Access Group assigned to a cardholder The numbers are stored in the order in which they are assigned to the Cardholder ACCGRP1 will hold the ID of the first Access Group assigned to a card holder ACCGRP2 will hold the second Access Group Assigned to a card holder etc These fields are not recommended for use as filters because access groups are not usually assigned to cardholders in a consistent way ACCGRP 1 could contain any or all Access Group IDs Thus filtering by ACCGRP1 would be meaningless For example If the Building 1 Access Group was assigned to half of the cardholders as the first Access Group ACCGRP1 and it was assigned to the other h
196. d deactivate the alarms before they are reported to the operator Select the number of seconds the alarm report should be delayed from the drop down list Save After all the changes have been made to the Alarm Point Setup page you must click on the Sae O Save button in order for the changes to be saved to the server database One of the following messages will display e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Alarm Number has been repeated GE Security February 2 2005 8 49 TOPAZ Software User Guide Enter a new number and try again e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data Modify Alarm Point 1 To modify an alarm point select the name of the point to modify from the Alarm Input Points window 2 Make any necessary changes to the Alarm Point fields After all the changes have been made to the Alarm Point Setup page you must click on the OO Sae O Save button in order for the changes to be saved to the server database 4 One of the following messages will display e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Dupl
197. d has no spaces Facility Code 2 3 B 003 02 000012 1 F If this same example used field separators after each field the actual card would look like this ignore the spaces B 003D 02D 000012D 1D F GE Security February 2 2005 7 25 TOPAZ Software User Guide Modify a Card Format 1 First select the Card Format 2 When the fields display make the changes you want 3 Then press the Save Save button for the card format modified A message Operation Complete will display Make sure that you click the Save button for the card format you are modifying There is one for each type Wiegand and Mag Stripe Delete a Card Format 1 First select the Card Format 2 When the fields display reset all values except the Card Format to the default values 3 Then press the Save Save button A message Operation Complete will display 7 26 460932001 GE Security Reader Events Reader Event Page The Reader Event page allows you to select how events related to access attempts will be handled The selections determine the system s response to a denied or authorized access event You can determine whether to Acknowledge Display or Print each of the possible access attempts For a list of reader events see Appendix B Access Codes Definitions B 1 To navigate to the Reader Event page from any Setup page click the Reader Evnt tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Reader
198. d other fields 4 Security Area Description Enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters for the description of the security area being configured 5 Dial up Panel Name If the Security Area is associated with devices connected to an ACU panel that communicates through Dialup then select the panel name from the drop down list 7 10 460932001 GE Security Security Area NOTE If you need to setup a Dial up Panel click on the E link arrow This will open an additional window with the Dial up Panel setup page to allow you to setup additional Dial up Panels When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button and continue working in Security Area setups 6 Ifthe area is controlled by Anti Passback then select APB Control in Area by clicking the box to the right e Unchecked Default This Security Area does not use Anti Passback e Checked This Security Area responds to APB violations with an alarm event If checked you are presented with the choice for Timed Delay for Reentry in minutes For more information on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 8 For Time Delay for Re entry if Anti Passback is being used in the security area then you can select the delay in minutes before the cardholder will be allowed to access the area again after access has been granted The minutes must be positive whole numbers not decimals This is used to discourage passing a card back to another person
199. d to the selected access group will be listed in the Selected Security Areas list If you want to rename an Access Group 1 Select the access group to rename by scrolling through the Access Group list and click on the name of the access group 2 Make the required changes to the name in the Access Group Name field If you want to add or remove a Security Area in an Access Group 460932001 GE Security Access Group 1 Add another area by selecting the security area name in the Available Security Areas list and click on the gt Right Arrow to move the area to the Selected Security Area list 2 Remove an area from the list by clicking on the area in the Selected Security Areas list then click on the 4 Left Arrow to move the area out of the selected area list 4 If you want to modify the Time Schedule For Security Areas 1 Click on the security area name to modify under Selected Security Areas 2 Then select the new Time Schedule from the drop down list and click on the desired time schedule 5 Once all changes have been made to the Access Group click the Save Add button at the bottom left side of the window to save the data to the Server After clicking the Save button one of the following messages should appear e If Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e lf Duplicate Record is displayed then the Access Group Name has been repeated Use a new name and try saving again e f Operation Failed i
200. dd Button Once all the additions and or changes have been made to the Facility Codes page click the Save Add button to save the data to the Server After clicking on the Save button the message Operation Complete should be displayed 7 22 460932001 GE Security Variable Cards Variable Card Page The Variable Card Page allows you to configure the system to accept card formats other than the pre defined standard formats normally supported This provides wider flexibility in the use of existing cards Custom Card Formats are used when upgrading readers without having to change the existing card technology at a site By entering the bit location and length in each of the code fields a card format is created that will then be assigned to one or more readers You can define up to 15 Wiegand and 15 Mag Stripe Card custom formats To navigate to the Variable Card page from any Setup page click the Variable Crd tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Variable Card Format button on the right side of the page The following page will display F a ETA EA A EA se Stings Custom Fa EN Varie ci E e y gt W i Ha f r 2 EE Save Clear Mag Stripe Card Format None y Company Code ER o E Save Clear zs es a Add a Card Format Wiegand Card Formats Cards with the Wiegand Card Format are usually ordered pre coded with information company code facility code
201. desired changes then click the Sae O Save button 3 A message Operation Complete will display Delete Operators Caution H Use caution when deleting passwords Make sure you do not delete the last pass word that allows access to setup operators This could prevent you from accessing vital features of the software Under System Operators click on and highlight the name of the operator you wish to delete After verifying that the correct operator to delete is selected click the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue A message Operation Complete will display GE Security February 2 2005 7 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Operator Type Page The Operator Type page allows you to configure add and assign 47 different functions to 64 different types of operators e Add Operator Types e Modify Operator Types e Delete Operator Types To navigate to the Operator Type page from any Setup page click the Operators tab button at the top of the window and then the Op Type tab button The following page will display Operator Type Name Inactivity Timer Control amp Status Manager Re port Onl Allowed Restricted Alarm Processing aj Perform Auto Configuration Backup Restore Data Base Perform Service Function Cardholder database functions Configure Maps Control Access Trace Control Anti Passback Control of Alarm Points Control of Output Relays
202. djustment bars that you can use to control the Brightness Contrast Color Hue and Resolution As you adjust these controls the live image will change accordingly 3 12 460932001 GE Security Photo ID Page To take a photo click the mouse on the Click button and the photograph will appear in one of the four screen spaces at the bottom of the screen starting at the left box Each time you click the mouse on the Click button another photograph will be added to the four screen spaces at the base of the screen As the photos are taken they will be added from left to right You do not have to take all four photos In order to select which photograph is to be used on the badge move the mouse over the selected photograph in one of the four photo boxes at the bottom of the screen and click the left mouse button This will display the newly selected photo in the Current Photo box above Click on the OK button to the left of the Current Photo to save this image into the cardholder database If you changed any of the video adjustments Brightness Resolution etc a dialog box will appear asking you if the new settings should be saved If you select Yes these new adjustments will be saved for use with the photo of the next cardholder If you select No the original settings will be restored for the next cardholder With either answer the photo will be saved to the cardholder database and screen will revert to the Card database screen At anytime y
203. down TOPAZ for this For an overview on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 Cardholder Database Diagnostic without APB Repair Checks the integrity of the Anti Passback table and displays any possible problems This does not change the APB status tables No files are changed For more information on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 Executing one of the repair programs After you select the desired repair option click on the button to start the repair diagnostic procedure You should see an Operation Complete message If there were no database errors you will see a message such as the following for Alarm Database Repair 4 16 460932001 GE Security Database Page However if any errors in the database were present you will see a message containing a list of the files that need to be copied from the dms2 folder to the dms1 folder For example if you had some alarm point errors in the database you might see a message like the following Microsoft Internet Explorer Ea MONPTS DT MONPTS N s 540F00 07 ADDOFOOOT FROM DMS TO AN a ALARM FILES ARE REBUILT IN DS 2 se COPY MONPTS OT MONPT SINS SADFOO OT ADDFOO OT IN DHST This message tells you what files you have to move copy If you get such a message in order to finish the database repair you must do the following 1 Shut down TOPAZ 2 Bring up Windows Explorer 3 Select the drive and folder where t
204. dule setup EEE ES 2 E a TIME SCHEDULE ali p SCHEDULE MAME START TIME END TIME ACTIVE OW DAY HOLIDAY Business Hrs 1 06 00 15 00 MTUTF Business Hrs 2 o 00 16 00 HTWTF Business Hra 3 06 00 17 00 MTUTF OEE Hours i1 00 00 05 59 HTUTF 15 00 23 59 HTUTF Of Hours 2 no 00 06 59 MTUTF 16 00 23 59 MTUTF OEE Hours 3 00 00 07 59 HTUTF 17 00 23 59 HTUTF Weekend Holiday 00 00 3159 aia J 12 oving Shift 15 00 23 00 HTUTF Third Shift 3 no 00 06 59 MTUTF 23 00 23 59 HTUTF Lunch 12 00 13 00 HTUTF GE Security February 2 2005 6 21 TOPAZ Software User Guide Holiday Setup Report The Holiday Setup Report recalls how Holidays have been setup To navigate to the Holiday Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Holiday tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Display Report Q Print Report g Output To File Output File Name Run Report Cancel Report The report will list all configured Holidays Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the whit
205. duplicated name exists on the network Network path not found The network is busy or is out of resources The specified network resource is no longer available The network BIOS command limit has been reached 460932001 GE Security 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 80 82 84 85 86 87 88 89 106 107 108 110 111 112 GE Security TOPAZ System Error Codes A network adapter hardware error occurred The specified server cannot perform the requested task An unexpected network error occurred The remote adapter is not compatible The printer queue is full Space to store the file waiting to be printer is not available on the server Your file waiting to be printed was deleted The specified network name is no longer available Network access is denied The network resource type is not correct The network name cannot be found The name limit for the local computer network adapter card was exceeded The network BIOS session limit was exceeded The remote server has been paused or Is in the process of being started No more connections can be made to this remote computer at this time because there are already as many connections as the computer can accept The specified printer or disk device has been paused The file exists The directory or file cannot be created Storage to process this request is not available The local device name is already in use The specified network
206. e Modify Relay 1 Start by selecting the relay to be modified by scrolling through the Configured Relays list and clicking on the relay to select it After the fields are filled in make sure the correct relay to modify has been selected 2 Make any desired changes to the Relay Setup page desired 3 After all changes have been made to the Relay page you must click on the Save Add button for the changes to be saved to the Server database 4 One of the following messages should be displayed e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Relay Name has been repeated Enter a new name and try again e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again Delete Relay 1 To delete a relay from the system you must first select the relay to be deleted Do this by clicking on the name of the relay in the Configured Relays list 2 After making sure the correct relay to be deleted has been selected highlighted click the Delete button 3 Amessage Are you sure you want to delete this record Will display Click OK to continue 4 Amessage Operation Complete will display lf Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again 460932001 GE Security Auto Configuration Setup Auto Configuration Setup Page Auto Configuration will allow you to have the system automatically confi
207. e insert a 1 before the area code for example 9 1 799 555 1234 GE Security February 2 2005 8 27 TOPAZ Software User Guide Panel Dial Out Schedule Set the Time Schedule that the panel can dial out to the host For more detailed instructions on how to set up a Time Schedule see Setup Time Schedules on page 7 7 For example if the time schedule is set for Monday Friday from 06 00 18 00 then after 6 P M at night until 6 A M and all day Saturday and Sunday the panel would not be allowed to contact the host PC NOTE If you need to setup a dial out Schedule click on the 6 link arrow This will open an additional window with the Time Schedule setup page to allow you to setup additional Time Schedule When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button server Phone number 1 Enter the primary phone number for the ACU panel to call the Server server Phone number 2 Enter the secondary or backup phone number for the ACU to call the Server server Dial Out Schedule Enter the Time Schedule for the server Host PC to dial out to the ACU panel This time schedule is used to set when the server can contact the ACU to download new information If you only want the download to occur at night you could set the time schedule for Mondays Wednesdays and Fridays from 20 00 23 59 This low traffic time would be the only time that the server would contact the ACU and download new information to it
208. e Configuration ACCESS ON COMPANY CODE CORRECT FACILITY CODE MANTRAP e Access was granted based only on the Correct Company Code on the card Access on Company code and Mantrap are both set up in Reader Configuration This card had the Same Facility encoded on the card as stored in the Site Configuration ACCESS ON COMPANY CODE WRONG FACILITY CODE e Access was granted based only on the Correct Company Code on the card Access on Company code is set up in Reader Configuration This card had the Wrong Facility encoded on the card as stored in the Site Configuration ACCESS ON COMPANY CODE WRONG FACILITY CODE MANTRAP e Access was granted based only on the Correct Company Code on the card Access on Company code and Mantrap are both set up in Reader Configuration This card had the Wrong Facility encoded on the card as stored in the Site Configuration AREA SECURE ALARMS UNMASKED e Request to Secure Unmask the Security Area was granted DENIED SECURE UNMASKING REQUEST ACTIVE ALARM e The request to Secured Unmask the security area was denied because there is an active alarm within the security area The alarm point will display in the event message DENIED SECURE UNMASKING REQUEST CONFIGURATION ERROR e The request to Secured Unmask the security area was denied because a configuration error Example no alarms in the security area DENIED SECURE UNMASKING REQUEST DEVICE ERROR e The request to Secured Unmask t
209. e Custom Level button Under ActiveX controls and plug ins change Download signed ActiveX controls Download unsigned ActiveX controls and Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe to Enable Then click OK to save 4 Click the Internet icon then click on the Custom Level button Under ActiveX controls and 7J plug ins change Download signed ActiveX controls Download unsigned ActiveX controls and Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe to Enable Then click OK to save 5 On the Connections tab click LAN Settings button and make sure Use a proxy server for your LAN is NOT selected If it is selected uncheck the box and click OK 6 On the Privacy tab move the slide bar all the way down to Accept All Cookies then click OK to save 7 Click OK to save and exit Internet Explorer Properties This topic describes how to begin interacting with the TOPAZ System Software The installation uses default options so you will not have to make decisions or selections The Auto configuration function may also be used to assist you in setting up the system Whenever possible always power up the system s peripheral devices before activating the server computer In this way any errors or diagnostic messages will display at the system s monitor or printer NOTE If you using a workstation the server should be running on the network before starting up the w
210. e back of the card Next enter the Card Number of up to 10 digits The Card Number is a required field NOTE The Card Number is the only field that may NOT be repeated for the same Facility Company Code plus Facility Code You can have two identical Card Numbers as long as the Facilities are different Select the Facility Code by clicking on the down arrow and selecting from the list of Facility Codes 460932001 GE Security Card Number Page If you need to configure a Facility Code to use click the 6 Link Arrow Button to the left of the field to call up the Facility Code configuration page When you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Sae O Save button at the bottom of the page Enter the Employee Number This field is optional and can be a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters Enter Card Stamp Number This is optional and can be a maximum of 8 numeric characters The number is printed on the back of the card If you request it the number will also be the card number and the encoded card number However to be used as the Card Number the Card Stamp Number must be entered into the Card Number field The Card Status defaults to Valid meaning that the card will be a usable card in the system Clicking on the down arrow and selecting from the list may select other options e Lost card will be denied access e Stolen card will be denied access e Inactive card will be denied access e Term
211. e button to save the changes To use the keypad to unsecure an area the cardholder must enter the PIN 20 to mask the alarm For example if his PIN is 1023 he enters 1043 to mask that security area The alarms will be turned off and the door will unlock NOTE No access will be granted until the alarms are masked lf one cardholder unmasks the alarms anyone with access to that area can enter The alarm will be off GE Security February 2 2005 7 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide To secure the area the cardholder must enter his PIN 10 to unmask the alarm For example if his PIN is 1023 he enters 1033 to unmask that security area The alarms will then be set on 10 If the Security Area will be using the Delayed Alarm Reporting and Masking option select the number of seconds that the alarms should wait before reporting the alarm state This allows time for the authorized cardholder to mask the alarms 11 Once all the information has been added to the Security Areas page click the Sae O Save Button A message Operation Complete will display NOTE At anytime the Clear button can be clicked to clear all fields Modify an Existing Security Area 1 From the Security Area list scroll through and select the Security Area to modify by clicking on the area name to be modified After a name is selected the current configuration will display in the fields on the page 2 Make any desired changes to the rest of the fields 3 Click
212. e disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should start 6 40 460932001 GE Security Recall User Actions Report Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name ca
213. e dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 22 460932001 GE Security Holiday Setup Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for Holiday setup HOLIDAY TABLE ENTRIES i DATE HOLIDAY TYPE 2004 05 31 Memorial Day de 004 0705 Independance Day de 2004 09 06 Labor Days qj jeter dete 2004 11 25 Thanksgiving Day TARIR RE 20
214. e event printer 1 Click the Start button and select Settings and then Printers me i Settings Control Panel Control Panel gt Frinters and Faxes Command Prompt cH Network and Dial Search J Printers 4 Notepad P Help A Taskbar amp Start T Help and Support Microsoft PowerPoint Search RUM All Programs gt 17 Run Shut Down pr A Log OFF Shut Down m al a SAE OS EAG gt con Ezan TN Windows 2000 Windows XP 8 18 460932001 GE Security GE Security 2 Click on Printers 3 Printers File Edit Wiew Favorites Too Add Printer Acrobat Epson Stylus Distiller COLOR 44 A sm am m Windows 2000 Workstation Eltron F310 HF Laserjet HP Laserjet Card Printer 4050 Seri 4050 TWP Windows XP 3 Right click on the printer icon that is directly connected to your workstation and click on Properties La Printers AE P E ope ow Set as Default Printer ES Printing Preferences Cr Pause Printing Cancel All Documents Fax Generic PostScri Sharing Use Printer Offline Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties February 2 2005 8 19 TOPAZ Software User Guide 4 For windows 2000 click the Advanced tab lt Epson Stylus COLOR 440 ESC P 2 Copy 2 Properties Color Management Security Device Settings Utilities General Sharing l Ports Advanced
215. e is displayed then no further changes are needed e If the message Operation Failed is displayed one of the following has occurred e Adrive letter was not entered into the drive field e The drive was not ready yet IF using a zip drive you may not have a cartridge inserted Check all field selections make corrections and try to execute the backup again Restore Database Caution Restoring the database will require the system to be rebooted and may interfere with daily activities NOTE Because the server must be rebooted it is recommended that the restore be done at the server Restore From Drive Enter the Drive Letter that the files will be restored from Zip Jaz etc After all selections have been made click the Restore button located in the Restore Database section to start the restore process When the selected file s have been restored a message Restart the Workstation will display Click OK to continue NOTE You will get the message Restart the Workstation even if you are restoring from the server Shutdown and restart TOPAZ GE Security February 2 2005 4 19 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank 460932001 GE Security Chapter 5 Status Button The Status button allows you to check the status on the following e Field Panel e Reader e Alarm Point e Output Relay To navigate to the Status page click on the Status button in the left main toolbar The
216. e of the four options can be selected 6 2 460932001 GE Security Cardholder Database Reports e Cardholder Number Cardholder will be reported in order of Card Numbers e Cardholder Name Cardholder will be reported in order of Cardholder Name Employee Number Cardholder will be reported in order of Employee number e Card Serial Number Cardholder will be reported in order of Card Serial Numbers Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can be up to 64 characters with no punctuation or spaces For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click
217. e relay to be activated longer If this is necessary in the software set the Door Bounce Timer to 2 seconds This should take care of any additional delay required by the elevator GE Security February 2 2005 8 31 TOPAZ Software User Guide Elevator Cab Setup To navigate to the Cab Setup page from any page in the Field Panel Setup pages on the Setup Field Panel page first make sure you have a panel selected and Elevator Operation selected If you don t when you try to select Setup Field Panel Elevator you will get the Elevator must be selected message After selecting Elevator Operation click on the Elevator tab button at the top of the window The following page will display Configured Panels C z Elevator Cab Name EN Elevator Cab Reader Starting Relay Number DENAC Description If you entered data on a new field panel to be used with the elevator cab you must first save the data on the panel before you can assign cab readers to this elevator device Elevator Cab Name Enter up to 21 alphanumeric characters for the name of the elevator cab Elevator Cab Reader Select from the drop down list the reader that will be assigned to the elevator cab 8 32 460932001 GE Security Elevator Control NOTES e If you need to setup an Elevator Reader click on the A link arrow This will open an additional window with the Reader setup page to allow you to setup additional Read ers
218. e the report template under A template can be used in the future without having to redesign all the fields on the report The name can be up to eight 8 characters not including punctuation sort By Select how the report is to sort the data There are four options listed below to sort the report by Only one of the four options can be selected for the current report e Card Number Employees will be reported in order of Card Numbers e Employee Name Employees will be reported in order of Employee Name e Employee Number Employees will be reported in order of Employee Number e Card Serial Number Cardholder will be reported in order of Card Serial Numbers 6 60 460932001 GE Security Employee Reports The field selected to Sort By will appear in the first column of the report You do not have to select that field under Selected Fields Header Title Enter the title as you wish it to appear on the header of the report Available Fields Select which fields you wish to appear on the report in the order you wish them to appear from left to right by selecting a field and clicking on the D right arrow This will move that field name to the Selected Fields on the right NOTE Do not select the same field you are sorting by If you do this will duplicate that field on the report The field you sort on will be the first field on the report Selected Fields If you wish to remove a field from the Selected Fields select it
219. e will allow you to do the following e Add Relay e Modify Relay e Remove Relay To navigate the Relay page from any Hardware page click on the Relay tab button navigation bar at the top of the screen or from the main Hardware screen click the Relay Output button on the right side of the screen The following page will display o E E Serial Port LAN Comm Workstation Field Panel Reader Alarm Point Y j Auto ZA Video RelayName Pos Relay Number Address E ACCESS LIGHT Configured Relays A Field Panel Gaslite Main he Controlled by Alarm Point l z i E Relay Action Schedule al Alarm Point Name ACCOUNTING FO y Description wi S POT AR a Link During Time Schedule Aways Activate When Alarm is Masked v Begin Action End Action Deactive Save Add EZE Clear E Add Relay 1 Start by clicking on the Clear button and enter the data as described below 2 Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the Relay Name The name of each relay must be unique Enter the Relay Number Address of the relay that is being configured Select from the drop down list of pre configured Field Panels the one to which the relay is connected 5 Alarm Linking allows you to link the selected Relay to a selected Alarm Point Any time the alarm point goes into alarm the relay will activate and when the alarm cancels the relay will deactivate This allows you to link any numbe
220. e you are installing the workstation click the radio button next to Topaz Workstation For information about installing a server see Installing a Host PC Server on page 1 14 Caution A You must install TOPAZ on the server computer before installing it on any work station computer Also make certain that the server computer and the workstation computer are communicating properly GE Security February 2 2005 8 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide iF Topaz Setup Ready to Install the Application Click Nest to begin installation 6 If you satisfied with your settings click Next to start installing the system i Topaz Setup Updating System The features you selected are curently being installed The wizard will upload the required files and install them onto the computer During the process a progress bar will display 8 12 460932001 GE Security Workstation 5 Topaz Setup Topaz has been successfully installed Click the Finish button to exit this Installation 4 Back Eancel 7 When all the files have been installed the Topaz has been successfully installed dialog window will display Click Finish to continue with the installation of several video files These files are installed whether or not you are using Video NYE Codec Installer i xl i This program will install the MVR Wavelet Codec onto your computer During the installation process some temporary Files w
221. ecords printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Reader Setup a gt Sh i READER CONFIGURATION READER MAME BACK DOOR READER NUMBER O DEVICE Gaslite Main MESSAGE WORESTATION 1 SECURITY AREA SYSTEM DOOR STRIKE TIME 5 SEC HELD OPEN TIMER 15 SEE EEYPAD AVAILABLE Mo KEEYPAD ACCESS DIGITS O READER DESCRIPTION TIME ZOME NEVER BEGINNING ACTION Accessa No Keypad ENDING ACTION Access No Keypad FAIL SAFE LOCE YM No EXTEND DOOR HELD OPEN ON REQUEST TO EXIT Y N No ALLOW ONE MINUTE HELD OPEN ALARM GRACE PERIOD N No LOCK DOOR AFTER DOOR CLOSES Y N No MASE LOCE MONITOR DURING VaLID N No MAG LOCK BOND SENSOR Y N No OPERATE DOOR STRIKE WHEN EXIT PUSH BUTTON USED Y N YES EXIT PUSH BUTTON ONE DEFAULT DOOR CONTACT ZONE DEFAULT DOOR STRIKE RELAY NUMBER 16 DORESS VIDEO SWITCHER ALARM NUMBER O READER FORMAT WIEGAND 6 OR 37 BIT VARIABLE CARD FORMAT O0 GE Security February 2 2005 6 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide Alarm Point Setup Report The Alarm Point Setup Report tells how Alarm Points are configured setup in the system To navigate to the Alarm
222. edule Always Configured Readers JA is x ADMIN NW End Action Unlock Door M Duress Events Video Switch Video Switch Alarm TA Video Switch Preset E aaam AAA Description E E aa CAFETERIA Northwest Entrance y ENTRANCE TWO VIEWS vv Reader Action Schedule Select the Time Schedule for the Reader Action Schedule This will allow the reader to enter the selected action at the Begin Action beginning of the time schedule and enter another selected Action at the End Action end of the time schedule The selected Begin Actions and End Actions are as follows e Access No Keypad Only a valid card for access is required e Access Keypad Only a keypad is required for access e Access Company Mode Access will be granted if the Company Code on the card is correct e Access Facility Code Access will be granted if the Facility Code on the card is correct e Lock Door Door will lock and no access will be granted for any cardholder e Unlock Door Door will unlock e Conditional Unlock This options keeps the door locked until a cardholder with Authorized for Conditional Unlock presents their card e Turn On Keypad Enter Only a valid PIN is required for access e Turn Off Keypad Entry A valid PIN is not required for access GE Security February 2 2005 8 45 TOPAZ Software User Guide NOTE If you need to make a new schedule click on the 6 link arrow This will open an additional window with
223. eferences to Windows XP Operating System Priority 1 is Highest Priority Alarm 7 18 Appendix on USB Camera F 1 System Requirements 1 7 Note in error on page 8 24 Setup for Internet Explorer 1 8 and 8 7 Recommendations for panel updating 4 13 Computer Virus Notice P 5 GE Security Revision Level Revision C 4 Revision D Revision D 1 Revision D 2 Revision D 3 Revision D 4 460932001 GE Security Issue Date September 25 2003 Updated Added October 29 2003 Added December 29 2003 Removed January 26 2004 Added new option Added new field March 2 2004 Modified March 12 2004 Modified Added Added February 2 2005 Added Revisions Description Facility Codes increased to 16 7 21 Video Switcher Preset to Alarm Point Options 8 51 Reference for Windows XP Professional support Reference to RREs and IKE Keypad no longer supported Relock Door on Strike Timeout 8 42 Video Switcher Preset 8 51 Elevator Relay Interface diagram 8 31 Dial up Page with modem information 8 27 External Dial up Modem Setup 8 29 Software Setup external modem 8 29 Support for the GE Security Video 8 63 February 2 2005 P 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank P 4 460932001 GE Security Preface Important Notice About Computer Viruses GE Security strongly recommends that Anti Virus protection software be installed and frequently updated on all GE Security server
224. eft mouse button and hold it down until the right shade of the desired color appears Release the left mouse button and the scrolling will stop 9 10 460932001 GE Security Entering Information To select the desired shade place the mouse pointer over the selected color and click the left mouse button A box will appear indicating that the color has been selected If none of the colors on the palette appear suitable you may tailor a color to suit by using the Red Green and Blue color adjusters at the right of the color palette You should first select from the palette the nearest color to the desired shade The color you selected will show in the large color frame to the left of the color adjusters To adjust the tint you can then place the mouse pointer over the up or down arrow next to the tint number of the Red Green or Blue color adjuster and click the left mouse button to change the value of the selected tint The tint values may be set between 0 and 256 As the tint is adjusted the actual color will be shown in the large color frame at the left of the color adjusters and also in the selected palette color surrounded by the black box This particular color will then be saved as part of the standard color palette for future use Print If The Print If section of the attributes screen may be used to define the conditions under which a Picked object is printed Print If can be used to print text or a bitmap image photograph signature e
225. elect the reader to be deleted Do this by clicking on the name of the reader to be deleted in the Configured Readers window to the right of the main window Wait for the reader s configuration information to be displayed in the main window and the reader description to be displayed in the Description window below the Configured Readers window After making sure that the correct reader to delete is selected click the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record Will display Click Yes to continue A message Operation Complete will display The reader will be removed from the list of Configured Readers NOTE When deleting a reader the Alarm points for the reader will remain in the data base If the reader is added back into the system the alarm points will be reassigned to the reader unless you previously deleted the alarm points 460932001 GE Security Reader Options Reader Options Page The Reader Options page allows you to set up automatic actions for the reader to perform and assign video switchers and digital video recorders to the reader To navigate to the Reader Options page from any Setup page click the Reader tab button in the navigation bar at the top of the window and then the Options tab button The following page will display ras E JI Serial Port Y LAN CT MEET Field Panel El Reader _ Alar m Point Relay Auto o Config Video 7 A Setup a Reader Actions q as E Reader Action Sch
226. elow In order for Keypad Masking to work three conditions must all be set in the following order 1 Select the area under Setup Security Area to allow Keypad Masking 2 In order to mask any alarms the cardholder must first be allowed access into that Security Area Under Cards Access select the cardholder then the area under Available Security Areas and move that area to the Selected Security Areas column 3 The cardholder must have that Masking Security area selected Under Cards Masking move the area from Available Masking Areas to Selected Masking Areas 4 Click the Save button to save the changes To use the keypad to mask unsecure an area the cardholder user must enter the PIN 20 to mask the alarm For example if his PIN is 1023 the cardholder must enter 1043 to mask that security area The alarms will be turned off and the door will unlock NOTE If a security area has Keypad Masking Allowed checked the cardholder can not gain access to the area until the area is Masked lf one cardholder unmasks that alarm anyone with access to that area can enter The alarm will be off 3 18 460932001 GE Security Masking Page To secure the area an authorized cardholder user must enter his PIN 10 to unmask the alarm For example if his PIN is 1023 he must enter 1033 to unmask that security area The alarms will then be set on NOTE If an alarm associated with the area being unmasked is active at the time
227. ement in the badge to have the attributes window pop up as shown below DEFAULTS Test Options a e Fontieme ane F Outline Ted Rotation 10 T Alignmeni Case Bar Code ate Formal Mame Forn ads Lett Justity bo Change Mo Barcode C Mo Change Mo Changs C Right Justify C Upper Casa Code Sofa E ddim Last Haria Center C LowerCese C Code 128 C mmidd C First Name C Underline C Mixed Case C Code fos osadrnmidd t Miicicile Neme claar C dd mmm yy First and Middle Flip Mame Color and Lines lo a Red Line Wich lo IN lo H Green C Round Corners T Fill in i Bluo ill in area IBM A O A A O A A O 0 10001 Colar A E E E E E E E E E E E HE HB A E E E a E A A A A A A E E ES B ee A 1 6 ee ee ee A A A Photo and Bimap elterations E chamak E Eirin Ea E Ghostre F Flad endishe Ace Restele Print It Detabase Field Condition Value to Check Petter Fill Badge Raplicata TT Bnick Pattem l Double Space cencal_ 9 20 460932001 GE Security File Menu File Menu MES Edt Draw e New New Open Oper e Save Save e Save As Save Az Quit Quit During the process of badge design it is recommended that you periodically save the badge template using the File menu on the Menu Bar at the top of the screen The first time a template is saved you mist use the Save As command By moving the mouse pointer to the File menu on the menu bar at the top of the screen and clicki
228. en If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page i i SE pa A PPP ee FIELD PANEL DEVICE CONFIGURATION PANEL MAME Gaslite Main TENANT PARTITION NAME PANEL LOGICAL NUMBER 1 PANEL ACTIVATED NO DATA ENCRYPTION NO DIALUP DEVICE Y N NO SERVER COM PORT NUMBER 1 PANEL POLLING ADDR Oo PANEL SERIAL NUMBER o PANEL TYPE ACU 2 PANEL POLLING DELAY o PANEL DESCRIPTION Gaslite Publishing Main ACUZs panel ELEVATOR OPERATION OR Ni NO EXPANSION MODULE ADR 4 PORT 1 MODULE UNDEFINED ADR 5 PORT 1 MODULE UNDEFINED ADR 6 PORT 1 HODULE UNDEFINED ADR PORT 1 MODULE UNDEFINED END OF REPORT GE Security February 2 2005 6 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide Reader Setup Report The Reader Setup Report provides all the information on how the readers are configured setup in the system To navigate to the Reader Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup report pages click on the Reader tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display gt Sa onc IVES Display Report Q Reader Setup E A All Readers Ves gt 4 Output To File o q4 i Print Report e Output File Name Run Report Cancel Report All Readers If Yes is selected all readers will be listed on the report If No is selected then a reader must be selected from the drop down list under Reader Name
229. ence Field B information on cardholders This is usually a type of information that is unique to the site or facility Vehicle 1 IDor VEH 1 ID Alphanumeric Up to 10 characters License e This is a reference field for a cardholder s Number primary vehicle ID or license number and may be used at the option of the system owner Vehicle 2IDor VEH 2 ID Alphanumeric Up to 10 characters License e This is a reference field for a cardholder s Number second vehicle ID or license number and may be used at the option of the system owner GE Security February 2 2005 E 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank E 6 460932001 GE Security Appendix F The optional USB camera allows you to take live employee photos from the Topaz system The following instructions will step you through the setup of the camera after the drivers are installed Installing USB Camera Driver Caution Do Not connect the USB camera until after the drivers are installed Start by placing the Topaz CD in to your computer CD drive The CD is set to auto start Browse CD Click the Browse CD in the install screen Located and open the directory with the name of the camera your are installing The example below shows the Logitech Cameras directory Topaz 1 44 Ds LD ACUX_ Utilities i 4UTOptn Se Demo Guide aor a Firmware HN Logitech Cameras o Ela l GE Security F 1 Topaz Software User Guide Then loc
230. ene dd Gel Ey aye aaa eats LAN COmimuUnICallon Page E A See Es ea Re ee ene a WOrkstaloM Pages id tl o Molalla VVOIKS ANON ed ici ride A ido Bane ee et E VIGGITY 2 Workstation sida ciao Ronee pienso Stace eee ee ee wed tales dd ate eee A ea ete Held Panel Pade sca idad DS ot Cae he ee Eh ed hee oe a TATE AS aan tao ose a a hee as ecg dy Math adh AG bee ee dae tad keeles Elevator COMO i347 te04 oh aoa Soca Mead det ae sa Elevator Cab SCD vas AA Se a ae aes oo Elevator Floor Definition Page 1 0 ce eee eens Elevator Public ACCESS oo acted 6 ad eae Sia eS cw hada eal aye See Sia bo ds REAGIS a Cae hone eae wena eae si aida Gh Se ee Reader Setup Page ostras Padus eee BAS a Kean hea Sees eS Reader Options Page seiten owes REA RE ete SSeS See Alarm Point Setup Page ee eee eee Alarm Poin ODIONS Page 424 5 3234 4 dica Aa PS lA AOS rhe red dara A Be ccna ay tia Ge boar at Sate West Rene aa ge sa Sets Sede das ta tay ay eee Auto Configuration Setup Page 0 cc eee eee eee DEVICE ICC nico Dio Sta ch Sepia ne ack a ete SG oe eee VIdeo Recorde xi susie as ease eae are ea oe Od ee aed at he A Add a new Video Recorder 000 ccc ee eee eens pi A hoe Aa RRR AE GSES AE Le eee ee eae aes ae GE Security February 2 2005 TOPAZ Software User Guide CHAPTER 9 BADGE DESIGN 2255042655 A eee eee 9 1 INTFOCUCION 1 A AE A oe Oe tee hee ao 9 1 Accessing Badge Design eee eee eens 9 3 E
231. eport to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page GE Security February 2 2005 6 57 TOPAZ Software User Guide Below is a sample of a displayed Alarm History Report p i e A he I START DATE TIME ALARM POINT ACU 1 LOW BATT ACU 1 LOW BATT acu 1 acu 1 acu 1 ACU 1 BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK BACK LOBBY LOBBY LOBBY LOBBY LOBEY Fields in the Report TU I PONER PONER TAMPER TAMPER DODR DC DODR DC DOOR FO DOOR FO DOOR HO DOOR HO DOOR OL DOOR OL DODR REX DOOR REX DODR RT DODR RT DODR DC DODR DC DOOR FO DOOR FO DOOR HO ALARM HISTORY SUMMARIZED BY ALARM POINTS END DATE TIME 0402 11 12 56 46 TYPE FREQ LLH TEE ALM TRE LLH TEE ALM TRE ALM TRE ALM TRE ALM TRE ALM TRE ALM TRE ALM TRE LLH TEE ALM FOoOoroOoooOOoOdrFOOcOOoOOoO oO rF OOOO oO oO oO O TOTAL DURATION HA MM 00 FOG OG FOG OG FOG OG FOG oes OG 00 CH CE
232. er Database is set to Lost ACCESS DENIED USING STOLEN CARD Access was denied because the Card Status in the Cardholder Database is set to Stolen ACCESS DENIED WRONG AREA e Access was denied because this cardholder requested access into a security area not assigned to the card ACCESS DENIED WRONG COMPANY CODE e Access was denied because this card s encoded Company Code is not the same as GE Security February 2 2005 B 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide configured in the Site Configuration ACCESS DENIED WRONG FACILITY CODE e Access was denied because the facility code encoded on the card does not match the facility code in the Site configuration ACCESS DENIED WRONG KEYPAD NUMBER e Access was denied because this cardholder entered the wrong Keypad Number PIN at a keypad Reader ACCESS DENIED WRONG KEYPAD TOO MAY ATTEMPTS e This is a special event to notify you this card has exceeded the number of Wrong Keypad attempts ACCESS DENIED WRONG TIME e Access was denied because this cardholder requested access during the wrong time The time configured in Time Zones is configured is assigned each security area and there is also a time zone on each reader ACCESS ON COMPANY CODE CORRECT FACILITY CODE e Access was granted based only on the Correct Company Code on the card Access on Company code is set up in Reader Configuration This card had the Same Facility encoded on the card as stored in the Sit
233. er in the database The default is by Name You can select a different filter by moving the mouse pointer to the Search by button The drop down list will display allowing you to select one of four 4 other options As the mouse pointer is moved over the search fields they will change color When the desired field is highlighted click the left mouse button to select it Recall By Name default e Card Number Card Number seral Number e Serial Number e Employee Number Employee Number e Vehicle License Vehicle License Recall by Name 1 Inthe Enter Cardholder window as you start typing the name of the cardholder the Enter Cardholder list will highlight the name in the list For z gt example if m is typed then Martin Jean is highlighted in the scrolling Select Cardholder window If this is the cardholder you are looking for then click on the highlighted name in the Select Cardholder window The data window will fill in with Jean Martin s data George Jeremy 3 4 460932001 GE Security 2 You may also scroll through the Select Card Number Page Cardholder list in the window and when the Enter Cardholder desired cardholder name is located click on a the name of the cardholder The data window will fill in with the cardholder s data that you just clicked on IhMcPherson Stave Select Cardholder CAN TU NEIL DEYWHIRST JILL F JOHNSON DA LEE BRENDA McPherson i See MOSGAN SHIFI AP SCOTT
234. even if know it is wrong The Internet Explorer has cached the screen Disable caching by 1 Double click on the Internet Explorer icon to open it 2 Click on Tools Internet Options 3 On the General Tab click in Settings 4 Click on Every visit to the page 5 Click OK to save I get script errors You must load Internet Explorer s 6 from the TOPAZ CD If you already have installed Internet Explorer on your PC you must re install it from our CD and complete the Wizard I get system error messages Call GE Interlogix Technical Support 888 GESecurity I get the error message EMERGENCY REBUILD CARD FILE Call GE Interlogix Technical Support 888 GESecurity I can run TOPAZ but when I click on the Help button s either nothing happens or get the error message Action Cancelled Reinstall the software Other Notes e In order to run TOPAZ you must have the Microsoft Internet Explorer set for cookies enabled the default Some people turn cookies off for privacy reasons when browsing the Internet but TOPAZ needs the per session cookies Enabled in order to recall screens and link to windows TOPAZ will not work properly without this setting A 2 460932001 GE Security You can reset the cookies in MS Internet Explorer by the following procedure 1 Click on the Internet Explorer icon to bring it up 2 Click on Tools Internet Options 3 Click on the Security Tab 4
235. ew users There are two Help buttons located in the top left corner of each of the browser pages dex Help Index This button will open a content sub window that will enable you to locate topics from the whole Help system by using the Table of Contents Index or Search functions iip Page Help This button will open a content sub window that will enable you to easily locate topics covered on the currently selected browser window only However while using the Page Help you may also click on the Word SHOW button in the top left corner of the help page This will open the Global Help as a sub window on the left side of the help page allowing you to access all the Help topics Navigating the Help Table of Contents The Table of Contents structure follows the navigation hierarchy of TOPAZ On the left side you will see the Table of Contents displayed like a Windows tree Each E Closed Book represents a branch of the tree such as the Reports Button book shown below E Control Button GE Security February 2 2005 1 25 TOPAZ Software User Guide When you move the pointer over a book title it will underline the Title Clicking on the underlined title to the right of the Book opens that A Book to display 7 Pages such as Employee Reports in the Book and possibly more Books as shown below f Reports Button 7 Report 1 Cardholder Database Report E System Setup Report f Recall Event Reports 7 Recall Events
236. ext of the alarm to be acknowledged so it is highlighted Click the PACK Acknowledge button and the Alarm Details page shown below will display The alarm sound will continue until all the alarms in the queue have been acknowledged Current State Becure Acked By ritchl Priority z Alarm Name ACCOUNTING FO Alarm Type IF orced Open ALARM il Date Time Description jAccounting Office Main Device Name Area Instructions pis door has been dt Comments L A forced open Senda Guard to Investigate Alarm Details Page The Alarm Details page contains the following information e Current State The state of the alarm e Priority The priority assigned to the alarm during alarm point setup e Alarm Type The alarm type assigned to the alarm during alarm point setup e Description The description assigned to the alarm during alarm point setup e Instructions The instruction message text assigned during Alarm Option Instructions setup e Acked By The name of the operator logged on to the system when the event was acknowledged Alarm Name The name assigned to the alarm during alarm point setup e Date Time The date and time the alarm event occurred e Device Name The name assigned to ACU field panel the point is attached to e Area The area assigned to the alarm during alarm point setup e Comments Comments typed in by the operator optional Now click the ACK ACK button to ackn
237. f the output relay you are looking for appears in the list The color of the text for the output relay name shows the status of the relay The color definitions are listed below Status Color De Energize Black Energize Red Pulse Output Not shown NOTE The status of relays may also be checked on the Control Relay page If you want to print the contents of the Status window click on the Print button at the bottom of the page GE Security February 2 2005 5 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank 460932001 GE Security Chapter 6 Reports Button A large selection of reports is available within the system Reports pages that can provide administrators with a display or printouts on cardholders employees events alarms and system configuration Reports are available for e Cardholder Database e System Setup e Recall Events e Alarm History e Employee Report To navigate to the Reports pages click the Report button in the main navigation toolbar at the left side of the browser screen The following screen will display Cardholder Database System Setup Recall Events Alarm History Employee Report Navigate to the desired reports type by clicking on the corresponding Y Navigation Button next to the report type desired GE Security February 2 2005 6 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Cardholder Database Reports Page The Cardholder Database Reports page can o
238. following screen will display Field Panel Reader Alarm Point Output Relay Click on the Y button next to the name of the type of device Field Panel Reader etc for which you wish to check the status While viewing any one of the status screens you can refresh the screen by click the tab for the screen selecting it again GE Security February 2 2005 5 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Field Panel Status Page The Field Panel Status page allows you to check the status of any configured Field Panel SCP Device in the system To navigate to the Field Panel Status page click on the button next to Field Panel on the main Status page or click the Panel tab button at the top of the window while in any Status page The following page will display 3 Status Tuesday February 17 2004 7 09 43 4M Microsoft Internet Explorer Version Rdrs Addr Serial Status 0 Inactive To check the status of a panel scroll through the list of pre configured panels until the name of the desired panel appears in the list The color of the text for the panel shows the status of the panel The color definitions are listed below Status Color Panel On line Black Panel Off line Magenta NOTE The status of the panel may also be checked on the Panel Control page If you want to print the contents of the Status window click on the Print button at the bottom of the page 9 2 460932001 GE Security Reader Status Reader Status Pa
239. following buttons appear in the top left corner of the toolbar To mask or unmask the alarm point right click on the icon to display a menu next to the icon From the menu you can select options that are not grayed out In the following example the only options available are Mask and Details If the alarm were configured as a non maskable alarm point the Mask option would also be grayed out GE Security February 2 2005 10 13 Topaz Software User Guide Click on the option you want to select it Details Activates the Alarm Detail window to show alarm instructions acknowledge the alarm clear the alarm and type in comments This button will display Alarm Detail window See 4cknowedge Alarm for more information You can also double click the alarm point icon on the map to display the Alarm Detail window Relay Control Buttons Relay Activate Activates turns on the selected relay Relay Deactivate Deactivates turns offi the selected relay Relay Toggle Toggles the relay between activated and deactivated Relay Pulse Activates the relay for just under one second and then deactivates It Double clicking the relay icon on the map will also toggle the condition of the selected relay For example if the relay is active when you double click on the icon it will deactivate the relay and vice versa You can also right click on the relay icon to display a menu next to the icon From the menu you can select a
240. for the Operator Type in the list that you wish to modify A list of operator functions is listed under Allowed The Restricted list on the right shows any restricted functions set for that Operator Type 2 You can move functions to the Allowed or Restricted lists and set a new Level of Restriction 3 Then click on the Save Add button Delete Operator Type 1 Click on the name for the Operator Type in the list that you wish to delete so that it is highlighted The Operator Type Name will display 2 Click on the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 Amessage Operation Complete will display 7 6 460932001 GE Security Time Schedule Time Schedule Page The Time Schedule page allows you to configure time frames to link to functions within TOPAZ For example you can configure a Time Schedule to automatically lock and unlock doors mask alarms during business hours or to turn on the parking lot lights e Add Time Schedule e Modify Time Schedule e Delete Time Schedule To navigate to the Time Schedule page from any Setup page click the Time Schedule tab button at the top of the page or from the main Setup page click the Time Schedules button on the right side of the page The following page will display Schedule Name I Start Time Stop Time Active on Days Holiday Hour Min Hour Min Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 182 o goo o oo a IS Business H
241. g the left mouse button This will highlight the bitmap name Either double click the left mouse button over the highlighted name or move the mouse pointer to the OK button and click the left mouse button The Bitmap will appear in the area between the Handles of the Picked object When the bitmap image is displayed in the area between the Handles of the Picked object the full image may not be displayed if the Picked object does not have the correct relative dimensions of height and width The Picked object may be adjusted for relative dimensions by placing the mouse pointer over one of the Handles and holding down the left mouse button This will grab the Handle and allow you to resize the Picked object until the entire bitmap portion which you require is shown inside the Picked object You may then size the image by using the same method to adjust the size of the Picked object keeping the relative dimensions of the Picked object the same while increasing or decreasing its overall size Once the image has been correctly sized you can move it by placing the mouse pointer over the area of the Picked object clicking and holding the left mouse button and dragging the object to the required position on the badge Once the bitmap image is placed you may assign attributes to the image by placing the mouse pointer within the area of the Picked object and clicking the right mouse button These attributes include Chroma Cut Chroma Key Ghosting
242. gation buttons on the left of the screen and in the Alarm Queue window at the bottom of the screen will be available at all times while any page of TOPAZ is selected Shutting Down the Software The following is the recommended method to shut down the System software and its peripheral devices In order to prevent loss of data follow these procedures in the order listed If your system includes optional hardware refer to the equipment s accompanying documentation and follow the manufacturer s instructions Caution Once you have shut down the TOPAZ workstation all on line processing will stop at the workstation If the TOPAZ Server is powered down it will not enunciate any alarm reports or access requests Depending on your current security hardware access control decisions may then be handled by the controller ACU in the field You should have a contingency plan in effect to monitor alarms manually while the TOPAZ Server is off line You must take whatever precautions necessary to pro tect the safety of the personnel and equipment in your facility Shutting Down Program Software Procedure 1 Start from any TOPAZ System page 2 Click the OPAZ SHUTDOWN TOPAZ SHUTDOWN Button in the bottom right corner of the screen The message gt Are you sure that you want to shut down the system will display Click OK 3 The TOPAZ System program will close and return the Windows desktop 1 38 460932001 GE Security System Control
243. ge The Reader Status page allows you to check the status of any configured reader in the system To navigate to the Reader Status page click on the button next to Reader on the main Status page or click the Reader tab button at the top of the window while in any Status page The following page will display Gy Ce Panel i A arn a int Name Mode State Forced Held Tamper Status BACK DOOR LOBBY DOOR Print To check the status of a reader scroll through the list of configured readers until the name of the reader appears in the list The color of the text for the reader name shows the status of the reader The color definitions are listed below Status Color System Control Black Unlocked Red Momentary Unlock Not shown Locked Green NOTE The status of readers may also be checked on the Control Reader page If you want to print the contents of the Status window click on the Print button at the bottom of the page GE Security February 2 2005 5 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Alarm Point Status Page The Alarm Point Status page allows you to check the status of any configured Alarm Point in the TOPAZ system To navigate to the Alarm Point status page click on the button next to Alarm Point on the main Status page or click the Alarm Point tab button at the top of the window while in any Status page The following page will display ml META TA gt Status Tuesday February 17 2004 7 12 31 AM Microsoft Internet
244. ge Design package with multi layer design tools a full editing package including copy paste automatic centering and full drag and drop capabilities The design package also includes snap to grid facilities automatically scalable fonts with auto kerning and landscaping badge templates an extensive color palette with individual color design facilities and a full badge design check and test print capability It includes a sophisticated photo capture facility providing vertical and horizontal photo centering controls brightness contrast color intensity and hue controls for the photo image and a multi frame capture which allows you to chose the best image to be included on the badge The system allows you to enter text signatures and database information directly from the cardholder database and to print bitmaps photos and text based on conditions set for any of the fields in the Cardholder record The TOPAZ Photo Badging software can be used with a range of industry standard dye sublimation printers like the Eltron P310 C direct connect printer The software also supports double sided printing automatic magnetic stripe encoding and use of hologram overlays Once the required video hardware is available in the system the software will provide you with a complete set of tools and facilities necessary to design and print photo ID badges and all other functions outlined above For additional hardware requirements and options for each
245. gs page Under Anti Passback you can select Enable to activate the Anti Passback feature for this site In addition you must select cardholders and security areas under Control Reset APB There are two options for Executive APB Override Deny Access If APB is violated the system will deny access to the area and will generate an access denied alarm This is the normal selection for most cardholders otherwise Anti Passback has little value e Grant Access If APB is violated the system will allow access to the area provided the cardholder is authorized for entry to that area during that time etc Executive APB Override applies only to Anti Passback conditions It does not override other access rules This will still trigger an alarm For more information on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 PIN Code The PIN Code is the Personal Identification Number or password maximum number of digits is 4 that the cardholder is to use at the keypad for access If the PIN is less than 4 digits then leading zeros must be entered For example if the PIN is 23 and the PIN code is set for 4 digits you must enter 0023 at the card reader You can also use the asterisk after the number for example 23 NOTE If keypads are not enabled on the Reader Setup Page then no PIN Code is required Available Security Areas Next select the Security Areas that the cardholder will be authorized to access Do this by c
246. gure any device by clicking the Auto Configuration button The system software will detect any newly added device such as ACU panel or card reader and set it up with default values Default Device Names After Auto Configuration has been completed the devices will have numeric names for example Reader 2 1 3 is Host Port two 2 Field Panel address one 1 Reader number three 3 You may want to rename the devices with your own descriptive names For more detailed information see the chart below Reader Type COM ACU Polling Alarm Alarm Type i DO ES A S RDR 1 0 0 FO a Alarm memo Alam 1 0 hp ja ajo C Bamele ype Device Reader Por Address Alarm Type Panel arms AGUTTAMPER AGO 4 TAMPER input Module RMO RM 1 oo f 7 oome Output Module RRMTTSOL RM 1 1 8 oromo When you click on the Auto Configuration button the message Please be patient while we examine your system will display InfoGraphics TOPAZ System Click OK to continue GE Security February 2 2005 8 57 TOPAZ Software User Guide If no new devices are detected the following page will display Not Configured Expand All Compress All Clear All Not Found jee Gaslite Extension Editorial Extension office 616 Gaslite Elevator Main Building Elevator Contra JELEVATOR 1 HO i Select All a Clear All Configure ee Device Tree You can instead select the standalone Device Tree
247. gured After the system has been configured and all data is entered you can run reports and generate lists on each of the setup items The following reports are available e Field Panel e Time Schedule e Instructions e Holidays e Alarm Point e Serial Port e Relay e Access Events e Operator Type e Elevator e Security Area e Capabilities e Access Group e Reader To navigate to the System Setup Report page from any page within the Reports pages click on the System Setup tab button at the top of the page or from the main Reports page click on the System Setup button on the right side of the screen The following page will display NOTE The Field Panel page will display as the default Display Report Q Print Report e Output To File e Output File Name Run Report Cancel Report GE Security February 2 2005 6 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide Field Panel Setup Report The Field Panel Setup Report provides all the information on how the field panels are configured setup in the system To navigate to the Field Panel Setup Report page from any page within the Reports pages click on the System Setup tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Access Eve P i SE TANE AA Fa k Field Panels e i y y a Display Report Q A l N Print Report m p _ Ml TAT Repa Output To File amp Output File Name k k Run Report Cancel Report The report will
248. has ended then retry this command Access denied The file or disk is read only Incorrect internal file identifier The storage control blocks were destroyed There is not enough memory available to process this command The storage control block address is invalid The environment is incorrect An attempt was made to load a program with an incorrect format Invalid access code The data is invalid The system cannot find the specified disk drive The disk directory cannot be removed Remove all files and sub directories before deleting directory The file cannot be moved You cannot move a file to a different drive No more files The disk drive is write protected Remove write protect and retry command Cannot find disk drive specified Disk drive not ready Make sure disk is installed and drive light is ready The device does not recognize the command Data Error If the error occurred on the hard disk retry the command IF the error occurs again the hard disk may have to be reformatted If the error occurred on a diskette insert a formatted diskette and retry the command The program issued a command but the length is incorrect Seek Error The disk may be damaged unformatted or not compatible The specified disk or diskette cannot be accessed Format the disk February 2 2005 A 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
249. he possible selections are Even None and Odd Port Connection Device From the drop down list select the type of device that will be connected to the port The list of equipment selection is as follows e SCP Device e SCP Dial up e Video Switcher If this device is selected the Video Switcher Type field will be active allowing a selection of a brand of switcher NOTE You cannot change the connection device after the serial port has been saved You cannot change the connection device after the field panel is assigned to a serial port If you wish to change the port connection device you must deactivate the port by un checking the Active box and clicking Save Then you may modify the port This feature is only available in TOPAZ Ver 1 30 and later If you see the following message you must first deactivate all field panels that are configured on the port before you can deactivate the port InfoGraphics TOPAZ System Workstation Server ritchb j AN Device s are Active Request Aborted Video Switcher Type Before this field becomes active Video Switcher must be selected for the Port Connection Device Select the brand of video switcher from the drop down list The list of possible switchers is given below e American Dynamics e Panasonic e Quest Win e Burle e Pelco e Vicon e GE DVMRe e Quest Plus Description Enter up to 60 alphanumeric characters to describe the device s connected to this port Clicking Clear at any
250. he TOPAZ software was installed usually c TOPAZ 4 Click on the plus sign next to the TOPAZ folder to expand its list of subfolders H Topaz 5 Select the dms2 folder You should see a list of files such as the following Folders x Type Modified BM SapphireProDemo laa add FOO dt 1 025 KB DT File 2116 2004 1 14 PM EMOS SIERRA monpts dt 2 050 KB DT File 2 16 2004 1 14 PM a Topaz laa monptsi ins 392KB INXFie 2 16 2004 1 14 PM E 28 aacofx sadf00 dt 1 025KB DT File 2 16 2004 1 14 PM A If you don t see a list with filenames and dates as shown above select View and then Details The files listed should correspond to the files in the TOPAZ message Double click on the Modified title to sort the files by date and time A A Select the files with the most current date and time under Modified by pressing and holding the SHIFT key clicking on the top Name then clicking on the last name with that same date and time This is to select only the most recently repaired files 10 Select Edit and then Cut 11 Select the dms1 folder to open its folder icon 12 Select Edit and then Paste 13 You should see a Windows Confirm File Replace dialog box Select Yes to All 14 This completes the moving of files from dms2 to dms1 You may now close Windows Explorer by selecting File and then Close 15 Restart TOPAZ This completes the database repair s you have selected GE Security February 2
251. he door strike timer then the Held Open time will be used to end the door cycle and a new card read will re fire the door strike and restart the timers The above action requires the panel to have firmware version 5 79 5 series or 6 10 6 series or higher The first two of these options require a door contact to monitor door condition Magnetic Bond Sensor Select this option when you want the third alarm point connection to work with some type of latch monitor sensor such as a magnetic Lock When selected alarm point number Z02 will be wired to the latch monitor When not selected it may be used as a normal alarm point Workstation for Reports Select from the drop down list the server or Workstation to which the reports from the reader will be sent NOTE If you need to setup a Workstation click on the 6 link arrow This will open an additional window with the Workstation setup page to allow you to setup the Workstation When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button Overlapped Access Normally after an access is granted the system must see the door closed before the reader will reset for the next cardholder When this option is selected by placing a checkmark in the box the reader will reset immediately after the first access request is made by a cardholder allowing the next cardholder to access the reader without closing the door For this feature to work properly a door contact switch should be
252. he file GE Security February 2 2005 6 51 TOPAZ Software User Guide name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report _ Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed Recall Access Events report E ae A RW es i i RECALL ACCESS EVENTS EVENT 746 ACCESS REPORT 2004 02 17 Tue 11 03 38 TRACE BY ACCESS POINT ACCESS AUTHORIZED ACCESS POINT BACE DOOR SECURITY AREA SYSTEM poo1 ROO CARDHOLDER MAME Aberdeen Schuyler E ACCESS POINT DESCRIPTION EVENT 751 ACCESS REPORT 2004 02 17 Tue 11 04 51 ACCESS DENIED CARD NOT DEFINED ACCESS POINT LOBBY DOOR SECURITY AREA SYSTEM DOOL ROL CHRDHOLDER NAHE CARD UNDEF les4 5676 OQ000132465 ACCESS POINT DESCRIPTION EVENT 762 ACCESS REPORT 2004 02 17 Tue 11 07 49 ACCESS DENIED WRONG AREA ACCESS POINT LOBBY DOOR SECURIT
253. he map will be copied to the aacgfx directory NOTE The only map files that can be added to the Color Graphics system must be an Enhanced Metafile format and have the emf extension Detailed Map A detailed map is created from a portion of a current map in the tree by drawing a rectangle around the area you want to become the new detail map This allows you to have an overview map of a building and then a more detailed cut away of an area or room from the building overview map To add a detailed map to the tree select the map in the tree you want to make the detail map from Click the a Detailed Map button and the Map information window below will display 7 E Map information ES Map Mame Cancel Enter the Map Name that will display with the icon on the map and click OK 10 20 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Select the area to be saved as the new detailed map by placing the mouse pointer at the starting point on the map then click and hold the left mouse button while dragging a rectangle around the desired area on the map aJeJeja AAA _ Maps Devices ae i I A TL Lampue e ns E A hi E i Q Tero otetih CAN or IENGINEE i To a Two Biolech Floor 1 LA Teo Biotech Dea 1 risa y te el and dra When you release the mouse button the area you selected will become the new detailed map in the map tree with the name you entered All the ic
254. he name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 14 460932001 GE Security Serial Port Setup Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Serial Port Setup SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION PORT NUMBER 1 PORT CONNECTION JP PORT IN SERVICE Wo BAUD RATE SELECTION 300 PARITY SELECTION EVEN END OF SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION REPORT GE Security February 2 2005 6 15 TOPAZ Software User Guide security Area Setup Report The Security Area Setup Report recalls how Security Areas have been setup T
255. he security area icon you want to color code and the following configuration window will display Secunty Area Configuration Secunty Area Name BACK DOOR Clear Polygonal Cancel NOTE You cannot change the name of the security area in this wndow You must go to Security Area page under the Setup button GE Security February 2 2005 10 31 Topaz Software User Guide To change the color of the area click the __ W Color button and the color window will display Color Ed Basic colors Select the color from the Basic or Custom colors by clicking on the color block The default black outline for the area icon will change to the color selected You can create your own color by clicking the Define Custom Colors button ne Color Basic colors W TM Er Mi CAT MEA A A i A A MA E A CA Custom colors 4 O ra mr Sat fo Green 0 A a My OF Cancel Add to Custom Colors 7 To create a custom color follow the steps below each number in the list corresponds to a number in the image above 1 Click the Custom color block to select where the new color will be placed You can replace an existing color by clicking that color block 2 Click the mouse pointer inside the rainbow window to select the general color you want 3 Click in the slide bar and select the shade of the color Continue changing the color areas in 10 32 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics step
256. he security area was denied because a device for the security area is offline or deactivated DENIED SECURE UNMASKING REQUEST UNAUTHORIZED AREA e The request to Secured Unmask the security area was denied because the cardholder is not authorized for Keypad Alarm Masking on this area B 4 460932001 GE Security DENIED TWO MAN ALARM MASKING REQUEST TIMEOUT e The request to Mask the security area was denied because the security is under control of Two Man Masking and the Host operator must initiate masking on the area DENIED TWO MAN ALARM UNMASKING REQUEST TIMEOUT e The request to Unmask the security area was denied because the security is under control of Two Man Masking and the Host operator must initiate unmasking on the area DENIED UN SECURE MASKING REQUEST DEVICE ERROR e The request to Unsecured Mask the security area was denied because a device for the security area is offline or deactivated DENIED UN SECURE MASKING REQUEST TMC SEQUENCE ERROR e The request to Unsecured Mask the security area was denied because the first cardholder of a Two Man Control Area tried to Secure Un secure the area DENIED UN SECURE MASKING REQUEST UNAUTHORIZED AREA e The request to Unsecured Mask the security area was denied because the cardholder is not authorized for Keypad Alarm Masking on this area DENIED UN SECURE MASKING REQUEST CONFIGURATION ERROR e The request to Unsecured Mask the security area wa
257. he top of the main window or from the main Hardware screen click the Reader button on the right side of the screen The following page will display E E Serial Port LAN Commi META Field Panel Reader _ By Alarm Pe Point Relay E Auto Config A Video Setup Options Options K TERASE ES Reader Name BEO Re Reader Number lo Unlock Time Seconds fe mz Field Panel Jaon Configured Readers p 2 i l Held Open Time Seconds Held Open Time Seconds A ara Format Standard Wiegand v ACU FI 0 ACU 1 1 PiNReguired No O este Down gt ACUP 2 ACUR2 2 Door Contact Vv Door Contact Zone foe ACU 3 1 IKE Reader B Door Be Door Bounce Delay Bio IKE Allow Ingress Door Strike Relay Bh Deraur Allow One Minute Grace Li Bf Fei secure Description Unlock Door on REX Vv Enter Ca Enter Card Siok Keypad Disabled y o Lack Type Extend Held Open on REX Ej Relock Door Lock on door opening T Magnetic Bond Sensor a A wor Workstation for r Reports Miren gt Overlapped Access 2 SavefiAdd Delete Add Reader Reader Name Enter the Reader Name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for example Lobby Door or Parking Gate Reader Number Select the Reader Number from the drop down list of 0 7 by clicking on the number This number is the address where this reader is connected on the reader board If you are not sure of the address contact your instal
258. hoose form 3 Click on the Time Schedule desired for the area name selected Repeat the above steps until all the time schedules have been selected for the security areas NOTE If you need to setup a Time Schedule click on the S link arrow This will open an additional window with the Time Schedule setup page to allow you to setup additional Time Schedules When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button Once all the Access Group data has been entered click the Save Add button at the bottom left side of the window to save the data to the Server After clicking the Save button one of the following messages will appear e If Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Access Group Name has been repeated Use a new name and try saving again e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try saving again NOTE At any point if you wish to Clear out all the entered information and start over click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data Modify Access Group 1 7 14 Select the access group to modify by scrolling through the Access Groups list and click on the name of the access group Once the name of the Access Group to modify is highlighted the security areas assigne
259. how to get it set up easily and quickly QuickStart will stay active in the foreground even if you click a button to access a TOPAZ screen If you want to see more of the background TOPAZ screen click and drag the QuickStart page by the menu bar at the top You may also minimize QuickStart by clicking on its minimize button in the upper right corner of the QuickStart window or click anywhere outside of the QuickStart window Once minimized you can open QuickStart at any time by clicking on the Quick Start QuickStart button in the Navigation Bar in the left side of the main TOPAZ window You can navigate through QuickStart by e Click on the underlined links e Use the scrollbar on the right of the window e Click on the Next Page gt gt and lt lt Previous page links To close QuickStart click the X in the upper right corner of the QuickStart window or click the Click here link You can open QuickStart at any time by clicking on the Quick Start QuickStart button in the Navigation Bar in the left side of the main TOPAZ window All the TOPAZ buttons in the QuickStart may also be clicked to access that part of the TOPAZ software 1 2 460932001 GE Security Subjects covered in the QuickStart are GE Security Programming Guide e Auto Configuration e Batch Card Entry Suggested System Setup Flow Chart e Setup e Hardware e Cards e Other menus you should become familiar with An Introduction to the TOP
260. i i e 3 8 WAVANIG su ii cote Sa es 7 17 Polling Delay Field Panel 8 24 Print BAC GC iinet id ell hed 3 14 Printers EVENT mearekin leo a cee ee ed eh 8 18 REDOM cat one ol ete cers 8 20 Pulse RelayS cimil de 4 7 Q QUICKS Fe g eee ae a ada 1 2 R Radio Frequency 000000 aes P 6 Reader Action Schedule 8 45 Elevator Cab Setup 8 32 Setup ROPO seria rr bees Be 6 8 Sal S ositos pci tv aia ia aes 4 2 Reader Control BB LON Sa ech eink dad daemon 4 3 Reader Control Page 4 2 Reader Event Page 17 27 Reader Options LOCK TYDE ace schacad ca ps Grete oS 8 42 Reader Options Page 8 45 Reader Setup Page 00 8 8 39 Reader Status Page 5 3 Recall Cardholder By Card Number 3 5 Cardholder By Name 3 4 Recall Access Events Report 6 50 Recall Alarm Events Report 6 53 Recall All Events Report 6 35 Recall Device Events Report 6 43 Recall Event Number Report 6 37 Recall Events Report 6 34 Recall Events Reports Access Events o oooooooo 6 50 Alarm Events o o o oooooo 6 53 All Events o oooocoocoooo 6 35 By Event Number 6 37 Other Events 6 46 l 5 TOPAZ Software User
261. ic during the selected time schedule security Areas Select a Security Area from the list by scrolling through the list and clicking on the name of the area so it is highlighted Only elevator security areas will appear in this list If you need to set up a Security Area click on the A Link Arrow This will open an additional window with the Security Area set up page to allow you to set up additional Security Area When set up has been completed close the window by clicking the Save Add button Time Schedule Select from the drop down list the Time Schedule for this elevator public access area The Default is Always If you need to set up a Time Schedule click on the 6 Link Arrow This will open an additional window with the Time Schedule set up page to allow you to set up additional Time Schedules When set up has been completed close the window by clicking the Save Add button SA Elevator Start Action There are two actions that are available for Elevator Start Action Select the action that will occur when the Time Schedule starts from the drop down list Options include e Public Access Enable default e Public Access Disable SA Elevator Stop Function There are two actions that are available for Elevator Stop Function Select the action that will occur when the Time Schedule ends from the drop down list Options include e Public Access Enable e Public Access Disable default Clear At any point if you wish to clear o
262. icate Record is displayed then the Alarm Name has been repeated Enter a new name and try again e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again Delete Alarm Point 1 To delete an Alarm Point from the System select the Alarm Point to be deleted by scrolling through the Alarm Input Points window and clicking on the name of the Alarm Point 2 Wait for the Alarm Point configuration information to be displayed in the main window and the Alarm Point description to be displayed in the Description window below the Alarm Input Points window 3 After making sure that the correct Alarm Point to delete is selected click the Delete button 4 Amessage Are you sure you want to delete this record Will display Click OK to continue 5 A message Operation Complete will display 8 50 460932001 GE Security Alarm Point Options Alarm Point Options Page The Options Page is used to assign digital cameras and video switchers to an alarm to control automatic masking actions and to link alarms to a relay To navigate to the Alarm Point Options page from any Hardware page click the Alarm Point tab button in the navigation bar at the top of the main window and then the Options tab button The following page will display A None y Alarm Input Points rst Camera ACU 1 LOW BATT a ACU 1 POWER Video Switcher Alarm Video Switcher Preset ACU 1 TAMPER LUARA Dial Up Report
263. ice point in the tree Map Configuration Buttons Map Configuration Buttons FEIT Insert Sibling Map Will add a map to the bottom of the list at the same level as the map ma currently selected Ea Insert Child Map Will add a map as a lower lever than the one currently selected Insert Detailed Map Will allow you to select a portion of the currently selected map to be created as a lower level more detailed map Delete Map Deletes the currently selected map from the tree Add Sibling or Child Map To add a Sibling map to the tree select a map in the tree at the level you want the new map to be placed in Click the g Sibling Map button and the Map information window below will display To add a Child map to the tree select the map in the tree that you want the new child map to be placed below Click the a Child Map button and the Map information window below will display Hap information Map Name Map file name Browse rea GE Security February 2 2005 10 19 Topaz Software User Guide Click the Browse button to locate the map file to add and the following window will display Map Editor EE Look irr E one 32mp EX CI dme1 new J mapdemo uE J dms O procs oa E dins3 L screens za 3 htminf E webhelp i386 import Files of type windows Enhanced Metatile Cancel Help Using the standard Windows convention locate the map file you wish to add Click Open and t
264. ich floor button in the elevator cab corresponds to which ACU relay If needed use the scrollbar on the right side of the window to navigate down to all 36 relays NOTE Different cabs may skip relays floors Floor Name Enter the Floor Name up to 32 characters to identify the floor that the relay is linked to For example Floor 2 Security Area Select the pre configured Security Area from the drop down list by clicking on the arrow to the right of the Security Area field and then click on the name to select the Security Area for authorization 8 34 460932001 GE Security Elevator Control lf a Security Area is not selected before saving the page the Floor Name will not be saved NOTES e The name of the security area for elevator control must be a number such as 3 not Floor 3 e If you need to setup a Security Area click on the A link arrow This will open an addi tional window with the Security Area page When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button and continue working in the Elevator Floor screen Assigning relays to the floors For each relay that electronically selects a requested floor enter a name for that floor For information about wiring the ACU see the Topaz Hardware Installation Guide page 4 29 Next to the floor name select the Security Area that belongs to this floor A Security Area must be configured for each floor that will be controlled by the panel Assign the
265. icon Enter all the desired information on the cardholder and click the Save Save button at the bottom left side of the window to save the cardholder information to the database 3 20 460932001 GE Security Information Page At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Do not click on Clear button before clicking on the Save button or newly entered data will be lost GE Security February 2 2005 3 21 TOPAZ Software User Guide Custom Fields Page The Custom Fields page contains eleven 11 additional fields you may custom configure for additional cardholder information not already available on the Information Page To navigate to the Custom Fields page from any page within the Cards pages click the Custom Fld tab button at the top of the screen The following page will display Batch h 1 3 Card Setup ccess Photo ID 4 Masking Information 4 Address Address 1 2073 Arlington Way AptD as o cy TEE Zipcode EZ Enter Cardholder f P Aberdeen Schuyler J UscrFida Pm Tam Select Cardholder User Field 5 cl Aberdeen Schuyler J EST Barker Eileen User Field 6 MAA Barron Devyn R as George Jeremy UserFieid7 ES UserFicidS fM LE e User Field 10 E o UserField11 Save Clear e User Field 1 4 can contain a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters Record Last Changed
266. ill be copied to CANVYRTemp After installation you can delete this temporary Folder Press OK to continue 8 Click OK to install the Video files Ey Sti x AN The file 4dv601 dll already exists Overwrite i No Cancel Replace files 1 oe gt 2 Replace all files with the same name without questions NOTE If a warning window displays that certain files already exist click Yes to con tinue When the dialog window asks whether to replace all files with the same name without questions click YES 5pecify Directory 3 ES G Press OK to select the directory containing the Workstation hta File 9 This dialog window will appear if you selected Yes I want to add workstations when installing GE Security February 2 2005 8 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide the server Click OK and another Browse window will appear Select the directory or drive where the Workstation hta file was saved After selecting the location click OK Operation Complete 10 The dialog window indicates that the file was written successfully Now wait a few seconds and the Sentinel Driver installation wizard will start Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit The InstallShield R Wizard will install Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit on your computer To continue click Mext Back E Cancel NOTE If this is the first time you have installed TOPAZ on this computer you shoul
267. in the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved 6 16 460932001 GE Security Security Area Setup Report into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Security Area setup j SECURITY AREA CONFIGURATION ARES ACCOUNTING TENANT PARTITION NAME PASSWORD PROTECTION NO PUBLIC ACCESS No INTI PASAGBACE YM YES AREA LOADING YT NO TWO MAN MIN ACCESS YN No MAX OCCUPANCY O 32767 O CURRENT OCCUPANCY o DIAL UP YT NO TIME DELAY FOR REENTRY 30 Minutes EEYPAD MASKING ALLOWED Ho ALARM MASKING DELAY o seconds ARE
268. inated card will be denied access The status of these four would indicate to the system that the card is not a valid one and to deny access under any circumstances The Issue Level only applies to magnetic stripe cards and is the number of times this card number has been issued given to a single Employee A card may be reissued if the Employee reported their card lost or stolen You may click on the down arrow and select from the list of forty nine 49 issue levels Once all the data for the new cardholder has been entered click the Save Add button at the bottom left side of the window to save the cardholder information to the database After clicking the Save button one of three messages will appear e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Card Number has been repeated Use a new Card Number and try saving again e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Card Number or other field Enter the required information and try saving again At any point if you wish to clear all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window NOTE If Photo Badging is being used once the picture of the employee is added on the Photo ID page it will display in the top right corner of the page GE Security February 2 2005 3 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Recall Cardholder There are five ways to recall a cardhold
269. indow on the right will continue to be displayed while navigating through the Cardholder button pages The only window that will change when the navigation buttons at the top are selected will be the area in the center of the screen GE Security February 2 2005 3 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Card Setup Page The Card Setup page allows you to perform the following functions e Add New Cardholder e Recall Cardholder e Modify Cardholder e Delete Cardholder Last First Mi de 7 y Search by Cardholder Name Aberdeen Schuyler ly Enter Cardholder Card Number 00001 23456 Aberdeen Schuyler J Select Cardholder Facility Code Name i Gaslite Publish AbameeniSehaviena Employee Number 2075 George Jeremy Card Stamp Number 00000011 Card Status i Valid y Issue Level o Record Last Changed Save Add Delete Clear A Adding a New Cardholder 1 Start by clicking the Clear button to clear the current record 2 Enter the Cardholder Name of up to 12 of characters for First name 1 character for MI not required and 15 characters for Last name The Cardholder Name is a required field NOTE You must know the encoded number of the card including the company and facility codes before continuing The number will be listed on a document which was included with the card when shipped unless you requested custom cards with the card number printed on th
270. ines per reporting item but report lines are generated only if there is data to report for the report line entry ALM Alarm or TRB These two entries are always paired and there is always Trouble one pair of report line entries per reporting item One of the pair of lines will have time reported under Duration and the other will have time reported as all zeroes The line with time reported as non zero indicates whether the alarm point had an Alarm or Trouble event FREQ Reports the number of times the alarm or trouble occurred during the reporting period TOTAL Reports the total accumulated time that the alarm point s were active or trouble s DURATION were reported during the reporting period LONGEST DETAIL The following information is included in all reports for the alarm or trouble with the longest duration DURATION How long the longest alarm or trouble lasted START The time at which the alarm or trouble originated Additional identifying TIME information for example monitor point and category or trouble number will appear in system reports as appropriate FLAGS Flags are used to identify report line entries that are not contained within the reporting period as follows Flag Meaning gt A reported event started earlier than the reporting period A reported event ended after the reporting period A negative time The system clock has been reset while a reported event occurred so that it appears to end befo
271. installed on your machine it will proceed directly to the The Welcome to the Topaz Installation Wizard dialog window will display 460932001 GE Security Workstation 5 Topaz Setup Welcome to the Topaz Installation Wizard ltiz strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programe before running this setup program Click Cancel to quit the setup program then close any programs vou have running Click Next to continue the installation WARRING This program i protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law 3 Click Next gt to continue 5 Topaz Setup License Agreement Tou must agree with the license agreement below to proceed END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GE Infrastructure Software This GE Infrastructure End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and GE Infrastructure for GE Infrastructure software which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA Ifyou do not agree to the terms of this EULA do not install or use the SOF
272. ion Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try deleting again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data 8 26 460932001 GE Security Dial up Field Panel Dial up Page The Dial up Page allows you to configure a dial up connection from the ACU panel to the server Dial up communication is used when an ACURT Panel is connected to a standard voice dial telephone line and the server PC has an external US Robotics modem connected to its RS232 communication port The PC is configured to dial the phone number connected to the ACURT in order to download new information The ACURT panel may also Dial up the Host PC to report alarms or download events When using Dial up communications to an ACURT field panel you must install an external modem at the server The Topaz Software will ONLY support the USR US Robotics 33 6 faxmodem or the 56K V 90 faxmodem Sportster modem models 0701 005686 03 or 0459 00083907 For more information on setting up the external modem set External Modem Setup later in the chapter To navigate to the Dial up page from within the Field Panel pages click on the Dial up tab button The following page will display NOTE If you see a message Panel with dial up Server COM Port mu
273. ion to field panels e Parallel Ports Optional for printer e USB Ports 1 minimum will be required for the Software Sentinel e A network card must be installed with static TCP IP enabled Static IP addresses are required e Removable media recommend for Back up system Options e Eltron P310 C Dye Sublimation Card Printer e Report and Logging Printer e Digital Video Capabilities using the GE Security DVMRe Triplex The above options can be obtained through your local independent distributor GE Security February 2 2005 1 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide software Installation Before you Start Installing the Software NOTE Before starting TOPAZ make sure that Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 pro vided by GE Security has been installed using the TOPAZ CD and the wiz ard has been run to complete the installation If you have IE 6 0 already installed on your computer check to see if the title bar states Microsoft Inter net Explorer provided by GE Security If not you must install the Virtual Machine that is located on the CD For more information see Installing Virtual Machine on page 1 9 Setup for Internet Explorer 1 From Window s desktop right mouse click on the Internet Explorer Icon and select Properties Do not use a Short Cut Icon 2 On the General tab click Settings select Every visit to the page and lastly click OK to save 3 On the Security tab click on the Local Intranet icon Click on th
274. is installed on that workstation and the software is started from that workstation It is recommended that you first install the software on the workstation and then make any changes you want to the workstation screen for added functionality for example the use of Photo Badging 8 6 460932001 GE Security Workstation Install a Workstation setup for Internet Explorer 1 From Window s desktop right mouse click on the Internet Explorer Icon and select Properties 2 On the General tab click Settings select Every visit to the page and lastly click OK to save 3 On the Security tab click on the Local Intranet icon Click on the Custom Level button Under ActiveX controls and plug ins change Download signed ActiveX controls Download unsigned ActiveX controls and Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe to Enable Then click OK to save 4 On the Privacy tab move the slide bar all the way down to Accept All Cookies then click OK to save 5 Click OK to save and exit Internet Explorer Properties Make sure the workstation Sentinel is plugged into the parallel port of the PC you are going to install the workstation software on Make sure you are logged in as the Administrator so you have the correct rights to install software Insert the TOPAZ Installation CD into the CD drive If Auto Insert Notification is enabled for your CD drive the Install
275. is available The copy functions cannot be used The directory name is invalid The specific queue name is already in use This can occur when attempting to start TOPAZ when the program is already running Not enough memory available to process a queue request The total queue memory was exceeded If TOPAZ was running contact technical support and relay the information 1 define Invalid Command for Pecos Interface Disk is full data cannot be written File Management System file channel already in use File Management System data or parity error Read or write hit beginning of file Physical disk error occurred during file directory read or write Disk file user count greater than one Attempted operation requires exclusive use of disk file Access violation Attempted record operation for that file was not opened Bad Command Code Out of range command presented to the file system Illegal logical channel number requested Read or write reached end of file Logical channel number requested not found Not an ISAM file File Reserved Attempted to open a file that was opened exclusively February 2 2005 A 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 A 10 Device Reserved Attempted to open a device that was opened exclusively Bad Option parameter
276. is displayed click the D Delete Icon Group icon at the top left corner of the screen Held Open High Temperature Low Battery The Icon Group is immediately deleted from the tree Caution A You cannot undelete an Icon Group that has been deleted When deleting an icon group make sure you have the desired group selected highlighted before clicking the Delete Icon Group button There is no warning before it is deleted 10 48 460932001 GE Security Appendix A Troubleshooting This section is an overview of software or user errors that can occur with the GE Interlogix TOPAZ System and the tools available to identify and correct hardware problems Frequently Asked Questions When I try to install TOPAZ get Port 80 in use The TOPAZ program emulates a Web Server so there cannot be another Web Server running on the computer Examples of Web Server programs are Microsofts Personal Web Server and Microsoft s Internet Information Server When I try to install TOPAZ I get the error message 0000 was not found Check your c temp directory Be default Windows makes a temp directory on the C drive named temp If this directory does not exist you should make one When I double click on the TOPAZ icon I get the Open With dialog box to select a program to run Press the Esc key to abort the process Install Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 or later When I double click on the TOPAZ icon I ge
277. is window constantly but for the most part you will not see the status change in this window often unless there are new events If you have the video option activated this page may also contain events that are linked to a video clip The video clip can be accessed by opening the Detailed Event Window Detailed Event Window More details of each event can be instantly displayed by clicking on the event text inside the queue A Detailed Event window will display in a pop up window This will contain further details of the event When finished with the Detailed Event window click the X in the upper right corner of the window to close it A o EENT 5920 ALARM REPORT 2004 12 08 Wed 14 43 42 E Video Clip Button The Video Option If the event has a Video Clip associated with it the Video button shown above will appear To access the video clip click on the Video Button The Video will open in another window and play the clip The clip GE Security February 2 2005 2 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide begins to play ten 10 seconds before the point where the event was began If you want to see what happened prior to the event click the Reverse button to play the clip backwards Print Close Window View Live Play Forward I Fast Forward If you have found a frame of an event that you want to print click the Print button The image will be printed on the Report Printer If you want to see what is happening at the camera th
278. it to the event file After acknowledgement the operator may also enter comments that will be logged to history If you uncheck this box the operator will not be require to acknowledge the alarm point The alarm will be placed in the queue but no enunciator will sound at the workstation Alarm Can Be Masked The Alarm Can Be Masked field is used to allow the alarm to be masked by authorized personnel Click on the box to the right placing a check mark in the check box If the alarm point should never be masked then leave the default with no check mark Caution A Alarms that report the state of an alarm such as Alarm Off line or Tamper should not be masked Allowing these status alarms to be masked will reduce the security and effectiveness of the system Description The Description field allows you to enter other information about this alarm point The field allows up to 256 alphanumeric characters For example High Temp in Computer Room Build 23 or Emergency Exit door By Southwest Stairwell Build 501 You could even include an address like Roof Hatch Southwest Corner 254 E Main St Alarm Reporting Delay The Alarm Reporting Delay field is used in conjunction with Keypad Masking etc where the keypad is located inside the protected area For example if the alarm point being configured is the door you would use to enter the area the alarm can be delayed for between land 255 seconds to give you time to enter the area an
279. ith your DVMRe 8 64 460932001 GE Security Device Tree Video Camera This page allows the user to link the video recorder to the cameras which will monitor and record the alarm events Digital video recording allows the video clip to actually begin prior to the alarm event This feature allows the actual event to be seen by the operator Pre event Length and Quality settings are done on the DVMRe directly Refer to the documentation which came with your video recorder On this page you will assign a name to the camera and link it to a Video Recorder To navigate to the Video Camera page click the Hardware button on the main navigation bar at the left side of the browser window then click the Y Silver button next to Video on the main Hardware page then click the Camera tab You can also click the Video tab at the top of the window from any Hardware page and then click the Camera tab The following page will display Video Cameras Commons 2 a Commons 3 Northeast Entrance Northwest Entrance South Entrance West Corridor Y E mi Recorder Camera Number E Lira Rie Add a Video Camera Use the following steps to add a new video camera to the system Before configuring the cameras they should be installed and functioning properly Make certain that you have the Recorder Name to which the camera is attached and the number assigned to the camera on that recorder before you start the setup pr
280. jpg file to import and click Open The name of the file will appear in the Photo File Name field GE Security February 2 2005 3 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide 6 Click the Import Photo button to display that image in the upper right corner of the screen Print Badge NOTE The first time you print a badge you must first select a printer from within the Badge Design program Before printing the badge you may wish to preview it to make sure it is correct by clicking the Display Badge Button To print the badge for the selected cardholder 1 Click the Print Badge button 2 The badge will display in a full window Then the Print dialog box will display Click Yes to print 3 If you do not have the proper equipment for printing badges you will get an error message like this CG Error Eltron printer driver not found Click OK to continue 4 The message Operation Complete will display Click OK to continue Design Badge To access the badge design utility click the Design Badge button A new window for designing badges is presented For more details on designing a badge template see the chapter on Badge Design on page 9 1 Badge Template From the drop down list of pre designed badge templates select the template for the currently selected cardholder NOTE To create a new badge template see the chapter on Badge Design on page 9 1 for a complete user guide on designing a badge templa
281. k OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page 6 44 460932001 GE Security Recall System Device Events Report Below is a sample of a displayed Recall System Device Events report ae in E EVENT 52 WORESTATION 1 EVENT 53 Ci WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD EVENT 54 Ci WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD EVENT 55 SYSTEM INITIALIZED EVENT 56 WORESTATION 1 EVENT 57 Co WORKSTATION 1 DOWNLOAD GE Security RECALL SYSTEM DEVICE EVENTS SYSTEM EVENT ROUTED TO WORKST amp TION 1 SYSTEM EVENT STARTED SYSTEM EVENT COMPLETED SYSTEM EVENT SYSTEM EVENT ROUTED TO WORKSTATION 1 SYSTEM EVENT STARTED February 2 2005 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 47 2004 02 11 Wed 12 58 21 2004 02 11 Wed 12 58 22 TOPAZ Software User Guide Recall Other Events Report The Recall Other Events Report will recall all events not covered in any of the other reports like Acknowledgement Commentary Remote Control Alarm Masking Keypad Time Zone Secure Area Monitor Redundant System Ack Timeout System Error etc To navigate to the report from within any Reports page click the Reca
282. k is first enabled under Setup Site Settings You can do this immediately by selecting the Arrow button to the left side of Executive APB Override to go directly to the Site Settings page Under Anti Passback you can select Enable to activate the Anti Passback feature for this site In addition you must select cardholders and security areas under Control Reset APB There are two options for Executive APB Override Deny Access the default If APB is violated the system will deny access to the area This is the normal selection for most cardholders Otherwise Anti Passback has little value Grant Access Even If APB is violated the system will allow access to the area This is used to allow the cardholder to enter all security areas and will trigger an alarm Control Reset APB Reset All Cardholders to a Security Area This is used to allow cardholders who have access to the specified Security Area to be allowed to enter that area even if the system has a record of their entering but not leaving that area For example if all cardholder who are in a specified Security Area leave quickly because of a fire and do not swipe their cards individually upon exiting or entering The TOPAZ system thinks they are still in that area This will allow the security staff to reset that Security Area to allow reentry for all cardholders who have access to that area Reset Selected Cardholder to Security Area This is used to allow the specifie
283. k mark NOTE If Elevator Operation has been activated additional information must be con figured on the Elevator page Panel Polling Delay If the TCP IP or Server COM Port routinely give time out error messages you can set a panel polling delay longer The default value is zero for dedicated 460932001 GE Security 10 11 12 Field Panel direct connected panels Set the delay at 5 for all LAN and Dial up panels Caution Never set the delay longer than necessary For example if you set the delay to 5 sec and the panel is not communicating the server will wait the 5 seconds before giving up and going to the next field panel This could delay an event from being reported to the workstation Expansion Modules Set up the expansion devices that are connected to the ACU on the Expansion Port You can select an Input or Output module for addresses 4 5 6 and 7 For example an input module would be a RIM and an output module would be a RRM The address is set on the board at time of installation If you are not sure of the board address contact the installer Configured Panels This list is used when you wish to select an existing panel to modify or check its configuration See Modify Field Panel below Description Enter the Description of the Field Panel This can be up to 60 alphanumeric characters describing the panel location or name of the areas of the building or site that it controls For example
284. l 4 13 Duress ACCESS isis Meet eee ees g 7 16 Alarm Activation 7 16 Definition G 2 Video Switcher Alarm 8 46 E Elevator Control Cab SEUD lero aia as E 8 32 Configuring Elevator Control 8 30 Field Panel Setup 8 24 OvervieW o ooo 8 30 PUBDICACCESS gt traca a bee bee eet 8 36 Relay Interface diagram 8 31 Relay Numbering 8 31 Setup Report o o ooooooo 6 28 Software ECS o ooooooooo ooo 8 30 l 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide IMAM spose Sorts sob Baad ane ean aut eee Wl at Rd P 7 Emergency Contact 3 20 Employee Number o o ooooo 3 3 Employee Report Create TemplateS 6 60 Field Options o o ooooooooo 6 61 IMSS ura a aora death boat 6 61 SOM OPUIONS ici os 6 60 Encode Card Format 7 17 Energize Relay o o o eee 4 1 Error Codes TOPAZ System A 5 Event Printer o o o oooooo o 8 18 Events Event Types 00 000 eee eee 2 1 ll OLO A a cid ayant th Ae 2 1 Events Queue o ooooocoocoononoo ooo 2 1 Executive Anti Passback Override D 2 External Modem Setup 8 29 F Facility Code Cardholder o o oooooooo 3 2 Facility Code Company Code 7 21
285. l be active for Do this by clicking each box to add a check mark for each day of the week you want the schedule to be active NOTE You may need to use more than one setting of Start Time Stop Time and Active on Days for shifts that occur over midnight or over time schedules For example if you are configuring the times for a shift that works from 10pm to 6am you will have to set two time segments The first should be for 10pm to midnight 22 00 23 59 Sunday through Thursday and the second one for midnight to 6am 00 00 06 00 Monday through Friday 6 Holiday 1 2 Select if the schedule will be used on a holiday Select Holiday 1 and or 2 7 If you need additional time segments in this schedule you can define them in the additional rows below For example you may want the schedule to be active 07 00 16 00 7am 4pm Monday Friday and on Saturday from 10 00 15 00 22 00 17 00 Do this in the second set of schedule parameters A maximum of 8 time segments can be configured for one Time Schedule NOTE A maximum of 127 Time Schedules may be configured on the TOPAZ System When all fields have been set correctly click the Save Add button 9 Amessage Operation Complete will display 7 8 460932001 GE Security Time Schedule Modify Time Schedule 1 Select the Time Schedule to be modified by clicking on the Schedule Name list Once highlighted in the list you can see the times and days it is set for 2 The name
286. larm event triggered when the cardholder signals he she is in an emergency duress situation This can happen when the cardholder presses on an exit bar or button of a door to open it instead of using a normal card swipe or keypad OR signals a duress with a coded PIN as described in the Setup Site Settings section of this manual There are two types of duress situations Duress Exit from an Area A Duress exit occurs when the cardholder must exit an area quickly such as during a fire or emer gency If the door is locked this is normally done by pressing an exit bar or button to unlock the door If the door is unlocked it does not matter Duress Entrance into an Area This is an abnormal situation since the cardholder can swipe his card to enter the area provided he she is allowed to enter that security area You can allow a duress entrance to handle situations when the cardholder is being forced to use his card under threat of bodily harm such as during a robbery If you allow the cardholder to enter a special PIN number to gain entrance this will open the door AND signal to the security staff that a duress entrance exists The security staff can inves tigate and or call the police without the threatening person being aware of it This protects the cardholder from bodily harm This type of duress can be set in the Setup Site Settings Duress Video Switcher Alarm For either type of duress you can set an alarm that will t
287. lation Wizard Cancel 6 If you satisfied with your settings click Next to start installing the system 1 18 460932001 GE Security Installing a Host PC Server 5 Topaz Setup Updating System The features you selected are currently being installed Initializing C Wise Installation Wizard The wizard will upload the required files and install them onto the computer During the process a progress bar will display 9 Topaz Setup JO x L i Topaz has been successfully installed Click the Finish button to exit this Installation 4 Back Eancel 7 When all the files have been installed the Topaz has been successfully installed dialog window will display Click Finish to continue with the installation of several video files These files are installed whether or not you are using Video NWR Codec Installer J re x am UL This program will install the MVR Wavelet Codec onto your computer During the installation process some temporary Files willbe copied to CHNVRTemp After installation you can delete this temporary Folder Press OK to continue 8 Click OK to install the Video files GE Security February 2 2005 1 19 TOPAZ Software User Guide warning ES Replace fles The file A4dv601 dll already exists Overwrite gt 2 Replace all files with the same name without questions i No Cancel NOTE If a warning window displays that certain files already
288. layed Relay Icons x Mame On Ine Cancel Enter a name for the new group and select the icon for the designations Click OK when you have completed adding the icons for all the designations The new icon group is now added to the Icon Cfg tree list 10 46 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Delete Icon Group You must be in the configuration mode before you being Once in the configuration mode you will see the Icon Cfg tab in the tree window as shown below Only the Alarm Reader and Relay icons will show and are the only icons you can customize Map Cig Device Cto Fi 4 Lia Er Alarm cons i Reader Icons Sa Relay Icons Expand the Icon Cfg tree for the Icon you want to delete by double clicking on the Alarm Reader or Relay icon For example if you want to delete an alarm icon group double click the 4 Alarm Icons icon Device Offline Door Contact ie Z Duress Click on the Alarm Icon Group category you want to delete and the Icon Group window will open for the group you clicked on lf you want to select a different icon group make a new selection by clicking again on another icon group S Fire Alarm Alarm Icons j Forced Open Name High Temperature Glass Break Detector Secure Masked Trouble az fake Cancel AE MATE GE Security February 2 2005 10 47 Topaz Software User Guide After making sure the icon group you want to delete
289. lect the bitmap file to import and click the Open button After the window closes the Bitmap will appear on the list of Bitmap available from the Draw Bitmap List To access the bitmap for installation into the badge template from the Badger Photo Badge design window select the Bitmap command from the Draw menu Once the location of the bitmap object has been set up on the badge a pick list will appear with the file name of available bitmaps including any you have imported using the steps above Use the procedure described previously in this section to install the bitmap into the badge GE Security February 2 2005 9 25 Topaz Software User Guide Print Selection The Select Printer drop down list allows you to select the photo printer being used Select Printer Printers supported NO PRINTER gt gt DATACARD IMAGECARD ExP DATACARD IMAGECARD III IDATACARD IMAGECARD IY DATACARD IMAGECARD SELI ELTRON PRMLEGE 300 310 JELTRON PRMLEGE 400 420 ELTRON PRIVILEGE 500 FARGO 4250 FARGO CHEETAH FARGO CHEETAH II FARGO HNP 7in x p Parameters The Parameters menu selection pops up the Badger Options window and allows you to set the Strip Bar Code Checksum and Add CC FC Badger Options 3 Strip Barcode Checksum 20 Photo Call Up timeout seconds Cancel Help strip Bar Code Checksum This option when selected will stop the checksum portion of the bar code informati
290. lephone company if you have any ques tions about your phone line In the event repairs are ever needed on the GE Security s ACU field panel they should be performed by your authorized representative Contact Us GE Security Address Correspondence should be sent to the following address GE Security 12345 SW Leveton Drive Tualatin OR 97062 USA 800 547 2556 Electronic E mail Addresses Customer Service domestic_sales ge interlogix com Technical Support tech_support ge interlogix com Applications Engineering App ilx infographics ge com Sales domestic _sales ge interlogix com Training domestic_sales ge interlogix com Web Site http www GESecurity com GE Security February 2 2005 P 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide About Help Welcome to GE Security latest program in access control management the GE Security Auto Configuring browser based TOPAZ System The TOPAZ System incorporates the reliability of GUl based access control with the convenience of the common Internet browser architecture This system will provide complete security and access control for any location or building The Help System Help is intended for anyone operating the system software whether you are a beginner or a whiz at access security software It contains all the information you need when you need it to get answers quickly and easily Use Help for an overview or as a reference for all the features available in the software Our inte
291. ler GE Security February 2 2005 8 39 TOPAZ Software User Guide Unlock Time Seconds The Unlock Time is the amount of time the door lock is to stay unlocked allowing the cardholder to open the door Type the number of seconds directly into this field The range of times that can be entered is 0 255 The default is 6 seconds Field Panel From the drop down list select the ACU Panel that the reader communicates with or is connected to If you are not sure of which panel the reader is connected to contact the installer NOTE If you need to setup an ACU Field Panel click on the 6 link arrow This will open an additional window with the Field Panel setup page to allow you to setup additional Field Panels When setup has been completed close the win dow by clicking the Save button Held Open Time Seconds The Held Open Time is the number of seconds that the door can remain open after a granted access before an alarm is generated The options are 15 30 45 60 90 120 180 240 300 600 or 999 seconds The default is 15 seconds NOTE For the Held Open Time option to work a door monitoring device must be installed connected and configured Card Format If you are using access cards with this TOPAZ system then select the Card Format from the drop down list If you are not sure of the format on your cards contact the installer The possible options are e Standard Wiegand e Standard Mag Stripe NOTE If your card fo
292. lick and hold the left mouse button on the icon and drag the icon to a new location on the map NOTE When placing a new reader point on the map the icon will default to a Control Mode type even if the point is in lock or unlocked mode When the color graphics is back online it will check for the current status of the reader door and change the icon accordingly Default Reader Door leas O yY O Reader Door Icons E Locked Door is locked and NO access will be granted LI Unlocked Reader door is unlocked for free access Control Mode The computer is controlling the reader door and is the default when adding to the map Reader Door in Timed Mode Reader door will be unlocked for a set time determined in the reader configuration and will be re secured at the end of the time cycle NOTE The door icon on the map will be grayed out when the panel is offline not communicating with the server When communication is restored it will take 30 seconds for the icons to reflect the current status The reader icons with the red check mark on their icon have already been added to the map To delete or remove an icon from the map click and drag the icon back to the tree window and release the mouse button The icon will disappear and the red check mark on the icon in the tree will be removed Save your configuration changes by clicking the ed Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen 10
293. licking on the name of the Security Area listed in the Available Security Areas window NOTE If the same group of security areas are going to be assigned to a number of cardholders you may want to take advantage of configuring the group of secu rity areas as an Access Group In this case use the next step Available Access Groups to add the access group to the cardholder Go to Setup But ton Access Groups Page to configure a new Access Group Click the J Right Arrow button to add the selected security area to the Selected Security Areas window Repeat this step until all desired security areas are added to the Selected Security Areas window Up to eight 8 security areas may be selected To remove a selected area from the Selected Security Areas window click on the security area name to remove and click the 4 Left Arrow button If the desired Security Area is not available and you need to configure one click the 6 Link Arrow button to the left of Available Security Areas This will open the Security Area configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Save Save button This will return you to the Access page you were working with 3 8 460932001 GE Security Access Page Available Access Groups To select the Access Groups that the cardholder will be authorized to access click on the name of the Access Group listed in the Available Access Groups window and click the gt Right Ar
294. licking the mouse in the check box placing a check mark in it 5 Click the Save Add button Click the Refresh Alarm Queue button to show the MAP button GE Security February 2 2005 10 1 Topaz Software User Guide Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics Activating Map Screen To activate the TOPAZ Color Graphics Maps click the Mar E screen or triple click on any alarm in the alarm queue window at the bottom of the screen A map window 2 5 Deck to Campus G PHIG SF oF i 3 fis Q Two Biotech Floor 1 Q Hegia Map Screen The Map Screen contains two windows The window on the left contains the Map and Device Trees The Map Tree is a hierarchical view of the maps that have been assigned to the color graphics system Click the map name or its icon in the tree to display the map in the map window The device tree shows all currently configured device alarm points readers relays etc The map window on the right displays the currently selected map Caution A Any time a field device is not communicating with the server all icons associ ated with the device will be grayed out When communication is restored it may take 30 seconds for the map to update and the icons to reflect the current sta tus 10 2 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics Operating the Map Screen The map window will display the currently selected map If there are additional maps
295. ll Events tab button in the top navigation bar and then click the Other Events tab button The following page will display 00 S SEM esl ce A ET Recall Other Events Display Report o MET A Cancel Report Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removable disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should start Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon 6 46 460932001 GE Security Recall Other Events Report Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop Other Event Type e Acknowledge Recalls the workstation the event number was acknowledged from password used time and date acknowledged e Commentary Recalls the workstation the event was acknowledged from commentary entered b
296. lue secure Green Alarm Red Open Peach Short Peach Ground Peach Circuit Fault Peach Offline Magenta Control Mask Unmask To Mask or Unmask a Security Area or Alarm Input Point select the name from the pre configured list of Security Area names or Alarm Input Point names located in the bottom of the window under the Control portion of the window Do this by scrolling through the list and clicking on the desired name Click on the E Mko Mask button to mask the Security Area or Alarm Input Point as desired Click on the Unmask Unmask button to unmask the Security Area or Alarm Input Point as desired After clicking one of the above a message Operation Complete will display Click OK to continue If the ACU controller is not communicating with the PC then the message Device Offline will display Click OK to continue NOTE Only the alarm points that were configured as maskable will appear in the list GE Security February 2 2005 4 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide Relay Control Page The Relay Control page allows you to control and check the status of relays and groups of relays Relays are sometimes referred to as Output Points e Relay Status e Control Relay To navigate to the Relay Control page from any page within the Control pages click the Relay tab button at the top of the screen or from the main control page click on the Relay button on the right side of the Main Control screen The following page will display l
297. m must be rebooted Click yes to reboot now No 18 You must restart your PC for the TOPAZ software to be activated Click Yes to reboot your system This ends the installation steps for a server If you want to add a workstation see Workstation Page on page 8 6 To start TOPAZ double click on the TOPAZ icon on your desktop 1 24 460932001 GE Security Navigating the Help Using Software start Up NOTE Before starting TOPAZ make sure Internet Explorer 6 0 or later was installed from the TOPAZ CD and the wizard was run to complete the installation of IE or TOPAZ will not operate properly This topic describes how to begin interacting with the TOPAZ System Software The installation uses default options so you will not have to make decisions or selections The Auto configuration function may also be used to assist you in setting up the system Whenever possible always power up the system s peripheral devices field panels readers etc before activating the server computer In this way any errors or diagnostic messages will display at the system s monitor or printer NOTE If you use a workstation the server should be running on the network before starting up the workstation Help A major feature of TOPAZ is its Help section Help is designed to assist you in real time on any part of TOPAZ operations This enhancement reduces your need to refer to written documentation and will reduce training time for n
298. mage background whereas Chroma Key removes the color from the whole of the image When a Chroma function is selected the system automatically selects the top left pixel of the image and the top right pixel and removes these from the image It is very important therefore for successful use of these features that the background of the image should be a uniform color and be uniformly lit By utilizing Chroma Cut on a logo for example the outline of the logo can be superimposed over a background image By using Chroma Key the background may be seen through various parts of the image as well as the background However if Chroma Key is used any part of the image containing the Chroma Keyed colors will also be removed Ghosting The Ghosting facility is normally used for photographs and is designed to make the copying of badges extremely difficult The process removes each alternate pixel from the photograph giving it a slightly washed out appearance and ensuring that any attempt to copy the image can be easily detected Black amp White This function converts color photographs and bitmaps into a grayscale representation Allow Rescale This function is extremely useful in ensuring an image will fit within the handles of a Picked Object The system automatically re sizes the image to fit the size of the selected object 9 16 460932001 GE Security Editing Facilities Editing Facilities Any Picked object can be edited using the Edit
299. main navigation bar at the left side of the browser window then click on the button next to System Setup on the main Reports page then click the Capabilities tab button at the top of the window You can also click the System Setup Capabilities tab at the top of the window from any reports page Access Event Elevator Display Report oO system Capabilities Print Report Output To File o a Output File Name Run Report MU Cancel Report T Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default the report will display on the workstation monitor e Print Report the report will be sent to the report printer defined in Workstation Setup e Output To File the report will be saved to the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of Topaz Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection A black dot indicates the active selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved 6 32 460932001 GE Security Capabilities Report into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports My
300. message Operation Complete will display Modify a Holiday 1 Select the Holiday to be modified from the Holidays list by clicking on the name to highlight it 2 After making all the required modifications to the Holiday click the Save Add button 3 Amessage Operation Complete will display Delete a Holiday 1 Select the Holiday to be deleted from the Holiday list by clicking on the name so it is highlighted Click the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 Amessage Operation Complete will display T 34 460932001 GE Security Chapter 8 Hardware Button The Hardware pages allow you to setup and configure hardware that will be connected to the System The following hardware setup pages are available e Serial Port Page e LAN Communication Page e Workstation Page e Field Panel Page e Readers e Alarm Point Setup Page e Relay Page e Auto Configuration Setup Page e Video Recorder To navigate to the Hardware pages click on the Hardware button in the Main navigation button window on the left side of the screen The following page will display Topaz Serial Port h LAN Comunications Workstation Bal Field Panel Reader Alarm Point Relay Output Auto Configuration Video To access one of the options in the Hardware pages click on the me button next to the option GE Security February 2 2005 8 1 TOPAZ Software U
301. mperature The temperature in the room has risen above the set threshold ECE Low Battery The DC Battery in the field controller has dropped below the required voltage Smoke Detector Auxiliary output from fire panel for a smoke detector has been activated Standard Alarm Other types of alarm points not covered by any other default alarm category B System Input Low Battery or AC Power Failure B System Tamper Field controller panel door has been opened NOTE Default icons shown in the table above represent the alarm condition as secure mode The icons also have three others colors that are described below The interactive map alarm icons will change color to show current status Green In normal secure condition and not masked Green Flashing Returned to normal condition but needs to be acknowledged and cleared Red Alarm has been acknowledged but has not cleared reset yet Red Flashing A new alarm has been activated that needs to be acknowledged and cleared Blue Alarm is currently masked and will not generate a new alarm condition but will report trouble conditions Yellow A new alarm trouble has been activated that needs to be acknowledged and cleared The trouble condition will be reported even if the point is masked Yellow Flashing A new alarm trouble has been activated that needs to be acknowledged and cleared The trouble condition will be reported even if the point is masked N
302. munication is restored it will take 30 seconds for the icons to reflect the current status The relay icons with the f red check mark on their icon have already been added to a map To delete or remove an icon from the map click and drag the icon back to the tree window and release the mouse button The icon will disappear and the red t check mark on the icon in the tree will be removed Save your configuration changes by clicking the 5 Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen GE Security February 2 2005 10 29 Topaz Software User Guide Adding Security Areas to Map Double click the Ea Security Areas icon to expand the Security Areas tree for the list of currently configured security areas that can be added and cannot be added again The Security Areas with the check mark on their icon have already been added to a map Map Cig Device Cig Map Cfg Device Cig pS DEMO ACU_2 D1 Polling Address ej LANTACU_2 DO Poling Address Test Device mus Security Areas Lameras Qo Map Links Sh ENGINEERING In the Security Area tree locate the security area to add Place the mouse arrow on the Eh Security Area icon click and hold the left mouse button Drag the icon onto the map and release the mouse button When you release the mouse button after dragging the security area icon onto the map it will change to an ES BACK DOOR Unmasked Security Area icon with the area name in a thick bl
303. must be careful not to pass the mouse over any other icon while moving the mouse to the toolbar As stated above once the mouse arrow is passed over another icon that icon will then be selected and highlighted This could cause you to take action on the wrong icon 10 12 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics The easiest and quickest way to acknowledge and clear the alarm is to double click the icon to display the Alarm Detail window or right click on the icon to display the menu and click the Details selection Instruction message Comments ne Cancel Type any informational comments about the alarm or actions you take and click Clear If you click the Cancel button the window will close without clearing the alarm or saving any comments You can open the window at any time to type comments and clear the alarm Once the alarm is cleared the window when displayed will be blank once again Warning A If you have acknowledged an alarm that has returned to normal and you do not clear it the icon for that point will be green and appear to be normal Until the alarm is cleared new alarms for that point will only turn the icon to steady red on the color graphics map It is suggested that once an alarm has returned to normal you clear it right away NOTE You may only clear an alarm that has returned too normal Alarm Point Masking Buttons When an alarm icon is selected on a map by placing the mouse arrow on it the
304. n RELAY ACTION SCHEDULE NEVER BEGIN ACTION Activate END ACTION Deactivate DESCRIPTION CONTROLLED EY ALARM POINT NO RELAY MAME DEMO RELAY 2 RELAY 2 PANEL NAME Gaslite Main RELAY ACTION SCHEDULE NEVER BEGIN ACTION Activate END ACTION Deactivate hd GE Security February 2 2005 6 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide serial Port Setup Report The Serial Port Setup Report recalls how Serial Ports are configured setup in the system To navigate to the Serial Port Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Serial Port tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Display Report fe Print Report amp Output To File gt E Repo Output File Name Hardware Run Report E i di i E T mr Cancel Report The report will list all configured serial ports Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter t
305. n CD 1 Click Install TOPAZ to start the installation setup 1 14 460932001 GE Security Installing a Host PC Server Topaz x The Wise Installation Wizard i extracting files to your local computer please wait Eancel 2 If this is the first time TOPAZ has been installed on your computer and the Microsoft NET Framework is not installed the Wise Installation Wizard dialog window shown above will display Extracting and installing the NET framework may take several minutes Please wait while the Hourglass progress icon rotates When the framework is completed the TOPAZ Installation Wizard will begin If the NET framework is already installed on your machine it will proceed directly to the The Welcome to the Topaz Installation Wizard dialog window will display 5 Topaz Setup Welcome to the Topaz Installation Wizard ltiz strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programe before running this setup program Click Cancel to quit the setup program then close any programs vou have running Click Hest to continue the installation WARRING This program i protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Cancel 3 Click Next gt to continue GE Security February 2 2005 1 15 TOPA
306. n have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c lreportslMyreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report _ Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page GE Security February 2 2005 6 41 TOPAZ Software User Guide Below is a sample of a displayed Recall User Actions report 2 IN ES a a E M m M RECALL USER ACTION EVENTS f EVENT 72 OPERATOR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 13 19 55 OPERATOR ID WORESTATION 0001 MENO Logged On EVENT 73 OPERATOR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 15 36 16 OPERATOR ID master WORESTATION 0001 MENO System shutdown EVENT 75 OPERATOR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 14 07 12 OPERATOR ID WORESTATION 0001 MENO Logged On EVENT 79 OPERATOR EVENT 2004 02
307. n used and resulted in Denied Access Send Guard to investigate Save Add Delete Add an Instruction Message Start by clicking on the Clear button to clear all the fields for data entry Enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the Alarm Instruction Name Click the Save Add button to save the new instruction message 1 2 3 Enter up to 495 alphanumeric characters for Alarm Message Text 4 5 A message Operation Complete will display NOTE Clicking Clear at anytime will clear changes that have been entered Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data GE Security February 2 2005 7 29 TOPAZ Software User Guide Modify an Instruction Message 1 Start by selecting the Alarm Instruction Message to be modified by clicking on the name listed in the Alarm Instruction Names list 2 After making changes to the Message text click the Save Add button 3 Amessage Operation Complete will display Delete an Instruction Message 1 Start by selecting the Alarm Instruction Message to be deleted by clicking on the name listed in the Alarm Instruction Name list 2 After making sure the correct message to be deleted is selected highlighted click the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 Amessage Operation Complete will display 7 30 460932001 GE Security Alarm Categories
308. n with the Server Host PC See Server Instruction Messages A defined string of text attached to certain system Events intended to give instructions to you when those Events occur Commonly used with Alarm Points messages are also assigned to Automatic Remote Control structures and other items Keypad Masking Allows an authorized cardholder to control mask unmask the alarms assigned to the same area as the keypad by entering a unique PIN code to mask and unmask the alarms Local Pertaining to activities that occur in and are restricted to only one intelligent field panel Masking A method of disabling an alarm point and effectively ignoring any alarm Masking an alarm is a useful way to prevent unwanted alarm reports without disconnecting the security device MP An earlier version of DIAMOND TOPAZ that ran on the OS 2 operating system Name The alphanumeric text used in Pick lists drop down lists and on displays that identify a system item Name lengths vary from item to item Open Database Connectivity ODBC A Microsoft standard that allows applications to access data in a Database Management System DBMS using Structured Query Language SQL as a standard interface Operation A defined group of remote Control Points or of Alarm Points Operations are used to assemble Automatic Actions or are manually triggered though the Commands menu e For Remote Control Points the operation contains a defined
309. nNtering nto atico lr dad int baba 9 5 P oto and IGN af os tipa aa os Ts ds 9 5 textana Dalabase ast eh A A Eh o NA 9 6 A A RE 9 12 A O 9 14 Triangle Rectangle Circle amp EllipSe o oooooonooo ooo 9 14 Chroma Cut Chroma Key Ghosting Black amp White and Allow Rescale 9 16 EGIIAGIPACINIGS scans da AR EO Rak ke an ee SO Ra hee 9 17 Ele IMent sar A ainia 9 21 WPUOMS Mente ta soria sa ica E ea poes datos we a each 9 22 CHAPTER 10 MAP BUTTON sopresa ens eee eee oe ie es ee oa 10 1 Color Graphics Maps crestas EAS Othe SR ia Chew Saeed ee 10 1 Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics 0 000 eee ees 10 2 Activating Map SClECN 4 0 62 s8 o ad ac bwew ee tn kee gueeeC ee amp eee wad oe wom ee eee Bod 10 2 Operating the Map Screen 0 0 ee eee eens 10 3 Map Tree and Devices Window 00000 eee eee 10 16 Configuring Color Graphics ee ee eee eee eee 10 18 Adamo NDS gt 4 i dete teow ee e de Dr ede a dida Seka de die ated 10 18 PROGING OWNS TO Maps ria dad is a wl Slee ica 10 24 Adding Camera to Mapi sesers esane pes ES ee eee A ica 10 36 ROOMS aa Se E A RR E did ee e SE 10 37 CUSTOM ICON GrOUDS gt any dx ees ee hie be e A See O Rew id Sod ww ee ee eal 10 39 APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING vicario A 1 Frequently Asked Questions 0 00 0 cc eee eens A 1 TOPAZ System Error GOGCS iia dd dices A 5 APPENDIX B ACCESS CODE DEFINITIONS sio 4 0d as a AR deaa REE
310. nally Left Blank 460932001 GE Security Setup Button setup Button Page Chapter The Setup pages allow you to setup and configure the TOPAZ System software The following configurations are available e Operators e e Time Schedules e Security Areas e Access Groups e e Site Settings e e Custom Cardholder Fields To navigate to the Setup pages click the to see the following Facility Codes Variable Card Format Reader Event Alarm Options Holidays Setup button in the left frame of the browser window iia Operators Time Schedules Y Security Areas Access Groups Site Settings ME Custom Cardholder Field ME Facility Code Variable Card Format E Reader Event Alarm Options a Holidays To navigate to one of the Setup pages click on the E button next to the desired page Each of the Setup pages is covered in detail on the following pages GE Security February 2 2005 7 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Operators Setup Page The Operators Setup page allows you to configure up to 256 operators and assign them 47 different functions e Add Operators e Modify Operators e Delete Operators To navigate to the Operators Setup page from any Setup page click the Operators tab button at the top of the page The following page will display System Operators Operator Name Password E Operator Type i Administrator y Show Quickstart at Login E i F J 3 z
311. nd a disk directory browser window will open Locate the icon file you want to assign as the Masked icon as shown on the next page E E 17 aacofy 7 i386 Ay backtst bmp F science br 13 badger 9 import ES Bckagrmd bmp Ezi space bmp cg J procs ES clntbck bmp Ezi usa60 brnf 1 3 dios 1 screens ES eventbec bmp PF Wallpaper dmez Ei alarmbcc bmp ES eventbck bmp Ezi wallpaper E drs Ezi alarmbck bmp ES notbkbck bmp Ezi wallpaper File name A Files of type windows Bitmap Cancel Cancel _ gt x Alarm Icons Look in Sy one32mp MA Fire larm Po Ed E Forced Open On Masked Troubles a r a F le iz Glass Break Detector E Held Open a tee P High Temperature Notice that after you clicked on the icon and the browser window opened all four icons on the Icon Group window are now grayed out If you forget which icon you selected close the browser window and reselect the icon again If you selected the wrong icon file you can click on the icon again to select another icon file Locate the icon file and double click on the file name to have it assigned The browser window will close and the new icon will be shown in the Icon Group window as the new icon assigned to Masked If you select an icon that is already assigned to another icon group the message Bitmap file already exist Overwrite Map Editor e Bitmap file already e
312. nd for a length select from 0 4 digits 7 24 460932001 GE Security Variable Cards 3 Most cards do not use a Field Separator It is most commonly used when compatibility is required with Time and Attendance programs and other systems When you select a Field Separator TOPAZ uses the letter D If you want to use a Field Separator click the box to the right of the field TOPAZ ignores the Field Separator digit in counting where data fields start see the example below 4 You can select the location of the first bit for the Facility Code as the Start value For a Start value select from 2 40 and for a length select from 0 10 digits 5 You can select the location of the first bit for the Card Number as the Start value For a Start value select from 2 40 and for a length select from 0 16 digits 6 The Issue Code is normally 1 digit and is set to 1 You can use an Issue Code for replaced cards etc You can select the location of the first digit for the Issue Code as the Start value For a Start value select from 2 40 and for a length select from 0 2 digits Example of a 14 digit Mag Stripe Card Format Company Code 3 Card Number Issue Code 1 If a particular card had a Company Code of 3 a Facility Code of 2 and a Card Number of 12 the Mag Stripe Card would look like the example below The B is the Begin Start digit and the F is the Finish Stop digit Spaces are used here to make the value below easier to read The actual car
313. ndar is available by clicking on the ey Calendar button 4 Holiday Types If a Holiday is defined without a Holiday Type then the Holiday is like a regular day off If it is defined with a Holiday Type then access for that date acts according to the rules for that type GE Security February 2 2005 7 33 TOPAZ Software User Guide Holiday Types are normally used for different countries where the date is treated differently For example some countries may have the Friday after the U S Thanksgiving as a day off and access will be very limited Other countries may treat that same Friday to allow an overtime crew to work Holiday types can also be used to allow a guard to get in a door through one reader for that day but not through the other doors Another example is to set Holiday Type 1 for hourly employees and Holiday Type 2 for salaried employees Type 1 could have a holiday defined to deny access for hourly employees but Type 2 would allow salaried employees access to work on that holiday You can define the days and hours for two Holiday Types under Setup under Time Schedule You can select which types of Holiday are active for a given date on this Holidays page e Holiday Type 1 Ifa Type 1 Holiday click on the box to the right to place a check mark in it e Holiday Type 2 If a Type 2 Holiday click on the box to the right to place a check mark in it 5 After adding data to the fields click the Save Add button 6 A
314. nel is offline not communicating with the server To change the status of the reader door right click on the reader door icon and a menu will display next to the icon From the menu you can select any of the options that are not grayed out In the following example the options available are Lock Unlock and Timed i Lock Mo Unlock Click on the option you want to select it You can also double click the reader door icon to have it open unlock the door for the pre set unlock time For example if you double click the door icon it will send an Unlock Timed command to the door At the end of the time cycle the reader door will return to its previous mode System Controlled or Locked NOTE The door will stay unlocked for its configured lock time but the icon on the color graphics map will only change to the timed unlock icon for about 3 sec onds Relay Icons Default Relay Icons Deactivate Relay is deactivated Green Activate Relay is activated Red NOTE The relay icon on the map will be grayed out when the panel is offline not communicating with the server 10 6 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics There are three types of relay actions activate deactivate and pulse When you double click on the icon it will pulse activate the relay for less than one second To control a relay right click on the relay icon to display a menu From the menu you can select any of the options th
315. nes section allows you to select or define a color for the line and also to define the thickness of the lines Select the color you want from the palette adjust the thickness of the line and apply the attributes by clicking OK More information about the Color and Lines section of the attribute window can be found on the Text and Database page Triangle Rectangle Circle amp Ellipse The Triangle Rectangle Circle and Ellipse commands allow you to specify the placement of these automatically drawn geometric figures into the badge and to manipulate them to suit the overall badge design By selecting any of these commands you may position the figure on the badge by placing the mouse pointer in the approximate location in which the figure is required clicking and holding down the left mouse button and dragging the pointer from the point of origin The figure will automatically display on to the screen In order to resolve the triangle and ellipse to the correct dimensions you should release the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the second Handle near the point of origin depress the left mouse button and drag the Handle until the triangle or ellipse resolves itself to the required dimensions Once the required dimension has been obtained you may drag the figure to a more exact position on the badge by placing the mouse pointer over the general area of the Picked object depressing the left mouse button and dragging the
316. ney Elfo Output To File e senne EEE Output File Name penoy Td soree EIEEE Security Areas Alarm Points All y All X Cancel Report Log File Disk Drive Select the drive letter where the history log file is located The default is the C drive of your computer If the report is being recalled from a removable drive make sure the removable disk has been inserted Start Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should start A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon NOTE If you wish to recall all events in the history log file skip the Start and End Date and Time They default to the first and last event in the log file 6 56 460932001 GE Security Alarm History Reports Start Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should start Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the a Calendar icon Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop Security Areas Select the Security Area for Alarm History to be recalled for The default is all security areas with all alarm points If a single security area is selected the alarm points option will not be selectable Only one or all security areas can be recalled in a single report If more than one
317. ng Page Masking In order to mask any alarms the cardholder must first be allowed into the Security Area If you want to configure an area for masking that does not appear in the list of Available Masking Areas on the Cards Masking screen click on the ls Link Arrow to the left of the Available Masking Areas field This will bring up an additional window showing the Security Area page as shown below Security Area Name MFG OFFICE F Dial Up Panel Name APB Control in Area Time Delay for Re entry Security Area Description Keypad Masking Allowed A Se Manufacturing Office Building F E Delay for Securing Area Save Add Delete 19 Click on the name under Security Areas that you want to allow Keypad Masking That name will appear in the Security Area Name field on the right On this screen select Keypad Masking Allowed Repeat this process for all Security Areas in which you want to allow Keypad Masking When you are done click on the Save Add button to save your changes and return you to the Masking page The areas that you configured for Keypad Masking Allowed will now appear in the list of Available Masking Areas on the Cards Masking screen You can then select those areas to allow keypad masking NOTE If a security area has Keypad Masking Allowed checked the cardholder cannot gain access to the area until the area is Masked GE Security February 2 2005 3 17 TOPAZ Software
318. ng screen will display Reader Alarm Point a Output Relay E j Access Trace Reset Anti passback Service Functions Back Up Restore Each of the seven options above may be selected by clicking the corresponding PY button on the right side of the screen While viewing any one of the Control screens you can refresh the screen by clicking the tab for the screen selecting it again GE Security February 2 2005 4 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Reader Control Page The Reader Control page allows you to check the status of any configured reader in the system and send manual commands to them such as unlock lock etc e Status e Control Lock Unlock To navigate to the Reader Control page from any page within the Control pages click the Reader tab button at the top of the screen or from the main control page click on the Reader button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Mode State Forced Held Tamper Status BACK DOOR LOBBY DOOR All Doors BACK DOOR LOBBY DOOR Lock Door Unlock Door Momentary Unl f System Control Status The top portion of the window under Status lists all pre configured Readers To check the status of any Reader scroll through the list until the name of the Reader is located The color of the text shows the status of the reader The list below defines the meaning of the colors Status Color System Control Black Unlocked Red Momentary Unlock
319. ng the left mouse button you will display the File menu To save a template for the first time you should place the mouse pointer over the Save As command and click the let mouse button A dialog box will appear into which you should type the name of the template being saved The template name may be up to eight characters and no spaces Once you have selected OK with the mouse the system will automatically save the template using a TPL suffix Once you have initially saved the template using the Save As command future modifications to the template can be saved using the Save command from the File menu Using the Save Command will automatically save the latest version of the template under its existing filename To modify an existing template File Menu it is first necessary to open the file containing the template To do this you should select the File menu from the menu bar at the top of the screen Select Open from the File menu and then select the required template from the pick list of templates You may open a template file by either 1 placing the mouse pointer over the selected template name and double clicking the left mouse button or by 2 clicking once to highlight the file and then moving the mouse pointer to OK and again clicking the left mouse button GE Security February 2 2005 9 21 Topaz Software User Guide Options Menu With the system in Badge Design Mode you may select the Options menus by placing the mouse pointer o
320. nished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page GE Security February 2 2005 6 47 TOPAZ Software User Guide Below is a sample of a displayed Acknowledged events report j RECALL ACEMOWLEDGEMENT EVENTS EVENT 144 ACENOULEDGEMENT INITIATING EVENT WUMBER 135 WORES TATION ACENOULEDGENENT master EVENT 404 ACENCOULEDGEMENT INITIATING EVENT NUMBER 403 WORES TATION ACEMCOULEDGEMENT master EVENT 508 ACENOWLEDGEMNENT INITIATING EVENT NUMBER 499 WORESTATIOM AC ENOWLEDGEMENT master 2004 02 16 Mon 10 02 1 2004 02 16 Mon 10 09 1 2004 02 16 Mon 10 13 1 END OF RECALL EVENTS REPORT gt HDZ BA T na If the report recalls more than 1000 events the message below will be displayed allowing you the opportunity to cancel the search for additional events Microsoft Internet Explorer 0 Ea S 2 1000 lines received so Far do vou Want to continue 6 48 460932001 GE Security Recall Other Events Report Below is a sample of a displayed Commentary events report RECALL COMMENTARY EVENTS EVENT 769 COMMENTARY 2004 02 17 Tue 11 09 59 INITIATING EVENT NUMBER 7486 WORKSTATION 1 COMMENTS qe fTh4japlesunh EVENT 770 COMMENTARY 2004 02 17 Tue 11 10 01 INITIATING EVENT NUMBER 751 WORKSTATION 1
321. nt the dial up device to store alarms and troubles until the next scheduled download to the server or send the information to the server as they occur The optional reports are e Always Reports Select this option if you want the field panel to dial up the server and report all events immediately from this point instead of being stored in memory until the scheduled download e Report Troubles Select this option if you want troubles from this alarm point to be sent immediately to the server instead of being stored in memory until the scheduled download For example a Request To Exit alarm would report if the point when into trouble but would not report every time a request to exit was sent e Log Reports Select this option if you want alarm and troubles from this point to be stored in the dial up device s memory until the scheduled download time NOTE The video option cannot be used with a dial up panel Masking Schedule If the alarm point is to be automatically masked or unmasked during a time schedule then select the pre configured time schedule from the drop down list The default is Never will not mask by time NOTE If the desired Time Schedule has not yet been configured then you can click on the 6 Link Arrow button to the left of Masking Schedule The Time schedule configuration window will drop down Configure the desired time schedule and click the Save button Masking Action If you have selected a time schedule a
322. ntion with Help is to assist you at anytime with answers you need during use of the system Help will always be just a mouse click away Help can also be used as a tutorial or teaching aid Accessing The Help System There are two Help buttons on each page located at the top of the window Help Index button de will give you immediate access to the complete Help system and allow you to look up any questions you have about the system through the Contents Index and Search tabs Page Help button Help will give you immediate help on the current page you are working with Conventions Throughout this manual the following conventions are used Messages The text of message and dialog boxes is displayed in bold For example A message Operation Started will display Screens or Fields Words in Bold Face identify screens or fields that are instrumental to the operation of the software For example Anti Passback This field indicates whether References References to features in the software are in bold See Hardware Auto Configuration References to sections in the manual are in quotes See Hardware Auto Configuration on page 8 57 P 8 460932001 GE Security Warning A Caution A Note NOTE GE Security Conventions Warning This heading marks a critical step that could result in serious personal injury if the instructions are not STRICTLY followed Caution This heading mark
323. ny of the options that are not grayed out In the following example the options available are Activate Toggle and Pulse Activate JA Deactivate E Be Toggle Click on the option you want to select it 10 14 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics Reader Control Buttons These buttons control the selected reader Reader Lock Vill lock the selected reader denying access to all cardholders Reader Unlock Will unlock the selected reader allowing the reader door to be opened without requiring a card and or PIN Reader Controlled Places the reader under control of the software Reader Open Timed Unlocks the reader door for the time duration set in the reader configuration At the end ofthe time duration the reader will relock automatically To change the status of the reader door right click on the door icon to display a menu next to the icon From the menu you can select any of the options that are not grayed out In the following example the options available are Lock Unlock and Timed th Lock Ma Unlock We System Control Click on the option you want to select it You can also double click the reader door icon to have it open unlock timed For example if you double click the door icon it will send an Open Timed command to the door At the end of the time cycle the reader door will return to it s previous mode The open time is the unlock time in seconds that
324. o GE Security February 2 2005 9 5 Topaz Software User Guide change the size place the mouse arrow directly on one of the handles then click and hold the left mouse button and drag to the new shape To select attributes while the Handles are still in place and with the mouse pointer located within the area of the Handles click the right mouse button The Attributes screen is shown below DEFAULTS Test Options Dis nee Fomieme anal F omtine Ted Rotation U E Style Alignmeni Case Gar Code Date Formal Meme Farnals Horna Let Justity Ho Change No Barcode C Mo Change Mo Change Bold Right Justify C UpperCasa Code 3of8 ddimm y C Last Name C talic C Center C Lower Case C Code 128 C menci n First Mera C Underline C MixedCese Code 2of5 C ywaramdd Middle Name ida odd porn any First and Middle Flip Mame Color and Lines Ra Li ng wicht lo ml E A E A A aa a a E EE FF FF A A A A A A A A A MA Greer Round Corners EEEE SEE A A A A A A A z Bee RMm m momooodooooo z F Fill in area Photo and Bitmap alterations E Eaa Fey FP Cheama Ge E Chastre P Alari ard whe Wl Arae Mado le Print lt Detabase Field Condition Value to Check Pettem Fill Badge Replicate I Bnck Pattem Double Space censal These attributes which may be selected or changed for any particular Picked object are in bold on the screen and the attributes which may not be used are
325. o online it will check for the current status of the point and change the icon accordingly The alarm icons in the tree with the Wt red check mark have already been added to a map and cannot be added again If you want to add the icon to a different map you must first delete it from the current map To delete or remove an icon from the map click and drag the icon back to the tree window and release the mouse button The icon will disappear and the red t check mark on the icon in the tree will be removed All the default icons that come already configured on the system are listed below Additional icon groups may be added Check with the system administrator Default Alarm Icons user assignable configurable icon Description of Alarm Icon Represents 7 AC Power Failure Power to the field panel has failed CO Device Offline Communication to the field device has failed Door Alarm Magnetic door contacts on the reader doors Duress Alarm When a duress PIN code has been entered at the keyboard a a Fire Alarm Auxiliary output from fire panel has activated a Forced Open When a reader door is open without authorization 10 26 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Default Alarm Icons user assignable configurable Glass Break Alarm glass break detector has been activated while not masked Eaj Held Open When a door is not secured within the allowed time set in the reader configuration B High Te
326. o Change O Bold C AiyhtJustfy C UpperCase C Code3otd E ddimmiy E L st Nama Name C Relic C Catar LowerCase U Code 128 C mmddyy E FirstName Format CF Undadina C Mixed Case C Code oS Pouwsdmmjdd C Middle Name E bee dd menea First and Middle Flip Nome Color and nes E PERNT lo Red Line Wichh lo Color o Green l Round Comers Draw gt al Blue I Filin area and Fill Photo and Bitmap alterations EEE i e E Color Print il Palette Dalabase Field valve to Check Patten Fill Badge T Replicate Brick Pattern Photo and Bitmap Alterations The Font Size is determined by the size of the rectangle drawn on the template To adjust the size of the font try changing the height of the rectangle You will notice that the sample text in the rectangle will change as you adjust the height of the rectangle The length of the rectangle will determine how much of the text is shown printed on the badge If the text is longer than the rectangle it will still show when the badge is printed or displayed Text and Database Options In the case of the Text and Database objects the following attributes are available from the Text Options section e Font Name e Style e e Case e Date Format e Rotation 9 8 460932001 Outline Alignment Bar Code Name Formats Print If GE Security Entering Information Ted Options an ee ae Ee Text Rotation fo
327. o Check TITLE lis EQUAL TO Contractor The Print If command allows you to select whether a Picked object shall be printed on a badge based on the following conditions compared to information contained in the Cardholder database e IS EQUAL TO e IS GREATER OR EQUAL TO e IS GREATER THAN e IS LESS OR EQUAL TO e IS LESS THAN e IS NOT EQUAL TO GE Security February 2 2005 9 11 Topaz Software User Guide This is very useful in designing badges that are specific to individual cardholders Once you have selected the various items from each of the above sections to define the details of the Picked Text or Database object you may return to the badge design screen by placing the mouse pointer over the OK button at the base of the screen and clicking the left mouse button The Picked object will now appear on the screen in the format which you have selected still with the Adjustment Handles on the rectangle The Font size may however be unsuitable and can be adjusted by altering the size of the Picked object To do this move the mouse pointer over the bottom right Adjustment Handle of the object press the left mouse button and move it to the correct size for the text in the object The Font Size will automatically adjust to fit the new size of the picked object hen the item Is selected handles for adjusting are located at all four corners Place the mouse arrow on one ofthe handles click and h
328. o navigate to the Security Area Setup Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Security Area tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Access Grp Time Sched Holidays Instructions 4 Elevator Op Type Display Report fe Security Area Setup All Security Areas Yes Security Area Name Print Report e Output To File a Output File Name Run Report Cancel Report u i All Security Areas If Yes is selected all Security Areas will be listed on the report If No is selected then a security area must be selected from the drop down list under Security Area Name Security Area Name From the drop down list of pre configured security areas scroll through and select the security area to be recalled in the report by clicking on the Security Area Name Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to conta
329. object to the required position Releasing the left mouse button drops the Picked object in the selected position To select attributes for the picked object you should place the mouse pointer over the general area of the picked object and click the right mouse button The attributes screen will then appear The Color and Lines section and the Print If sections will be highlighted showing that these sections may be used to define attributes for the badge 9 14 460932001 GE Security Entering Information The Color and Lines section allows you to select colors or define colors for the figure and also to define the thickness of the lines and whether or not the figure should be filled with color The color palette shows a small selection of the total colors available To view more colors place the mouse pointer over one of the arrows at the left of the color palette click the left mouse button and hold it down until the right shade of the desired color appears Release the left mouse button and the scrolling will stop To select the desired shade place the mouse pointer over the selected color and click the left mouse button A box will appear indicating that the color has been selected If none of the colors on the palette appear suitable you may tailor a color to suit by using the Red Green and Blue color adjusters at the right of the color palette You should first select from the palette the nearest color to the desired shade Once selected
330. ocess Video Camera Name The Video Camera Name field is used to assign a name to the camera that can then be selected on various pages of the Topaz program This name must be unique and clearly identify the camera It could reference the area which is monitored by the camera that is being configured for example Southeast corridor or Accounting Lobby etc GE Security February 2 2005 8 65 TOPAZ Software User Guide Recorder Name The Recorder Name field is used to indicate the video recorder that controls the camera Select the name of the recorder from the drop down list of available video recorders If the correct recorder is not configured you can click the link arrow A button to open the Video Recorder page and configure the required recorder Recorder Camera Number The Recorder Camera Number field indicates the Camera Number that was assigned to this camera on the recorder For information regarding the assigning of Camera Numbers refer to the documentation which came with the Video Recorder Save Add Click the Save Add button to save the configuration to the database 8 66 460932001 GE Security Chapter 9 Badge Design Introduction This feature is currently not being evaluated by UL The Badge Design page allows you to design badges for use with individual employees in the Cardholder record The TOPAZ badge design facility is easy to use and has a wide range of features for designs As a demonstration the
331. ocooooooo 6 5 StartUp rabia A E a do 1 27 System Requirements 1 7 T FaDBUHONS curtidos 1 38 Tailgating Violation B 1 Take PNOO aras idas 3 12 TCP IP Connection o ooooooooo 8 4 Technical Support Email Address P 7 Terminated Card o o oooooooooooo 3 3 Time Difference Offset 8 28 Time Schedule O A NI E 7 8 Security Area o o ooooooomoo 3 9 Setup Report oo oooooooo o 6 20 Time Schedule Page 7 7 Timed Anti Passback D 1 Topaz Shutdown o o oooocooooo oo 1 36 TrademarkS o oo ooocooooonoooo o P 5 Training Email Address P 7 Turn Off Keypad Entry 8 45 Type of Service 0 0 0c ees P 6 GE Security February 2 2005 WNIOCK REAGEM asia a a wdc 4 2 Unmask Alarm Point 4 5 Demed Hc tans cai a wae eS sacha amp 3 16 JSB Camera suo ir reds eS ees Bao So F 1 User Information o o oooo o 1 16 V Wall Gan saree a OR be Slee os a 3 3 Variable Card Format 1 23 Vehicle License 3 20 Search for Cardholder by 3 4 Video Alarm Event 1 35 EVED 40934 dba dde iba uds lil Gol en a 2 1 View live feed idad do aes 1 36 Video Button 1 35 Video Card Camera 0 0 eee ee ee ee 3 1
332. old the lett mouse button and drag the abject to the desired shape and S ZE Bitmap The Bitmap command allows you to specify the placement of a bitmap logo or picture on the badge and to manipulate it to suit the overall badge design For more information see Import Bitmaps on page 9 24 Once you have selected the Bitmap command from the Draw menu the menu will disappear You should then select the position in which this item is to be located on the badge To select the position place the mouse arrow at the top left hand corner of this selected position press down and hold the left mouse 9 12 460932001 GE Security Entering Information button and drag it to the bottom right hand corner of the desired position The screen will show a rectangle with large square dot comers called Handles LOAD BITHAP liqsloqa omp alarmbcc bmp notokbck bmp Ocean bmp Ocean sands Wall Paper bmp PSBADGEFINAL bmp sclence bmp space bmp These Handles indicate that the object has been Picked for editing The Picked rectangle defines the position in which the desired object will be placed on the badge When you release the left mouse button a dialog window will appear on the screen The dialog window will show a list of bitmaps stored in the system Use the scroll bar at the side of the dialog box to scan through the available bitmaps Select the desired bitmap by moving the mouse pointer over the bitmap name and clickin
333. on from printing on the badge The option may be selected by clicking on the box to the left of the option placing a check mark in the box To de select the option click the box again to remove the check mark from the box 9 26 460932001 GE Security Options Menu Add CC FC The Add CC FC option will add the Company Code and Facility Code to the cardholder number on the badge Select the option by clicking on the box to the left of the option and the Company code Facility Code will be printed on the badge along with the cardholder number See the example below Communications Company Code amp Facility Code added to Card GE Security February 2 2005 9 27 Topaz Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank 460932001 GE Security Chapter 10 Map Button This feature is currently not being evaluated by UL Color Graphics Maps The TOPAZ Color Graphics software is an integrated part of all TOPAZ Software packages The software allows you to add drawings floor plans and pictures to the system as maps A variety of icons that come with the software or ones you can create are assigned to the maps and represent alarm access control points and map links When the alarm points the icons represent generate an alarm condition the icons will flash Acknowledgement of the alarm is required You can then use the access and control icons to lock and unlock doors turn on lights and control other function
334. ons in the selected area will also be placed in the new map GE Security February 2 2005 10 21 Topaz Software User Guide When you have finished with the configuration click the 5 Save Configuration button and the following message will display Hap Editor 5 7 Do you want to apply the changes to all the system 7 Click the Yes button to save the changes and then click the Go to Online Mode button to return to the online mode If you click the No button you will be returned to the configuration mode without saving any changes When you click the E Go to Online Mode button to return to the online mode if you have not clicked the 5 Save Configuration button the following message will display Hap Editor 57 2 Changes not submitted will be lost Continue 7 Click the No button to exit the message Click the z Save Configuration button and then the Goto Online Mode button to return to the online mode If you click the Yes button your changes will be disregarded and you will return to the online mode Rename Map To rename a map in the map tree double click on the map name and the following window is displayed Map Name Hih Floor Cancel Type in the new map name and click the OK button 10 22 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics Deleting Map To delete a map from the tree select the map to be deleted by clicking on the map name in the tree When the map will displ
335. option when you want the reader door to unlock when a person initiates a Request To Exit REX the area A button motion detector or other device may activate the Request to Exit A Request to Exit is required so that a Forced Open Alarm is not generated when a cardholder exits an area that does not have an exit keypad or reader but does have a door contact If the door is to unlock when the Request to Exit is generated click on the box to the right The door responds the same as if a cardholder has entered a valid card PIN to access the area If the door has a crash bar which allows exiting without unlocking the door remove the check mark from this box This will allow the door to be opened from the inside but the alarm will be masked allowing the person to exit without generating a Forced Open Alarm Enter Card by Keypad The Enter Card by Keypad will allow the cardholder to enter their card number by using the keypad The number of digits set in this field represents the number of digits that are required for a card number to be considered complete For example if the card number is 4 digits 0000 9999 or less the field should be set at 4 digits A cardholder whose card number is less than required number must enter leading zeros or can use the key for example if the card number is 0032 you can enter 32 The key is only used for leading zeros not trailing zeros for example it is not required for 3200 The possible options
336. or AC Power Failure B System Tamper Field controller panel door has been opened Masking Alarm Points To Mask or Unmask the alarm point right click on the icon and a menu will display next to the icon From the menu you can select any of the options that are not grayed out In the following example the only options are Mask and Details If the alarm was currently masked or configured as a non maskable alarm point the Mask option would also be grayed out Y Acknowledge ga Hask es Unmazk on Details Click on the option you want to select it You can also place the mouse arrow on the icon highlighting it This will make the Mask Unmask and Toggle Mask icons appear in the top left portion of the toolbar While the icon is highlighted click the desired button on the toolbar GE Security February 2 2005 10 5 Topaz Software User Guide Reader Door Icons There are four reader door icons described below Default Reader Door Icons Locked The reader door is locked and NO access will be granted When you double click on the icon the reader door will go to the Timed Mode D Unlocked The reader door is unlocked for free access Control Mode The computer is controlling the reader door Reader Door in Timed Unlock Mode The reader door will be unlocked for a set time lack time and will return to its previous mode at the end of the time cycle NOTE The door icon on the map will be grayed out when the pa
337. ore information on this step see Elevator Floor Definition Page on page 8 34 5 Setup and configure the Elevator Control itself TOPAZ Field Panels and Elevator Control The ACURT2 field panel has 4 onboard relays and the ACURT4 has 8 onboard relays The ACU can have two 2 RRMs added for a maximum of 36 or 40 relays maximum for elevator control The relay numbering will be different depending on which ACU is used see the relay numbering chart below 8 30 460932001 GE Security Elevator Control The example below is using an ACURT4 with one RRM addressed 6 There are 3 Elevator Cabs controlling 4 floors each Each Relay would be given a Security Area for access authorization Each elevator cab must have its own reader When a card is read in Elevator Cab 2 and the user has access to Areas Records and Accounting then only relays 4 and 5 would operate NOTE Only RRMs addressed 6 and 7 can be used for ACUs configured for elevator control Elevator Relay Numbering Relay Numbering for Elevator Control ACURT2 ACURT4 4 RRM Address 7 20 35 24 39 Elevator Relay Interface Elevator Side GE Security Side gt Te Floor Select Button Elevator C Relay Wiring GE Security Relay NOTES e When an ACU is used for Elevator Control all of its relays are set to energized when not selected If the ACU were to fail all floors will be enabled Fail Safe e Some older elevators require th
338. orkstation The installation steps for a Server or Workstation are almost identical but are described separately The installation steps for a Server are described below The System Software comes on a CD Compact Disk The CD is used to load the TOPAZ application onto the computer server and workstation If you are using Windows 2000 or XP log on as the Administrator 1 8 460932001 GE Security System Requirements Installing Virtual Machine The installer for virtual machine is located on the TOPAZ software CD 1 Insert the CD and when the Install window opens select Browse CD 2 When the folders window displays click on the folder named IE6 to open it 3 Locate the msjavx86 exe file and double click on the file name The following install window will display Microsoft yM as r 7 Would you like to install the Microsoft wM A Click Yes You do want to install the Virtual Machine 2101 x Please read the following license agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement MICROSOFT VIRTUAL MACHINE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT SOFTWARE IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Microsoft End User License Agreement EULA ts a legal agreement between vou either an Individual or a single entity and Microsoft Corporation hor the Microsoft software product identified above which includes online or electronic documentation and may include computer software and
339. ort into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection 6 20 460932001 GE Security Time Schedule Setup Report Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for Time Sche
340. ou can click the Cancel button and the screen will revert to the Card database screen The Jpeg Photo Quality adjustment allows you to select the desired quality of the photo being saved The lower the number the lower the quality of the image The default is 75 with a range of 5 95 We recommended that 95 be used for the best possible quality Importing Photo Importing a photo allows you to display and use a digital photo file instead of a live photo The imported photo should not exceed 200k in size 1 Start by clicking the Browse button to the right of the Photo File Name field 2 The Choose File window will open Look in E TOPAZ f a Ee aacgt SCleens Deiphs dll decodercore dll ie cal _ webhelp debug log _ 5 dwr dll History badger win Ox debug log 6 English dll FA bitmaps winnt E debug_log_4 a lce_api dll i Jog F apogee 3 debug_log_ 3 3 ce32enu dll Desktop dre atl dll debug_log_06 ia icontms C dms2 8 audcom32 dll debug log 09 implode dl TE 1 dms3 EH camerazelect 5 debug_log_10 E Install Teena E htmint cortex dll 2 debug_log_11 JpegLib dl O import 8 erpe32 dl debug log 12 kill My Network F 85 Decdiff dll E debug_log_13 MECCom dl File name Files of type all Files Cancel 3 You may browse to select any folder you wish Sample photos are stored under Badger Photos 4 Locate the
341. ou to reset the Anti Passback status of a cardholder or all cardholders in a selected Security Area Reset APB is used to reset cardholders who have access to the APB Security Area in order to allow them to enter that area after they have exited without swiping their cards For example if all cardholders who are in an APB Security Area leave quickly because of a fire and do not swipe their cards individually upon exiting the system thinks they are still in the APB area Reset APB will also allow the security staff to set change the Security Area to a different area that is not an APB area for all cardholders who have access to that area e Set All Cardholders APB e Seta Cardholder s APB To navigate to the Reset APB page from any page within the Control pages click the Reset APB tab button at the top of the screen or from the main control page click on the Reset APB button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Reset ALL Cardholders to Security Area Reset Selected Cardholder to Security Area Jackson RogerL Oxley Jason R ResetAPB GE Security February 2 2005 4 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide Set All Cardholders This is used to reset cardholders who have exited the APB area without swiping their cards This will allow them back into the APB area To Set All Cardholders in a selected Security Area click on the name of the Security Area in the Reset ALL Cardholders to Security Area list that
342. ould start Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop GE Security February 2 2005 6 53 TOPAZ Software User Guide security Areas Select the Security Area for All Alarm Events are to be recalled The default is all security areas If a single security area is selected the alarm points option will not be selectable Only one or all security areas can be recalled in a single report If more than one security area is desired additional reports must be run for each security area desired Alarm Points select the Alarm Point for which alarm events are to be recalled The default is all alarm points If a single alarm point is selected the security areas option will not be available Only one or all alarm points can be recalled in a single report If more than one alarm point is desired additional reports must be run for each alarm point Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above out
343. owledge the alarm The name of the operator currently logged on to the system will be recorded in the Acked By field 1 32 460932001 GE Security Alarm Queue Window NOTE The only field on the Alarm Detail page that can be changed or entered at anytime is Comments To close the Alarm Details window click the X in the upper right corner of the window Alarm Details Page Auto Display To stop the Alarm Details page from automatically displaying right mouse click anywhere inside the alarm queue window and the following message will be displayed a 7 Press OK to disable alarm details window display on ACK E Cancel Click OK to stop the auto display feature Each time you now acknowledge an alarm the alarm color of the text will change to indicate that the alarm has been acknowledged but the alarm details page will not be displayed You can still call up the Alarm Details page by clicking the Detail button or by double clicking on the text of the alarm inside the alarm queue window To start the Alarm Details page automatic display again right mouse click anywhere inside the alarm queue window and the following message will be displayed ca 2 Press OK to re enable alarms details window display on ACK E Cancel Click OK and the Alarm Details page will again automatically display each time you acknowledge an alarm Color Graphics Not Ready Message If you click the MAP MAP button or triple cli
344. p left corner of the toolbar When masking a security area all alarm points linked to the area will be masked unless they are configured as a non maskable alarm point JEU Unmask Security Area Well unmask the currently selected security area Mask Security Area Vill mask the currently selected security area Mask Unmask Security Area Will toggle between masking and unmasking the selected security area When the area is masked the button will unmask the area When the area Is unmasked the button well mask the area You can also right click on the security area icon to display a menu next to the icon From the menu you can select any of the options that are not grayed out In the following example the only options are Mask and Toggle Mask Even if Mask is selected any alarms assigned to the area that are configured as non maskable will not be masked Click on the option you want to select it Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledge Acknowledges an alarm To use this button to acknowledge a new alarm or an alarm that has returned to normal you must first select the alarm by passing the mouse over the alarm icon requiring acknowledgement You can then click OK button to acknowledge the alarm If you are acknowledging an alarm that has returned to normal don t forget to clear it Caution A Make sure you have the correct icon selected before taking any action Once an icon on the map is selected and highlighted you
345. page 7 27 Select ACCESS DENIED WRONG KEYPAD and in the field beside Acknowledgment select NO Invalid PIN Attempts Before Card Deactivation Set the number of times a cardholder may enter the wrong PIN before their card is deactivated The default is Disabled and the possible selections are 1 through 9 times NOTE lf a card has been deactivated before it can be activated again you must change the deactivation date in the cardholder record to make the card valid again Anti Passback Set this to Enabled if Anti Passback will be used by TOPAZ Disabled Default The Anti Passback feature will not be used Enabled The Anti Passback feature will be used and you are presented with the choice for Grant Access on APB Violation For more information on Anti Passback see Appendix D Anti Passback on page D 1 Grant Access on APB Violation This field will only be accessible if you select Enabled for the Anti Passback field e Unchecked Any card swipe that activates an APB violation will result in the cardholder being denied access and will trigger an alarm APB violation event The alarm event will notify the security operator who may want to send somebody to that security area e Checked Any card swipe that activates an APB violation will result in the cardholder being allowed access and will trigger an APB violation event This is not normally used but may be helpful for testing TOPAZ For more inform
346. page allows you to e Download Panels e Dial up Connection e Load Panel Program To navigate to the Panel page from any page within the Control pages click the Service tab button at the top of the window or from the Control page click the Service Function button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Gaslite Main z Dial up Ports Download amp Hang Up Download amp Stay Connected Break Connection Hang Up Initialize Test Modem Serial Port Field Panel Gaslite Main y Download Panels To download all data to a selected panel scroll through the list of pre configured panels in the Field Panels list and select the panel to download to by clicking on the name in the list Once the name is highlighted click the Stuer Download button located in the Download Panels section to start the download of all data to the currently selected ACU panel A message Operation Complete will display NOTE If the panel fails to download the panel will revert to the data in the panel before the download was started The downloaded data will not take effect until the entire database has been downloaded GE Security February 2 2005 4 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide Reset Panels In the event that the field panel would require rebooting you can select the field panel in the list and click the Reset button In Most cases this will eliminate the need to respond to the location of the panel to reset it
347. password is not correct The parameter is incorrect A write fault occurred on the network The system cannot start another process at this time Insert the diskette for drive 1 The program stopped because an alternate diskette was not inserted The disk is in use or locked by another process The system cannot open the device or file specified The file name is too long There is not enough space on the disk February 2 2005 A 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide 113 114 118 119 120 121 122 123 125 126 127 129 131 132 139 140 143 137 148 154 155 161 162 164 167 170 180 183 189 191 No more internal file identifiers available The target internal file identifier is incorrect The verify on write switch parameter value is not correct The system does not support the command requested This function is not valid on this platform The semaphore time out period has expired The data area passed to a system call is too small File name or volume label contains invalid characters The disk has no volume label The specified module could not be found The specified procedure could not be found The 1 application cannot be run in Windows 2000 mode An attempt was made to move the file pointer before the beginning of the file The file pointer cannot be set on the specified device or file The system tried to substitute a drive to a directory on a substituted drive The system tried to join a drive
348. photo badge enrollment station see System Requirements on page 1 7 3 10 460932001 GE Security Photo ID Page The Photo ID Page The Photo ID page is the badging and photo page which enables you to take import photos assign a badge template and print the badge etc Before you can use the Photo ID features you must have Photo Badging selected on the Hardware Workstation page To enable Photo Badging 1 Select the Hardware button on the left side of the main screen 2 Select Workstation 3 Under Workstation select the name of your workstation The name should appear in the Workstation Name field 4 Select Photo Badging by clicking the mouse in the check box placing a check mark in it Click the Save button This page allows you to administer all badging functions including the following e Display Badge e Take Photo e Import Photo e Print Badge e Design Badge e Badge Templates While viewing any Cards page click the Photo ID tab button at the top of the window The following page will display Masking Y Information Badge Preview me A gt S f y rrrow Sy Enter Cardholder Communications i Import Photo Select Cardholder Aberdeen Schuyler J Barker Eileen Print Badge Barron Devyn R George Jeremy Design Badge pam Schuyler Aberdeen Badge Template DEFAULT 0111 0022 931039 Photo File Name Record Last Changed GE Security February
349. plate file name ee eee NI ee E 4 460932001 GE Security Chapter Functional Protocol Field Field Name Name Type of Value Trace Time TRACE TZ Numeric Zone Description Up to 3 characters e If 0 zero is entered this feature is not active e This field specifies during which Time Zone a cardholder s card activity is to be traced The Time Zone number is entered User Defined USERFLD1 to Alphanumeric Up to 24 characters Field 1 through USERFLD4 e User defined fields can be set up by the User Defined operator for use in storing additional reference Field 4 information on cardholders This is usually a type of information that is unique to the site or facility User Defined USERFLD5 to Alphanumeric Up to 16 characters Field 5 through USERFLD8 e User defined fields can be set up by the User Defined operator for use in storing additional reference Field 8 information on cardholders This is usually a type of information that is unique to the site or facility User Defined USERFLD9 Alphanumeric Up to 12 characters Field 9 e User defined fields can be set up by the operator for use in storing additional reference information on cardholders This is usually a type of information that is unique to the site or facility User Defined USERFLDA and Alphanumeric Up to 12 characters Field Athrough USERFLDB e User defined fields can be set up by the User Defined operator for use in storing additional refer
350. ple you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved 6 10 460932001 GE Security Alarm Point Setup Report into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for Alarm Point Setup Pio ae _ h S READER CONFIGURATION READER MAME BACK DOOR READER NUMBER O DEVICE Gaslite Main MESSAGE WORESTATION 1 SECURITY AREA SYSTEM DOOR STRIKE TIME 5 SEC HELD OPEN TIMER 15 SEC EEYPAD AVAILABLE Mo EEYFAD ACCESS DIGITS O READER DESCRIPTION TIME ZOME NEVER BEGINNING ACTION Access No Keypad ENDING ACTION Access No Keypad FAIL SAFE LOCK YM No EXTEND DOOR HELD OPEN ON REQUEST TO EXIT Y N No ALLOW ONE MINUTE HELD OPEN ALA
351. put options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page 6 54 460932001 GE Security Recall Alarm Events Report Below is a sample of a displayed report for Recall Alarm Events a feta ee EVENT 825 NEW Forced Open ALARM ALARM POINT BACE DOOR FoO EVENT 5285 NEW Held Open ALARM ALARM POINT LOBBY DOOR HO
352. r Access Trace by Cardholder BACK DOOR Jackson Roger L Traces Available The top portion of the main window has two lists one showing the Readers and one showing Cardholders A scrollbar to the right of the list indicates that the list is longer than the window Use the scrollbar to view the entire list Start a Trace Access Trace by Cardholder To start a trace for a specific Cardholder in the upper portion of the window under Traces Available click on the cardholder name in the Access Trace by Cardholder list 4 8 460932001 GE Security Access Trace Page Workstation If a workstation is being used from the list select the workstation for the trace to report to NOTE If you need to configure a Workstation click the 6 to the left of the field to call up the Workstation configuration page When you have completed the config uration close the page by clicking the Sae O Save button You will then return to the Access Trace page Time Schedule Select the Time Schedule for the trace to be active NOTE If you need to configure a Time Schedule click the 6 to the left of the field to call up the Time Schedule configuration page When you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Sae O Save button You will then return to the Access Trace page Instruction Message Select from the drop down list of pre configured Instruction Messages the message to be displayed to the operator when the tra
353. r RSVP message Distributed Applications The specified handle does not represent a valid open connection Use the value returned from a successful DAOpen TCP IP Not owner TCP IP No such process TCP IP Interrupted system call TCP IP No such device or address TCP IP Bad file number TCP IP Permission denied TCP IP Bad address The ACU uploaded an event with an invalid date The ONE 32 MP has now assigned the event today s date with a time of 00 00 00 TCP IP Invalid argument TCP IP Too many open files TCP IP Operation would block TCP IP Operation now in progress TCP IP Operation already in progress TCP IP Socket operation on non socket TCP IP Destination address required TCP IP Message too long TCP IP Protocol wrong type for socket TCP IP Protocol not available TCP IP Protocol not supported TCP IP Socket type not supported TCP IP Operation not supported on socket TCP IP Protocol family not supported TCP IP Address family not supported by protocol family February 2 2005 A 15 TOPAZ Software User Guide 10048 10049 10050 10051 10052 10053 10054 10055 10056 10057 10058 10059 10060 10061 10062 10063 10064 10065 10066 A 16 TCP IP Address already in use TCP IP Can t assign requested address TCP IP Network is down TCP IP Network is unreachable TCP IP Network dropped connection on reset TCP IP Software caused connection abort TCP IP Connection reset by peer TCP IP No b
354. r as the Start value For a Start value select from 1 64 bits and for a length select from 0 36 bits 7 The Issue Code is not used in the Wiegand format unless you have the ability to encode your own cards The Issue Code is normally 1 digit For a Start value select from 1 64 bits and for a length select from 0 8 bits Example of a 37 bit Wiegand Card Format Field Star Length Fac Code 15 8 sue code 2 0 Example of a 26 bit Wiegand Card Format aed Code Mag Stripe Card Formats Unlike a Wiegand Card Format which cannot be changed for a given card Mag Stripe Cards can have their data changed However this requires the use of special equipment which may or may not have been part of your site s installation of TOPAZ Whereas Wiegand cards are formatted in bits Mag Stripe cards are formatted in digits 0 through 9 To add a Mag Stripe Card Format 1 Select from 1 to 40 digits for the Card Length Most TOPAZ installations use a 3 2 6 1 format and use 14 digits which will be described in an example below Another Mag Stripe Card Format is the 4 4 10 2 format which uses 22 digits In both formats the first and last digits are used as a Begin digit B and a Finish digit F B is the Start digit and F is the Stop digit 2 You can select the location of the first bit for the Company Code as the Start value The Length is the number of digits to use for the Company Code For a Start value select from 2 40 a
355. r in the area between the Handles of the Picked object If the Database command has been selected a dialog box will appear with a pick list showing all of the available Cardholder Database information fields that can be selected You can scroll through all of the available selections by placing the mouse pointer over the up or down arrows located at the right hand side of the dialog box To select a database item you move the mouse pointer to that selection and click the left mouse button To enter this database item onto the badge you may double click the left mouse button or place the mouse pointer over the OK button and click the left mouse button The selected database item will appear in the area between the Handles of the Picked object DATABASE FIELDS BUILDING CARDE CARDNAME al LARDSN CITIZEN CLERANCE COMMENT 1 COMMENT CADALDRE DACTDATE DISION DRM LICH DRWST DER LIC DRYRSTAT GE Security February 2 2005 9 7 Topaz Software User Guide To assign attributes to the Picked item place the mouse pointer over the area between the Handles and click the right mouse button The Attributes screen will appear as shown below Database Field Text Options DE Ted Options ate Form at Cotakease Text E ER gt Cose gt Bar Code Dete Format Name Formats E Normal E HoChange No Barcode MeChanga M
356. r of relays to the same alarm point 6 Controlled by Alarm Point If the Relay is to be linked to an Alarm Point then select Yes from the list The default is No 7 From the drop down list of configured Alarm Point Names select the point that will activate 8 54 460932001 GE Security Relays this relay when it goes into alarm NOTE If you wish to configure an Alarm Point click on the E Link Arrow button to the left and the Alarm Point setup page will drop down Configure the Alarm Point and click the Save button and you will return to the Relay Setup page 8 Link During Time Schedule If you want the Relay to activate upon the alarm during a selected Time Schedule only then select the Time Schedule from the drop down list of configured Time Schedules NOTE If you wish to configure a Time Schedule click on the 6 Link Arrow button to the left and the time schedule setup page will drop down Configure the time schedule and click the Save button to close the window 9 Active When Alarm is Masked Under normal conditions when the Alarm Point that is linked to the relay is Masked the relay will not activate when the point goes into alarm If you wish the Relay to Activate even if the Alarm Point is Masked click the box to the right placing a check mark in it 10 Scheduling If the Relay is going to be activated or deactivated by a Time Schedule the following fields need to be configured 11 Relay Action Schedule If the rela
357. r on Building 1 2 FLOOR 4 th Floor on Building 1 3 FLOOR 5 Sth Floor on Building 1 PRINTING COMPLETE GE Security February 2 2005 6 29 TOPAZ Software User Guide Operator Type Report The Operator Type Report recalls the different Operator Types that have been defined To navigate to the Operator Type Report page from any page within the System Setup pages click on the Op Type tab button in the top navigation bar The following page will display Display Report Operator Type r j L Print Report Output To File Output File Name Run Report Cancel Report The report will list all configured Operator Types Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was in
358. r values Number of schemas exceeded allocated memory SCRIO error values Illegal command in vm gt vtmemd SCRIO error values Illegal parameter in command SCRIO error values Number of screen I O parameter too large SCRIO error values screen field name missing in commentary SCRIO error values No user mailbox defined for screen I O return mailbox SCRIO error values February 2 2005 A 11 TOPAZ Software User Guide 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1170 1071 A 12 No screen I O destination mailbox defined SCRIO error values Requested logical device not assigned to unit SCRIO error values Requested screen window not defined SCRIO error values Requested device type not defined SCRIO error values Requested schema file not found SCRIO error values or define InvalidAlmZn for Pecos Interface No channel access ID Requested Disk I O channel not defined Write lock without read lock Attempted write without locking read Ends of read file or write continue End of file reached for read or write Illegal record operation type request Illegal record operation relational type request ISAM read does not find record A remote control point monitor point or access point was deleted but was not deleted in the automatic operation first Delete record from automatic operation to correct
359. ration Complete will display GE Security February 2 2005 7 27 TOPAZ Software User Guide Alarm Options The Alarm Options setup has two sub pages that allow you to add Alarm Instructions and define alarm catagories e Alarm Instruction e Categories To navigate to the Alarm Options pages from any setup page click the Alarm Opt tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Alarm Options button on the right side of the page The following page will display TUS Access Denied Alarm Instruction Names Alarm Message Text l Access Denied A Card has been used and resulted in Denied Forced Open Access Send Guard to investigate Save Add Delete All the sub pages are covered in detail on the following pages 7 28 460932001 GE Security Alarm Instructions Alarm Instruction Page The Alarm Instruction page allows you to add unique instruction messages to be displayed to the operator when an event occurs e Add Instruction e Modify Instruction e Delete Instruction To navigate to the Alarm Instruction page from any setup page click the Alarm Opt tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Alarm Options button on the right side of the page Then click the Instructions tab button and the following page will display Alarm Instruction Name access Denied A pad Alarm Instruction Names Alarm Message Text Access Denied i Card has bee
360. re such as Eltron P500 Fargo PRO L etc If the selected printer does not support this feature the option on the menu list will be grayed out Reverse Template When selected this feature will print the selected template on the back of the card If the printer does not support double sided printing the reverse template feature will be grayed out in the menu Import Bitmaps A wide range of options is available for inserting Bitmaps into a card such as logos designs and photographs may be imported into the badge design To import a bitmap into a Badger Program from the Options menu select Import Bitmap The following Import Bitmap window will display Import Bitmap Ei Es kn am ml c defbrnap brmp Ilgslogo bmp File name bmp Files of type Bitmap Cancel Help 9 24 460932001 GE Security Options Menu Select the bitmap file to import by clicking on it so that it is highlighted and click the Open button Import Bitmap Ei E bmp 4 Look ir a E J one32mp 3 badger J bmp ay D File name bmp Files of type Bitmap Cancel Help Click the down arrow to the right of the Look in field at the top of the window From the scroll list select the Floppy A Drive Import Bitmap Fx Look in E 3 Floppy A 4 EX 2810061 bmp 49 10061 bmp 9 10061b bmp ay EMP260 1FL bmp File name J100b1 bmp Files of type Bitmap Cancel Help Se
361. re it begins This can happen as a result of a reboot following a system crash or as a result of resetting a clock for changes between daylight savings and standard time Since more than one alarm or trouble is reported per report line more than one type of flag can occur per report line However each type of flag will occur only once per report line GE Security February 2 2005 6 59 TOPAZ Software User Guide Employee Reports Page The Employee Report can provide a wide range of information regarding any employee in the system You can set up different options depending upon what type of report is needed To navigate to the Employee Report page from any page within the Reports pages click on the Employee Reports tab button at the top of the window The following page will display ae E E CEIA Systm Setup Y Recall Event Alarm Hist Available Templates Template Name as Sort By Card Number E Print Photos Print Report Photos per Page Output To File Output File Name l Condition Greater than or equal y Condition Greater than or equal E r Run Report voue C Voue C SavefAdd EZE Clear Follow the procedure below to set up a report for recall Cancel Report Available Templates You can select an already configured report from the list To create a new report type in a new name in the Template Name field Template Name Enter a Template Name of your choice to sav
362. report The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report If the report was displayed click the Cancel Report button when you are finished viewing the report and you will return to the System Capabilities Report page If the report is still generating and you want to stop the report click the Cancel Report button This will terminate the report but the information already generated will remain on the screen until you click Cancel Report a second time If no report is displayed and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return you to the Reports splash page Sample Report Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for System Capabilities a Ao a j Wide rea Network Server IL E E System Capacities Topaz Version 1 4 6 02 Build 210 Local Area Network Workstation Number 1 5erverj Length Of Card Number Field Length Of Company Code Field Length Of Facility Code Field Length Of Issue Level Field Max imum Max imum Max imum Max imum Max irun Max Lint Max Lint Max 1101110 Max iron Max irun Max irmun Max Lint Max 1101111 Max irot Max irun Max Lint Max Lint Max
363. reports must be run for each reader Cardholders e All Cards When selected his option will recall all access events for all cards for the selected area s reader s e Name When selected his option will allow you to select one cardholders name from a drop down list to recall access events for Name fe Aberdeen ochuyler A Cardholders fan Cards Mg Humber e e Number When selected his option will allow you to select one card number from a drop down list to recall access events for Cardholders All Cards E Name e Number e 1234 5678 0000123456 Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with t
364. rity area lf checked then any card swipe that activates an APB violation will allow access for that cardholder but will trigger an access event This is not normally used but may be helpful for testing TOPAZ Setup Security Area Timed Delay for Reentry If Anti Passback is being used in the security area then you can select the delay in minutes before the cardholder will be allowed to access the area again after access has been granted The minutes must be positive whole numbers not fractions This is used to discourage passing a card back to another person to follow you into a security area with only one reader such as a parking lot or turnstile Once a card is used on that reader any attempt to use the same card before that time expires will generate an APB violation alarm and access will be denied until the total time has expired GE Security February 2 2005 D 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide If the same card is used on another reader the time interval for this reader is reset to zero For example if the cardholder swipes the card while in that security area to go to another area APB Control In Area lf unchecked default this Security Area does not use Anti Passback If checked this Security Area responds to APB violations with an alarm event If checked you are presented with the choice for Timed Delay for Reentry in minutes Card Access Executive APB Override This field will only apply if Anti Passbac
365. rkstation Click on Printers Click on Add Printer and select the printer for reports Click on the Scheduling tab Under Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster select Start printing after last page is spooled The Reports printer must wait to print until the entire report is sent to the printer Se e SS Now you can select the Report Printer under Hardware Workstation Photo Badging If you want to use Photo Badging at this workstation click the box to place a check mark in it Alarm Graphics If you want to use Alarm Color Graphics at this workstation click the box to place a check mark in it Route Alarms To Workstation Alarms assigned to this workstation can be temporarily rerouted to another workstation during certain times of the day and days of the week To select a workstation to temporarily route this workstation s alarms to select that workstation from the drop down list This routing can also be used to manually reroute alarms at anytime by selecting the workstation you wish to route the alarms to and then set the time schedule to route to the default of Always in the next field Routing Time Schedule If you have selected a workstation in the above field to route alarms you must also select the time schedule for the routing to start and end Select from the drop down list any pre configured Time Schedule during which you wish to reroute alarms Alarm Ack Time Limit You may select from
366. rmat is not one of the Standard Wiegand or Mag Strip formats you will need to setup a Variable Card Format Click on the 6 link arrow This will open an additional window with the Variable Card Format setup page to allow you to setup Variable Card Formats When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button PIN Required If there is a keypad on the reader being configured and you wish to require the cardholder to use a PIN select Yes If the reader does not have a keypad or the PIN is not going to be used select No security Area Select the Security Area from the drop down list of predefined security areas that the reader will be associated with For example if the reader is the Main Door to the Research Lab then it may be assigned to an area called Research Lab Later when giving access authority to a cardholder they may be given the Research Lab as an area of authorized access NOTE If you need to setup a Security Area click on the A link arrow This will open an additional window with the Security Area setup page to allow you to setup Security Areas When setup has been completed close the window by clicking the Save button 8 40 460932001 GE Security Reader Setup Door Contact Select this box if the door that the reader is controlling has a contact and you wish that contact to be used to monitor the door status The default is to have a checkmark in this box If the door contact is not going to
367. rolling through the map tree Grayed out when the maps are automatically scrolling through the map tree Previous Map on Tree Each time this button is clicked the map just above the one currently selected in the tree will display Next Map on Tree Each time this button ts clicked the map just below the one currently selected in the tree will display Configuration Button The Configuration button at the right end of the toolbar allows you to take the Color Graphics software offline and enter the configuration mode where you can set up maps and icons On Line Mode This button will take the Color Graphics off line and put the software in the configuration mode Grayed out when color graphics is in the configuration mode Configuration Mode This button will exit the configuration mode and put the Color Graphics software back on line Grayed out when in the color graphics software is on line Caution While in the configuration mode if alarms linked to icons on the maps are acti vated the icons will not be updated until the color graphics system is back online The following buttons will only appear in the upper left corner of the toolbar after the mouse has selected an icon on the map GE Security February 2 2005 10 11 Topaz Software User Guide security Area Masking Buttons When a security area icon is selected on a map by placing the mouse arrow on it the following buttons appear in the to
368. rom the current date A calendar is available by clicking on the War Calendar button Available Security Areas Selected Security Areas To select the Security Areas that all the cards being added will be authorized to access click on the name of the Security Area listed in the Available Security Areas window Click the im Right Arrow button to add the selected security area to the Selected Security Areas window Repeat this step until all desired security areas are added to the Selected Security Areas window Up to eight 8 security areas per card may be selected To remove a selected area from the Selected Security Areas window click on the security area name to remove and click the 4 Left Arrow button If the desired Security Area is not available and you need to configure one click the S Link Arrow button to the left of Available Security Areas This will open the Security Area configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the E Save button Available Access Groups Selected Access Groups To select the Access Groups that all the cards being added will be authorized to access click on the name of the Access Group listed in the Available Access Groups window GE Security February 2 2005 3 25 TOPAZ Software User Guide Click the gt Right Arrow button to add the access group to the Selected Access Groups window Repeat this step until all desired access groups are added to the Selected Ac
369. row button to add the access group to the Selected Access Groups window Repeat this step until all desired access groups are added to the Selected Access Groups window Up to eight 8 access groups may be selected To remove a selected area from the Selected Access Groups window click on the access group name to remove and click the 4 Left Arrow button If the desired Access Group is not available and you need to configure one click the A Link Arrow button to the left of Available Access Group This will open the Access Group configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Save Save button This will return you to the Access page you were working with security Area Time Schedule The Security Area Time Schedule defines the times during which the cardholder will have access to certain Security Areas or Access Groups Click on the name of the area or group then from the Security Area Time Schedule drop down list select the time for authorization Repeat until all areas or groups have a time schedule If the desired Time Schedule is not available and you need to configure one click the A Link Arrow button to the left of Security Area Time Schedule This will open the Time Schedule configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Save Save button This will return you to the Access page you were working with Authorized for Conditional Unlock
370. rs 1 i o 00 o 00 Busi Hrs 2 A BimingesHro 3 jo gt oz fo foz Weekend Holiday fo zi foo fo z foo gt Save Add Add New Time Schedule 1 Enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the Schedule Name For example 07 00 16 00 M F Military time meaning that the time schedule covers from 7am to 4pm Monday through Friday or Work Hrs Military time is sometimes referred to as a 24 hour clock shown in the chart below For example 11 50pm would be 23 50 GE Security February 2 2005 7 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide AM 24Hour_ PM 24Hour 3am 15 00 Hrs 6am 18 00 Hrs 7 00 Hrs 19 00 Hrs 00 00 Hrs 2 Youcan select a currently configured Time Schedule from the Schedules list By clicking ona Time Schedule in the list you can see the start and stop time days of the week and holiday type for which it is set You can also use this selection to pick an existing Time Schedule that is similar to one you want to add then change its Schedule Name and other fields 3 Start Time Select the time frames that the schedule will cover by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the first field selection the hour Then click on the number of the start hour from the drop down list 1 23 Select the minutes 00 59 the same way 4 Stop Time Set the ending time for the schedule in the next two fields to the right of the stop time 5 Active on Days Select the days of the week that the schedule wil
371. s Active click on the box to show a check mark If the Host PC should start polling communicating with the Panel after saving the configuration to the Host then click on the box to the right to place a w check mark in the box This will indicate the field panel will be active If no check mark is placed in the box default the configuration for the panel can be saved but the Host PC will not start polling the panel At a later time this field can be changed to have the Host start polling the panel This is very useful when you would like to configure panels in advance before the installation of the panels or communication connection Server COM Port From the drop down list select the computer communication port that the field panel will communicate to COM1 The physical communication port on the back of the PC NOTE If you need to setup a Com Port click on the S link arrow This will open the Com Port setup page in an additional window When setup has been com pleted close the window by clicking the Save button Serial Number The serial number is a unique number for each field panel and is only required for dial up panels The serial number can be found on the documentation that came with the field panel or on the board inside the field panel Elevator Operation If the field panel is going to be used for Elevator Control click on the box to the right placing a w check mark in the box If not leave the default of no chec
372. s a critical step that could result in damage to equipment if the instructions are not STRICTLY followed This is an example of a note Notes provide useful information and should be read immediately before proceeding February 2 2005 P 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank P 10 460932001 GE Security Table of Contents PREFACE 26020200202 serra aerate dees AAA P 5 Important Notice About Computer Viruses anana aaaea P 5 aa e OS A a EAN iio dock BORA P 5 AN A A A e P 5 Trademark S oia edu de aia dt did e Bate wee ei P 5 Proprietary Statement 2 0 0 0 0 0 cc eee ees P 6 MErODIEMS ANSE Lal bs Seater oe Ns E A theca ae dci Oe P Comtact US an ol na add ao ep dabas P 7 GE SCCUMY Addres S caia tartas coi Cee Canes Vee eee Clee eee honest P Electronic E mail Addresses 00 ee eee eee P Wep ce Cicer 8a ce ares WR re wai ae ie eee ee ae tena lie ee ee en tae P ADOUNRIEID ros as areal attrac sere ten Haan ate arlene whe lids dai ae ae deed toe aa P 8 CONVEMIONS Sic teas or A ii pi os P 8 TABLE OF CONTENU SS coca tesi id dia 1 1 CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED outs ita 1 1 ADOUIINe TOPAZ SST Marie it co cies E AAA Meee Tai ld a 1 1 TOPAZ QUICK OA otra od AI A o biie 1 2 AUTO Configuratio s sa saae a o toa dentine How ae ee a So SB ke 1 4 Initiation of the Auto Configuration Feature 0 anaana 0c nene 1 4 System Requirements cade vee de Se ola o AA A A AA A 1
373. s and workstations before connecting them to any network GE Security assumes no responsibility for damage caused by computer viruses protecting your GE Security system from viruses or installing anti virus protection software required by your IT department Contact your IT Department about installing the proper Anti Virus software before connecting the systems to a network Warranty The information in this publication is believed to be accurate in all respects No liability is assumed for errors contained herein or for incidental damages in connection with the furnishing perfor mance or use of this material GE Security cannot assume responsibility for any consequences resulting from the use thereof The information contained herein is subject to changes without notice Revisions to this publication or new additions to it may be issued to incorporate such changes The GE Security s warranty is one 1 year from date of shipment for both material and labor Soft ware packages must be used in an GE Security recommended manner and on GE Security rec ommended computer for the warranty to be valid All service under warranty is to be performed at Garden Grove California Copyright Copyright 2000 InfoGraphic Systems all rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without permission from GE Security The original user is hereby granted license to copy the software only for the purpose of normal system main
374. s denied because a configuration error Example no alarms in the security area TOO MANY ACCESS REQUESTS DENIED e This is a special event code to tell you this cardholder has exceeded the number of Access Denies in a given time as configured in Access Request Deny Monitor program END OF LIST GE Security February 2 2005 B 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide Alarm Input Numbers Reader Physical Alarm Zone Numbers Physical Alarm Zone Reader Address Zone 0 Zone 3 Zone 0 is default for Door Contact Zone 1 is default for Exit Push Button Reader Logical Alarm Zone Numbers Lock Monitor Bond Sensor If used must be connected to Z2 F O Forced open H O Held Open R T Reader Enclosure Tamper OFFL Reader Off Line Reader Lock Aatress_ Monitor FO RT o e es er o o so o a 7 a rs RIM Zone Input Numbers Expansion Port B 6 460932001 GE Security Alarm Input Numbers sea ae Module Off Line GE Security February 2 2005 B 7 TOPAZ Software User Guide Relay Numbers ACU2RT and ACU2RT4 Relay Numbers One Stage Reader Aux Door Strike One Stage Reader Aux Relay Numbers Reader 0 Door Strike Output Reader 0 Aux Relay 7 Reader 2 Door Strike Output Reader 2 Aux Relay 1 Reader 3 Door Strike Output Reader 3 Aux Relay 23 RIM Relay Numbers 37 9 16 1 Reader 1 Door Strike Output 18 Reader 1 Aux Relay 19 20 2 22 B 8 460932001 GE Security Relay Num
375. s displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try saving again Delete Access Group Caution DO NOT delete an Access Group until the all cardholders have been deleted form the group 1 Select the access group to delete by scrolling through the Access Group list and click on the name of the access group to delete 2 Once the name of the access group to delete is highlighted click on the Delete button at the bottom of the window 3 After clicking the Delete button the message Are you sure you want to delete this record will appear Click OK to continue 4 The Access Group name will be removed from the list The message Operation Complete should display The Access Group name will be removed from the list GE Security February 2 2005 7 15 TOPAZ Software User Guide site Settings Page The Site Settings page allows you to configure the following e General Information e Grant Access on Duress e Invalid PIN Attempts Before Alarm e Invalid PIN Attempts Before Card Deactivation e Event Report Card Name With e Encode Card format e Anti Passback e Grant Access on APB Violation e Date Format To navigate to the Site Settings page from any Setup page click the Site Settings tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup Page click the Site Settings button on the right side of the screen The following page will display t te EN Poe i ji Invalid PIN Attempts
376. s groups To navigate to the Batch Add page from any page within the Cards pages click the Batch tab button at the top of the screen The following page will display EIA Ek o A EE Company PARUN Code y Codo ECON Start at Card Number Ca di 100001 Stop at Card Number frootoo Staring Care Samp ee Card Stamp Upuanal m Deactivation Date Februay f13 2024 m f stoning Employee Optonad Starting Employee Optional i Ee b Se oT i E Available Security Areas La he Selected Security Areas A Security Area Time Sched OF MFG OFFICE Business Hrs1_ y Selected Access Groups BatchAdd Clear Company Facility Code Enter up to 4 numbers for the Company Code in the first field that will be encoded on the cards being added and then enter up to 4 numbers for the Facility Code in the second field otart at Card Number Enter up to 10 digits for the starting card number Stop at Card Number Enter up to 10 digits for the ending card number This range of cards up to a maximum of 250 cards will be added to TOPAZ For example if the starting card number is 136001 and the Stop at Number is 136250 then 250 cards will be added to the system Using Readers to Enter the Card Number Range An alternative method of entering the Start at Card Number and Stop at Card Number is the follow Ing 1 Leave the Start at Card Number and Stop at Card Number fields blank 2 Take the first and last cards
377. s that the alarm point has been configured for The map links allow you to jump between related maps with a mouse click All activity you perform with the TOPAZ Color Graphics software is archived in the Operator History file and can be recalled Caution A While in the configuration mode which allows you to add and modify maps and icons the icons on the maps will not be updated until the color graphics system is placed back into online mode NOTE For best overall image quality and operating efficiency make sure the most current video drivers for the card being used are loaded and minimum of 2 Megabytes of video RAM is installed Maps used in the software must be Enhanced Metafile emf type files You can convert AutoCAD dxf jpeg and bitmap files to emf with third party software such as Paint Shop Pro The TOPAZ Color Graphics software is automatically activated when the TOPAZ software is started and you press the MAP button It shuts down when you log off or exit TOPAZ You can hide the Map window by clicking the E Minimize button in the top right corner of the map window If you don t see a MAP button then Color Graphics has not been configured for the workstation To enable Color Graphics Select the Hardware button on the left side of the main screen 2 Select Workstation 3 Under Workstation select the name of your workstation The name should appear in the Workstation Name field 4 Select Alarm Graphics by c
378. s to the desired reshape The two lines that are joined at the point will move together as you drag the handle Click and drag to reshape 10 34 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics You can delete the outline and redraw by clicking the e Peliganal Clear Polygonal button When you have completed changes to the Security Area Configuration window click the OK button Save your configuration changes by clicking the 5 Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen GE Security February 2 2005 10 35 Topaz Software User Guide Adding Camera to Map In the Device tree locate the camera icon Place the mouse pointer on the Camera icon click and hold down the left mouse button Drag the icon on the map and release the mouse button When you release the mouse button after dragging the camera icon onto the map the Camera Configuration window will display as shown below Camera Configuration ac Camera Name Camera Onentation Camera Positions Camera fi Camera Features l Pan T Focus Tit T Iris Zoom Preset position Cancel Clicking the Cancel button will close the Camera Configuration window and remove the camera icon from the map Enter the Camera Name of up to 35 alphanumeric characters The camera name field may only display a portion of the 35 characters but the title bar on the camera window shown below when called up will displa
379. sback Overview Anti Passback also referred to as APB is a feature of TOPAZ that prevents a cardholder from passing their card back to another person to access the same area TOPAZ offers Timed APB only For example with a turnstile where after entry the cardholder can pass their card back through the bars to another The access would be denied until the time has expired after the first use In order for Anti Passback to work it must first be Enabled for that site The TOPAZ uses Timed Anti Passback by security area Only one card is required With timed anti passback a time in minutes is assigned to the security area Once the card is read there after access will be denied to that area until the time on the card has expired The timer will immediately expire on the card upon a valid card read by any other reader on the same field panel The following screens and fields affect Anti Passback Setup Site Settings Anti Passback If you select Disabled default the Anti Passback feature will not be used by TOPAZ If you select Enabled the Anti Passback feature will be used by TOPAZ and you are presented with the choice for Grant Access on APB Violation Grant Access on APB Violation lf unchecked default then any card swipe that activates an APB violation will deny access for that cardholder and will trigger an alarm violation event The alarm event will notify the security operator who may want to send somebody to that secu
380. security area is desired additional reports must be run for each security area Alarm Points Select the Alarm Point for which the Alarm History is to be recalled The default is all alarm points If a single alarm point is selected the security areas option will not be available Only one or all Alarm Points can be recalled in a single report If more than one alarm point is desired additional reports must be run for each alarm point Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c lreportslMyreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the r
381. ser Guide serial Port Page The Serial Port page is used to setup or modify settings of the PC Workstation s serial communication ports Configuration includes if the port is active or not communication baud rate speed etc To navigate to the Serial Port page from any Hardware page click the Serial Port tab button at the top of the window or from the main Hardware page click the Serial Port button on the right side of the page The following page will display Serial Port Name one i Serial Ports E i COMI 3 i peere Video a Building 3 South 3 Video Switcher Type GE DVMRe Es 8 mn X Y y i Serial Ports From the list select the serial port to configure or modify by clicking on the port in the Serial Ports window at the top right side of the page Topaz supports up to five serial ports Serial Port Name This field is display only to show the name of the currently selected port Active If the port is going to be used to actively communicate to field hardware it must be selected by clicking the box to the right to place a check mark in the box Baud Rate From the drop down list select the baud rate that the equipment connected to the serial port will communicate at The possible selections are 300 600 1200 2400 9600 and 19200 8 2 460932001 GE Security Serial Port Parity From the drop down list select the parity for the equipment that is connected to the serial port T
382. side of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 18 460932001 GE Security Access Groups Setup Report Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Access Group Setup ACCESS GROUP CONFIGURATION OUTPUT GROUP 3 GROUP NAME Secretarial Pool 4 TZ o4 Ta ACCOUNTING 3 Business
383. sing Badge Design Accessing Badge Design To navigate to Badge Design click on the Cards button in the main navigation bar on the left side of the browser window then click on the Photo ID button then the Design Badge button The system will open the badge template design window as shown below PHOTO BADGE Untitled Hle Edit Draw Optone Jest Help NOTE If the Photo Badge window does not display make sure the workstation has been set up for Photo Badging To select a Portrait badge or a Landscape badge move the mouse pointer to the Options selection on the menu bar at the top of the window and click the left mouse button Choose the selection of Portrait or GE Security February 2 2005 Topaz Software User Guide Landscape which is suitable for the badge design you wish to implement This will alter the dotted line template on the screen for badge orientation selected from the menu as shown below Bs PHOT AOE U riiki Plies Es ee a Dray pions Tat Heip ue me PHOTO BADGE Untiled Mode rpa ofre Ela Eda Draw Tec DEAE Currently Tee Fmi selected format a is grayed out Invert Badge on Print F Pa a e Pa CRETE hee Gabe ee a BEBBBE EEL EGER RRR RBBB E E E BBR ERR REE EERE ERR E E EEEE E E E E E E E LL 9 4 460932001 GE Security Entering Information Entering Information In order to place any field information on a badge you need to first select Draw from the menu bar at the top of the window
384. sked No ACK Workstation ritche Alarm Reporting Delay lo al Sec Save Add Delete Clear Add Alarm Point Alarm Name The Alarm Name field is used to designate the name to be used for an alarm point it can contain up to 26 characters For example Emergency Exit Door S E NOTE Each name must be unique from any other No duplicate names are allowed Field Panel The Field Panel field is used to indicate the ACU that controls this alarm point Select the Field Panel from the drop down list of pre configured panels NOTE If you wish to configure a field panel click on the ls Link Arrow button to the left of the Field Panel field to open the Field Panel configuration page Config ure the Field Panel and click the Save button to return to the Alarm Setup page GE Security February 2 2005 8 47 TOPAZ Software User Guide security Area The Security Area field is used to assign a security area to the alarm point It is selected from a drop down list of configured Security Areas NOTE If you wish to configure a Security Area click on the 6 Link Arrow button to the left of Security Area field to open the Security Area configuration page Configure the Security Area and click the Save button to return to the Alarm Setup page Alarm Categories The Alarm Categories field indicates the category to which this alarm point is to be assigned It is good to group alarms points into categories like Held Open
385. ss was denied because the card is inactive CARD NOT ACTIVATED Access was denied because the Activation Date in the Cardholder s Database is not active yet CARD NOT DEFINED Access was denied because this card s encoded number is not defined in the Cardholder s Data Base The encoded card number is the number shown is the event message CARD TERMINATED A cardholder has presented a card requesting access to the area but access was denied because the card has been set to terminated in the cardholder s record DISK ERROR Access was denied because of a disk error Call your Distributor or GE Interlogix Representative DURESS Access was denied because this cardholder is under Duress Access on Duress is 460932001 GE Security user configurable under the Site Configuration Menu ACCESS DENIED ESCORT REQUIRED e A cardholder has presented a card requesting access to the area but access was denied because the cardholder is required to have an escort ACCESS DENIED HOST COMMUNICATION LOSS e This event code only appears in the uploaded events file Access was denied because the SCP Device was offline for an access request that had to go to the Host Example Keypad Masking requires host processing ACCESS DENIED INVALID FLOOR NUMBER e Elevator Access was denied because the cardholder entered a floor number that he is not authorized for ACCESS DENIED INVALID ISSUE CODE Access was denied because the Issue Code in
386. st be selected then you have not selected a port in the Server COM Port field that is configured as a dial up port To do this click OK and then click on the link arrow next to Server COM Port On the Serial Port window select a Serial Port on the right Under Port Connection Device select the device that is configured for dial up Press the Save button EA E Comm Workstation Reader Alarm Point Relay Auto Config Y Video Y 4 Setup Elevator Configured Panels Panel Phone Number sq Max Connect Time eo Min Gaslite Extension 5 Gaslite Main z Mi E Panel Dial Out Schedule Aways El E mak earl De Time 1440 5 Min Server Phone Number 1 la ignore Daylight Savings No j Server Phone Number 2 psa A EA eee wou lo Description de N Editorial a l a Server Dial Out Schedule Always Extension office ae gt ae oe 6166 Arlington Way i A Comm Overdue Message None y ca i Save Quick Start o ma To configure a field panel for dial up follow the procedure below Panel Phone Number Enter the standard dial up telephone number that the panel is connected to the server for example 555 1234 without the quotes If you must dial out to get an outside line first and you need to first dial a number such as 9 followed by a pause enter the number as 9 555 1234 The comma is needed for a pause If you must dial long distanc
387. stalled You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad 6 30 460932001 GE Security Run Report Operator Type Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page Below is a sample of a displayed report for Operator Type F nu HT OPERATOR LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL GE Security OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF TYPE NAME RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION RESTRICTION REST
388. sue commands to selected points The buttons that appear at the left end of the toolbar will change as the mouse arrow is passed over different types of icons on the map When you want to change the current status of an icon on the map the quickest and easiest way is to right click on the icon for the menu but you may also pass the mouse arrow over the icon This will highlight the icon selecting it for action The icon on the map will stay highlighted and selected until the mouse is passed over another icon highlighting it for action After making sure you have the correct icon highlighted and the name appears in the bottom bar of the map window you can then move the mouse to the toolbar and click the button for the action you want to take Caution A Make sure you have the correct icon selected before taking any action Once an icon on the map is selected and highlighted you must be careful not to pass the mouse over any other icon while moving the mouse to the toolbar As stated above once the mouse arrow is passed over another icon that icon will then be selected and highlighted This could cause you to take action on the wrong icon 10 10 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics Map Function Buttons Freeze Map Scrolling This button will stop the map from scrolling automatically Grayed aut when the map scralling mode is already stopped Restat Map Scrolling This button will start the map automatically sc
389. supporting hardware The following Alarm States exist on the TOPAZ system e Offline e Short e Alarm e Ground e Secure e Fault e Open e Circuit Fault Anti passback A feature that prevents a cardholder from entering a secure area and leaving their access card outside for an unauthorized user The TOPAZ System can perform only timed local Anti Passback 1 Local Anti Passback brings the function down to the device level The advantage is that Anti Passback will continue to work if the server goes offline Anti Tailgate This prevents a cardholder from following another cardholder into an area without using their card ARNET device A port expansion device It takes the interrupts normally used for one serial port and multiplexes it for multiple port operation Backup formerly Archive Saving the system s database onto a separate medium device for safety purposes Badge See Card Baud rate A measurement of speed in data communications Card previously Badge An encoded credential that identifies and allows the cardholder access in and around a secure site Cardholder An individual who has access to a secure site through the use of an encoded card GE Security February 2 2005 G 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide Category A definable grouping of alarms or troubles Command An immediately executed system action initiated manually by you This is in contrast to Actions that execute automatically without
390. t a White screen with Action cancelled on it This means the Internet Explorer cannot find the MP exe server application e Insure Microsoft s Internet Information Server IIS is not installed on this computer Delete the file WORKSTATION HTA in the TOPAZ folder and then reload the TOPAZ application TOPAZ does not start Before TOPAZ can run you must make sure your computer is configured properly e The screen resolution must be set to 1024 768 and 65535 colors e The computer must have at least 256 MB of memory e TCP IP must be installed but not set for DHCP Check the TCP IP configuration by pinging the IP address For example if the TCP IP address is 192 1 1 1 then go to a command prompt and type PING 192 1 1 1 You should get Reply from 192 1 1 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 e In Windows Control Panel click on Devices Make sure AFD Networking Support Environment has Status set to Started and Startup is set to Automatic If the above settings are correct and the program still fails to start look in the file scrout txt or scrout01 txt These are error event files and contain error messages that can give clues to the proper action I get the error message Copy Protection Not Found e Make sure the Software Sentinel is connected to the parallel port e If there is a printer connected make sure the printer is on line GE Security February 2 200
391. t be in the configuration mode After placing the security area on the map double click the security area icon to outline The Security Area configuration window will display GE Security February 2 2005 10 33 Topaz Software User Guide If the security area color has not been selected click the __ H Color button and the color window will display Select the color from the Basic or Custom colors for area by clicking on the color block NOTE Only one color can be selected for both the security area and the icon out lines The Color you selected will appear in the color block in the Security Area Configuration window as shown below Security rea Configuration Security Area Name Cance KH ACCOUNTING Start drawing the outline of the area by placing the mouse arrow at the starting point on the map Click the left mouse button once to set the starting point Move the mouse arrow to the next location and click the left button once again Repeat this until the entire area is outlined and you have clicked the mouse button back on the starting point starting Point rma After clicking back on the starting point you will find that each point you clicked now has a small square block called a reshaping handle These reshaping handles allow you to reshape the outline To reshape the outline of the area place the mouse arrow on top of a reshaping handle click and hold the left mouse button as you drag the line
392. t has not cleared reset yet Red Flashing A new alarm has been activated that needs to be acknowledged and cleared Blue The alarm is currently masked and will not generate a new alarm condition but will report trouble conditions GE Security February 2 2005 10 3 Topaz Software User Guide Yellow A new alarm trouble has been activated that needs to be acknowledged and cleared The trouble condition will be reported even if the alarm point is masked Yellow Flashing A new alarm trouble has been activated that needs to be acknowledged and cleared The trouble condition will be reported even if the alarm point is masked To acknowledge a flashing alarm point double click its icon The following window will display LOBBY MOTION Instruction message Comments The left side of the window may have an instruction message The right window is for you to type informational comments about the alarm or actions you take NOTE DIAMOND II has several common characters which cannot be used These char acters are Apostrophe Comma Greater Than lt Less Than gt and Quote Marks Click the Acknowledge button to stop the alarm sound and stop the flashing of the icon You may then enter your comments and either click Clear or click Cancel Cancel will close the window without comments and allow you to reopen it later to add comments and then click Clear There are different types of icons for alarms
393. t the system uses to identify which site the cardholder is from To navigate to the Facility Code page from any Setup page click the Facility Code tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Facility Code button on the right side of the page The following page will display Sched 3 Access p ustom Fid r Evnt Alarn Op 7 olii Facility Code Name Company Code Facility Code 5678 En Add Facility Codes When you purchase cards you will get a particular company code for the set When you purchase additional sets of cards it is almost certain that the cards unless you special order them will have a different company code So you will configure a new facility and company code for the new set of cards To add Facility and Company Codes to the system follow the procedure below Facility Code Name Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the card set The Company and Facility Code numbers can also be used as the name Company Code Enter up to 4 digits for the Company Code NOTE For 26 bit card format the facility code must be entered into the Company Code field and the facility code field is set to 0 GE Security February 2 2005 7 21 TOPAZ Software User Guide Facility Code Enter up to 4 digits for the Facility Code Caution A The Company Code and Facility Code must match the numbers encoded on the access cards or the cards will not work properly The Save A
394. tain that the check box beside it contains a checkmark Click OK to close the Firewall properties GE Security February 2 2005 1 13 TOPAZ Software User Guide Installing a Host PC Server NOTE The installation steps for a server are described below The installation steps for a Workstation are described under Hardware then Workstation and then Add a Workstation elsewhere in this manual Make sure you are logged in as the Administrator so you have the correct rights to install software Insert the TOPAZ Installation CD into the CD drive If Auto Insert Notification is enabled for your CD drive the Install Menu will provide a list as shown below If the Install Menu does not appear within one minute follow this procedure 1 Open Windows Explorer 2 Double click on the drive letter for the CD drive 3 Inthe root directory double click on the file start bat The TOPAZ Install screen will display NOTE Before installing TOPAZ make sure that Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 provided by GE Security has been installed using the TOPAZ CD and the wizard has been run to complete the installation If you have IE 6 0 already installed on your computer check to see if the title bar states Microsoft Inter net Explorer provided by GE Security If not you must install the Virtual Machine that is located on the CD For more information see Installing Virtual Machine on page 1 9 Topaz Installatio
395. talled You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel Report button it will return to the Reports page 6 38 460932001 GE Security Recall By Event Number Report Below is a sample of part of a displayed report for Recall by Event Number GE Security February 2 2005 lis A A a P e RECALL BY EVENT NUMBER EVENT 1 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASE INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dmwsl scpdeyv dt EVENT 2 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASE INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dms11rctz00 dt EVENT 3 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASE INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dmsil rcactol dt EVENT 4 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 46 TASK INITIA OPEN FILE ERROR 1019 FILE dmsl mkactoo dt EVENT 5 SYSTEM ERROR EVENT 2004 02 11 Wed 12 56 4
396. tart Stop Date From the drop down list select the Month Day and Year at which the report should stop A full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the Calendar icon GE Security February 2 2005 6 37 TOPAZ Software User Guide Stop Time From the drop down list select the Hour Minute and Seconds at which the report should stop Beginning Event Number Enter the Event Number desired for the first event of the report The default number is the First Event in the History Log File Ending Event number Enter the Event Number for the last event of the report The default number is the Last Event in the History Log File Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was ins
397. tation selected from the menu as shown below BA PHOTO BADGE UA flo eave eee ey oun fee Ed rar pime Tea Hook E a PHOTO BADGE Untiled APT e mare Fie Edt Draw Ms Pest Help Currently selected format ls grayed out Invert Badge on Print Reverse template Import Bimap Portes selection Test Display Test Print The Test Display command allows you to view the badge design with the database information designed into the badge from a default cardholder file set up in the system at the time of delivery This gives you the opportunity to view the badge design with real database information NOTE Not all fields will be visible The Test Print command allows you to print the badge shown with the Test Display command to see how the badge will look when printed Encode Mag Stripe selecting the Encode Mag Stripe command will set the printer to encode the magnetic strip on the card with the card number in the standard GE Security format NOTE This can only be done if the correct card stock is used and an approved printer with Magnetic Stripe encoding option is used with the system Invert Badge on Print Rotates the image 180 when printing the badge NOTE Rotation is usually required for printing Mag Stripe cards GE Security February 2 2005 9 23 Topaz Software User Guide Overlaminate Badge This feature laminates a security hologram on to the card during printing The printer must support this featu
398. tc only for some cardholders Database Field Condition Yalue to Check KEES T ior nea gt As an example the following procedure will enable you to print the word Contractor on the badges for Cardholders who are contractors To do this you create a Print If condition of TITLE IS EQUAL TO CONTRACTOR Place the mouse pointer over the down arrow in the Database Field of the Print If section Click the left mouse button and a pick list will appear showing all of the available fields in the Database Scroll through the pick list by placing the mouse pointer over the down arrow and clicking the left mouse button and holding it down until the legend TITLE appears in the list Release the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer over the word TITLE and click the left mouse button The pick list will disappear and the word TITLE will appear in the Database Field Move the mouse pointer to the down arrow by the side of the Condition field and click the left mouse button A pick list will appear with arrows and a scroll bar at the side Move the mouse pointer to the legend IS EQUAL TO and click the left mouse button The pick list will disappear and the legend IS EQUAL TO will appear in the Condition field Move the mouse pointer to the Value to Check field and click the left mouse button A cursor will appear in the Value to Check field Type the word CONTRACTOR into the field Database Field Condition Value t
399. te 3 14 460932001 GE Security Photo ID Page Save Once all the Photo Badging data for the cardholder has been entered click the Save Save button at the bottom left side of the window to save the data to the server After clicking the Save button one of the following messages will appear e If Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Card Number has been repeated Try a new number e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish clear to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window GE Security February 2 2005 3 15 TOPAZ Software User Guide Masking Page The Masking page allows you to select the Security Areas that the cardholder will be authorized to Mask Unmask Masking means turning off the alarm for that Security Area and Unmasking means turning the alarm back on While viewing any Cards page click the Masking tab button at the top of the window The following page will display Selected Masking Areas A x M Search by Enter Cardholder Aberdeen Schuyler J Select Cardholder Aberdeen Schuyler J Barker Eileen Barron Devyn R George Jeremy Record Last Changed Only Security Areas where masking is allowed will be listed 3 16 460932001 GE Security Maski
400. ted Stop at Card Number Enter the last card number to be deleted This range of cards up to a maximum of 250 cards will be deleted from TOPAZ Caution Remember that all cards between the Start and Stop numbers will also be deleted 3 28 460932001 GE Security Batch Delete Page At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window When you are sure that you have the correct card numbers selected to be deleted click the Batch Delete button The message Operation Complete will appear indicating the number of cards that were deleted from the system If not the message will advise you which field has been left out When you have completed using the Batch function click the Card button to access the other page buttons GE Security February 2 2005 3 29 TOPAZ Software User Guide This Page Intentionally Left Blank 460932001 GE Security Chapter 4 Control Button The Control button allows you to control readers alarm points and access trace reset anti passback perform service functions and back up restore the TOPAZ System databases The following buttons are available through the main Control page e Reader e Alarm Point e Output Relay e Access Trace e Reset Anti Passback Service Functions e Backup Restore To navigate to the Control page click on the Control button in the left main toolbar The followi
401. tenance and backup and only for the same system sold by GE Security Trademarks Trademark of Interlogix GE Security Intel Pentium Intel Corporation International Business Machines Microsoft Windows MS DOS Microsoft Corporation Windows 2000 Windows XP amp Internet Explorer All other trademark names are the property of their respective owners GE Security February 2 2005 P 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide Proprietary Statement Material contained within this document and all associated hardware software and firmware are proprietary and are subject to U S A patent and copyright laws No reproduction or disclosure by any means in part or in whole is permitted without the express written consent of GE Security The information in this manual is for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by GE Security GE Security assumes no responsi bility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this book Use of the software and firmware is granted by license and does not transfer ownership from GE security Use of these materials is only permitted for the location and purpose of the original sale and with the equipment sold by GE Security or its predecessors Permission to relocate the equip ment must be obtained by contacting GE Security in Garden Grove California However certain fees may be in effect GE Security is also referred to as Interlogi
402. that the device has a communication or other related problem If you want any device in this list removed from the database click on it to be highlighted and then click the Configure button NOTE If you configure a Com port for one device and later unplug it and plug in another device of a different type when you run Hardware Auto Configura tion Auto Configuration will not find that device You must reconfigure the device for that Com port Caution If a Com Port is not listed correctly Auto Configuration won t find anything under that Com port Right Side of the Page Color Legend In the corner of the screen you will see the color legend which describes devices listed under the System icon These colors provide information about the configuration status of each device You can view text boxes describing the meaning of each color by placing your mouse pointer on a color bar Devices shown in green are Found But Not Configured Found but Not Configured The system has detected new hardware This hardware needs to be configured Devices shown in red are Configured But Not Found Configured but Not Found The hardware is configured but not communicating with the syster Devices shown in black are Found and Configured Found and Configured The hardware ts configured and communicating with the system GE Security February 2 2005 8 59 TOPAZ Software User Guide Device Tree You can access the Device Tree by
403. that was selected above under Schedules will display in this field Make desired changes to the name times and or days of the week 3 After making all the desired modifications to the Time Schedule click the Save Add button 4 Amessage Operation Complete will display GE Security February 2 2005 7 9 TOPAZ Software User Guide security Area Page The Security Area page allows you to do the following e Add Security Area e Modify an Existing Security Area e Delete Security Area To navigate to the Security Area page from any Setup page click the Security Area tab button at the top of the window or from the main Setup page click the Security Areas button on the right side of the page The following page will display 6 EN om Los ess tome Manufacturing Office building F zi Delay for Securing Area 10 a Ma 3 Add New Security rea 1 Start by clicking the Clear Button All fields will reset and allow adding of the new area Enter all the field information as described below 2 Security Area Name Enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters for the name for the security area being configured This is the name that will be assigned to devices that are associated with the area 3 You can select a currently configured Security Area from the Security Areas list You can also use this selection to pick an existing Security Area that is similar to one you want to add then change its Security Area Name an
404. the Run Report Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the page A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have finished viewing the report on the monitor click the Cancel Report button This will cancel the operation and return to the report screen If no report is displaying and you click on the Cancel button it will return to the Reports page GE Security February 2 2005 6 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide A report for one typical cardholder is shown below zH 35 DE A a CARDHOLDER INFORMATION CARD 1234 5675 0000123456 CARD SERIAL E CARDHOLDER NAME Aberdeen Schuyler E EMPLOYEE NUMBER 123456 PHOTO FILE ISSUE HIRE DATE 0402 13 DEPARTMENT TELEPACNE EXT 000271 LAST DATE CHANGED EMERGENCY CONTACT John Aberdeen EMERGENCY PHOME CONTACT RELATIONSHIP Father VEHICLE LICENSE 10DL234 STATE SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER 555 12 3456 SUPERVISOR George Schulte CARDHOLDER INFORMATION CARD 1234 5675 0000645312 CARD SERIAL CARDHOLDER NAME Bogata Janet I EMPLOYEE NUMBER 645312 PHOTO FILE ISSUE HIRE DATE 0402 16 DEPARTMENT TELEPACNE EXT OOOO00 LAST DATE CHANGED EMERGENCY CONTACT EMERGENCY PHONE 6 4 460932001 OODD0D0o0iP JP GE Security System Setup Reports System Setup Report Page This group of reports provides all the information on how a particular site is confi
405. the cabs are in different buildings Elevator cabs used in conjunction with this feature should be equipped with card readers which may or may not have keypads Two 2 elevator cabs are supported per ACURT2 field panel and four 4 elevator cabs are supported per ACURT4 field panel ECS controls access to different floors for each badge holder using security area s group and time schedules per card per floor The software verifies that the cardholder has access to the cab and floor combination If access is allowed the system will send a momentary relay deactivation command to the elevator control panel Configuring the Elevator Control Configuring the Elevator Control is a five step process 1 Install the specific hardware that supports elevator control Install card readers in the elevator cabs and connect the control relays as the interface to the elevator control panel 2 Define the field panel configuration used with the elevator cabs You can configure any reader on an elevator ACURT2 or ACURT4 as an elevator cab reader There is no special elevator configuration needed in the Reader Setup NOTE Once an ACU is configured for Elevator Control it can only be used for Eleva tor Control 3 Configure a Security Area for each floor that the elevator cab s will control access to 4 Define the elevator cabs and floors accessible by the cab Up to 40 floors can be configured by adding two 2 RRMs address 6 and 7 to the ACURT4 For m
406. the Windows 2000 Professional or XP Professional operating system and employs the use of an Internet browser interface technology along with a unique self configuring software package called Auto Configuration This allows you to easily set up standard input devices The TOPAZ System integrates alarm monitoring access control and remote control capabilities throughout a site TOPAZ consists of the file server computer one 1 additional workstation ACURT Intelligent Controllers card readers alarm sensors and door locking hardware To communicate with card readers alarm points and the workstation the system uses Secure Communications Protocol SCP through Dial up RS 232 RS 485 hardwire connections or TCP IP on LAN WAN networks The basic concept behind TOPAZ is a central monitoring system that can monitor or control movement within a building or throughout multiple facilities The system is modular and easily customized to fit almost any building s security and access control needs for up to 64 readers and 2 000 cardholders All data entry is performed at a file server or workstation using a computer mouse and keyboard through the Internet browser Interface The TOPAZ System continuously polls the remote panels checking communication protocols tamper switches alarm inputs and cardholder access events Events are displayed on workstation monitors and logged to the PC The system performs three major functions e Facilitates comm
407. the following folder To install into a different folder click the Browse button and select another folder fou can choose not to install Topaz by clicking Cancel to exit the Wise Installation Wizard Destination Folder C Program Files GE Security Topaz Browse Wise Installation Wizard Cancel This dialog window determines were the TOPAZ files will be stored on the system If you do not want to use the default directory you may follow this procedure 8 10 460932001 GE Security Workstation a Click on the Browse button Browse and the Browse for Folder window will display Browse for Folder x Find Directory eee ety Computer MGS 3 Floppy A Hs E Esa D EE Removable Disk E EJ Removable Disk F SS Apps on gel L 2 Common on lgs1 M 1 52 Home on Igs1 N gt sftwreng on iged 0 E E 2 6 Control Panel b Ifyou prefer to use a different directory such as Program Files select the desired location for the TOPAZ software such as c Program Files TOPAZ and click OK then Next gt ia Topaz Setup F E O x Type of Installation O Select the type of installation FT ce fe Topaz Server Yes want to add workstations e H al Topaz Workstation C Ho don t want to add workstations Wise Installation Wizand Back Next gt Cancel 5 This dialog window determines the type of installation you are doing Sinc
408. time will clear changes that have been entered After all the changes have been made to the Serial Port page you must click on the Save Save button in order for the changes to be saved You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again GE Security February 2 2005 8 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide LAN Communication Page The LAN Communication page allows you to configure the LAN Adapters and TCP IP address To navigate to the LAN Communication page from any Hardware page click the LAN Com tab button in the top navigation bar or from the main Hardware screen click the LAN Communications button on the right side of the screen The following page will display pez A ACU S Adapter LAN Name i Generations i LAN Names f x ja Generations TCP IP Address 101 01 01 245 Eo Add a New LAN Adapter 1 Start by clicking the Clear button to clear all fields 2 Enter a name up to 31 characters for the LAN Adapter Name 3 Enter the TCP IP Address for the LAN adapter NOTE If you are not sure what the TCP IP address is you should contact your LAN Controller Do not guess or enter a random number 4 After all the fields have been added to the LAN Communication page click on the Save Add button in order for the changes to be saved to the host
409. ting Facilities Center L R and Center T B Elements of the badge may need to be aligned Alignment can be done by a click of the mouse Select the object first and then select Center Left to Right or Center Top to Bottom a a LIP Down Company UPiDown Company A T Faaa Start with Center L F Center T B Pattern Fill Badge If you want to duplicate the text or image in the background to cover the whole area of the badge you can select one of three options Pattern Fill Badge I Replicate Brick Pattern l Double Space Replicate The pattern of text or image is copied in adjacent rectangles For example if we use the text Acme Products Inc in a small rectangle the background might look like this Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Brick Pattern If you also choose the Brick Pattern the background might look like this Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc ducts Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Pro Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc ducts Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Pro Double Space If you also choose Double Space the background might look like this Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc Acme Products Inc GE Security February 2 2005 9 19 Topaz Software User Guide Attributes The Attributes selection is the same as clicking the right mouse on an el
410. ting at the moment the alarm occurred If you want to see the moments leading up to the alarm click the Reverse button See The Video Option on page 2 1 for more information and an example of a Video Clip window NOTE There may be a delay of 30 40 seconds after an alarm event occurs before the clip becomes available by clicking the View Event button Click the button once and the clip will begin as soon as it is available GE Security February 2 2005 1 35 TOPAZ Software User Guide If you want to print a picture of the live feed click the Print button To resume watching the live feed click the P Start button Close Window View Event Live View To Return to the Live Video feed click the View Live button and the live video screen will return system Control Buttons These four buttons are located above the alarm queue below the main screen area REFRESH ALARM QUEUE When this button is clicked the alarm queue is refreshed or repainted to re display the image If active alarms disappear from the queue click this button to retrieve them LOG OFF When this button is clicked you will be logged off the system Before you can take any further action on the TOPAZ system you must first log back in with a valid Operator ID and Password REFRESH MAIN FRAME When this button is clicked the current main screen is refreshed or repainted to re display the image TOPAZ SHUTDOWN When this
411. to a directory on a substituted drive The system cannot join or substitute a drive to or for a directory on the same drive Not enough resources are available to process this command The path specified cannot be used at this time The volume label you entered exceeds the label character limit of the target file system Cannot create another thread The specified path is invalid A signal is already pending No more threads can be created in the system Unable to lock a region of a file The requested resource is in use The system detected a segment number that was not correct Cannot create a file when that file already exists The operating system cannot run 1 Cannot run 1 in Windows 2000 code 460932001 GE Security 193 196 197 206 212 214 234 255 259 266 267 332 334 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 GE Security TOPAZ System Error Codes Is not a valid application The operating system cannot run this application program The operating system is not presently configured to run this application File name or extension is too long DOS file names must be 8 characters or less The file extension must be 3 characters or less The segment is locked and cannot be reallocated Too many dynamic link modules are attached to this program or dynamic link module More data is available The extended attributes are inconsistent No more data
412. to the database 4 After clicking the Save button the message Operation Complete will appear GE Security February 2 2005 3 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide Delete Cardholder 1 Locate the cardholder to delete 2 Once the cardholder record is found and the database record is displayed click the Delete button 3 A message Are you sure that you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 The message Operation Complete should be displayed indicating that the cardholder has been deleted from the database 5 The cardholder s record is now deleted from the database and the cardholder s name has been removed from the Selected Cardholder list on the right side of the screen 3 6 460932001 GE Security Access Page Access Page The Access Privileges page contains the following e Activation Date e Deactivation Date Executive APB Override e PIN Code e Security Area Time Schedule e Available Security Areas e Available Access Groups While viewing any Cards page click the Access tab button at the top of the window The navigation button will turn lighter blue and the Access page will display as shown below E e 1 kum 3 LE EET Photo ID MEDIO _ Masking a DA Activation Date E February 2004 neid Deactivation pate Deactivation Date EE En Les Sy ae Search by EXT Executive APB Override QE Se ee Enter Cardholder ie Security Area Time Sched 2 PIN Code FT Aberdeen Schuyler J
413. to the system database The Last Name First Name Middle Name and First and Middle options allow you to specify that only these parts of the Cardholders name will be printed in the selected object field Using these selections in multiple Database fields allows you to put different parts of the Cardholder s name at different locations on the Badge The Flip Name command allows you to enter the Cardholder s name into the selected field in reverse order from that which it is entered into the Cardholder Database For example if the Cardholder s name is entered into the Database as Doe John using the Flip Name command will cause it to be printed on the card as John Doe Place the mouse pointer over the relevant button and click the left mouse button A black spot will appear in the center of the button to indicate the item has been selected Rotation The pop up menu allows you to select a rotation of 0 90 180 or 270 Color and Lines The color for the printed text on the badge is selected from the extensive color palette in the Color and Lines section of the Attributes screen The Lines portion of this section does not apply to Database or Text applications and will be dealt with under the sections relating to Line Triangle Rectangle Circle and Ellipse The palette shows a small selection of the total colors available To view more colors place the mouse pointer over one of the arrows at the left of the color palette click the l
414. u sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 The message Operation Complete will display GE Security February 2 2005 8 5 TOPAZ Software User Guide Workstation Page The Workstation page will allow you to control how workstation will respond during use For example whether the workstation will have photo badging capability alarm color graphics capability etc e Add a Workstation e Install a Workstation e Modify a Workstation e Delete a Workstation To navigate to the Workstation page click the Workstation tab button in the top navigation bar or from the main Hardware screen click the Workstation button on the right side of the screen The following page will display Internet TCP IP Address fi 01 01 01 265 ritchb devynb Photo Badging Vv Alarm Graphics Vv Route Alarms To Workstation ritchb Routing Time Schedule Third Shift 3 Alarm Ack Time Limit 30 sec Add a Workstation To add a workstation you should first install the TOPAZ software on the new workstation s computer When that workstation logs on with the software for the first time the server will create a new record for that workstation under the Workstation Name field and the Internet TCP IP Address described below The values for all the fields on the workstation screen will be the default values lf you add a new workstation from the server it will not become effective until the TOPAZ software
415. u which field has been left out For example if you left the Start at Card Number blank you will see the following message When you have completed using the Batch Add function click the Card button to access the other page buttons At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear 3 26 460932001 GE Security Batch Add Page button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Batch Add button will delete newly entered data GE Security February 2 2005 3 27 TOPAZ Software User Guide Batch Delete Page The Batch Delete page allows you to delete a range of cards in one easy step To navigate to the Batch Delete page from any page within the Cards pages click the Batch tab button at the top of the screen Then click the Batch Delete tab button The following page will display is Facility Code Name Start at Card Number l Stop at Card Number or 0200 i i ih o Batch Delete m Facility Code Name From the drop down list select the name of a facility code you want to use If the desired Facility Code Name is not available and you need to configure one click the A Link Arrow button to the left This will open the Facility Code configuration page Once you have completed the configuration close the page by clicking the Sae O Save button Start at Card Number Enter the first card number to be dele
416. uffer space available TCP IP Socket is already connected TCP IP Socket is not connected TCP IP Can t send after socket shutdown TCP IP Too many references can t splice TCP IP Connection timed out TCP IP Connection refused TCP IP Too many levels of symbolic links TCP IP File name t dibRege Intentionally Left Blank TCP IP Host is down TCP IP No route to host TCP IP Directory not empty 460932001 GE Security Appendix B Access Code Definitions TRACE BY ACCESS POINT e Trace has been turned on at an Access Point card reader and or keypad Every access attempt at the traced access point will generate this event TRACE BY CARDHOLDER e Trace has been turned on for a cardholder Every access attempt by that cardholder will generate this event TRACE BY SECURITY AREA e Trace has been turned on for a Security Area Every access attempt at the Security Area will generate this event ACCESS AUTHORIZED e Acardholder has presented a valid card and or PIN and access was authorized ACCESS AUTHORIZED ANTI PASSBACK VIOLATION e Acardholder has presented a valid card and or PIN and access was authorized but the cardholder was violating APB ACCESS AUTHORIZED LOCAL READER RE ENTRY TIMER VIOLATION e Acardholder has presented a valid card and or PIN and access was authorized but the cardholder tried to use the same reader before the Anti Passback Timer Delay for Re entry had passed ACCESS AUTHORIZED LOCAL SA RE ENTRY TI
417. ully installed Sentinel System Driver 5 41 0 32 bit Click Finish to exit the wizard Back E Cancel 16 Click Finish 17 You will now be returned to the desktop and the following message will display For proper installation of the files your system must be rebooted Click yes to reboot now 18 You must restart your PC for the TOPAZ software to be activated Click Yes to reboot your system This ends the installation steps for a workstation To start TOPAZ double click on the TOPAZ icon on your desktop Modify a Workstation After the software is installed on a workstation and you run the TOPAZ software which connects the workstation to the server you can make changes to any workstation including the one being used This means you can set the functionality for a workstation from that workstation as long as you have the proper user permission level You can select the information for any workstation by selecting its name from the right side of the screen under Workstation This will display on the screen the information for that workstation GE Security February 2 2005 8 17 TOPAZ Software User Guide Workstation Name The Workstation Name is used to identify a workstation and may have up to 32 characters You may have only one 1 workstation on the system and it must have a unique name to identify it from the server workstation NOTE It is not recommended that you modify the Workstation Name
418. umber is less than nine digits use Emergency EMERTELE Numeric Up to 12 characters Contact s e Data for this reference field is transmitted with Telephone contiguous numbers For example if the Number telephone number is 703 555 1212 data will be transmitted as 7035551212 E 2 460932001 GE Security Chapter Functional Protocol Field Field Name Name Type of Value Description Employee EMPNO Numeric This is the Employee Number which is entered on Number the Setup screen Issue Date ISSUEDAT Numeric YYMMDD This reference field is used to record the date of when a card is issued to a visitors YY represents the last two digits of the year For example 1995 would be entered as 95 MM is a two digit number representing the year 01 through 12 DD is a two digit number representing the day of the month 01 through 31 Use of this field is optional Issue Number ISSUENUM Numeric 1 digit The default is O e An Issue Number permits the same card to be re issued in the event that a card is lost or stolen The new card is issued with the same card number but the issue number increments by one The missing card will not work in the system since the issue numbers do not match Issue number is applicable to magnetic stripe cards which are encoded accordingly If UAS option may be 2 digits Keypad KEYPAD Numeric 1 to 6 digits Number e This is the number entered by an employee at a reader A keypad number must be
419. unication ports or hardware devices configured and you click on the TOPAZ desktop icon to start TOPAZ and then enter your log on id and password Auto Configuration will start automatically You must have the proper password since access to Auto Configuration is password protected NOTE You must start TOPAZ from the desktop icon Logging off and logging back on again will not start Auto Configuration Once you configure a port or device Auto Configuration will no longer automatically start How ever you can still run Auto Configuration manually by the next method e If you are running TOPAZ and have the appropriate password level you can click on the Hardware button on the left and then the Auto Configuration button on the menu on the right An Auto Configuration sequence may also be initiated from the Auto Configuration Home screen for any or all selected devices listed in both the Configured and Not Found boxes Starting Auto Configuration will display the following dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Would pou like to automatically configure hardware devices Cancel If you select Cancel you may continue with manual programming of the system If you select OK you will see the following message along with an hourglass in place of the mouse pointer 1 4 460932001 GE Security Auto Configuration InfoGraphics TOPAZ System Click OK to continue TOPAZ will start the Auto Configuration pro
420. unications between the server and remotely located control panels e Supervises and reports changes in the status of alarm and access devices that are connected to the control panels Changes are reported as alarms troubles or event occurrences Alarm devices are sensing devices such as motion detectors door contacts temperature gauges etc Access devices are card readers or keypads that control doorways and other access locations like elevators and parking lot gates e Performs remote control activities Remotely located devices are controlled through manual operator commands automatically according to events or time schedules stored in the computer GE Security February 2 2005 1 1 TOPAZ Software User Guide TOPAZ Quick Start When you startup TOPAZ the QuickStart will display as shown below TOFA ONEENS Ark Use the below next page for help in See Up your system es the Introduction te the 110125 system to learn more about TORA Clicking on any QuickStart link will open the corresponding TOBA sereen in the background Clicking on that TORA screen will send QuickStart to the background You may return QuickStart to the foreground by pressing its button on the taskbar This page will remain n until you log outar close it using the toolbar TE or link below Click here to close this Window Next page gt gt QuickStart consist of seven 7 pages of information on the TOPAZ System and
421. urn on a video camera You can set this under Hardware Reader Options Event Any activity that is detectable reportable and recorded on the TOPAZ system G 2 Revision A GE Security Glossary of Terms Event Class A classification of activities for the purposes of executing Automatic Actions at the Server level Alarm and Access Events are each divided into four predefined classes e Class 1 Events New Alarm e Class 2 Events Canceled Alarm e Class 3 Events New Trouble e Class 4 Events Canceled Trouble Each event can be configured to one of four numbered Event Classes 1 4 These Classes do not have a predefined meaning Meaning is assigned to the Event Classes based on usage Event classes default to a nonexistent zero 0 class unless defined Fail Safe Lock A door strike device that needs power to lock the door See Door strike Fail Secure Lock A door strike device that needs power to unlock the door See Door strike Facility Code The Facility Code is the number assigned to each of your company s facility site locations This allows you to limit allow access to company locations independently Frame A separate window of the main browser window that holds information that does not change unless directly selected Global Pertaining to activities that can propagate across SCP boundaries and affect the entire site Global operations are managed only when field panels are in communicatio
422. ut all the newly entered information click the Clear button Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data Save Add Once all the information has been added click the Save Add button Caution Do not click the Save Add button as this will overwrite the original record rather than create a new record GE Security February 2 2005 8 37 TOPAZ Software User Guide One of the following messages should appear e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Public Access Name has been repeated Use a new name and try saving again e f Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try saving again Delete 1 To delete a Public Access Area select the area to be deleted 2 Click the Delete button The message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display 3 Click OK The message Operation Complete will display 8 38 460932001 GE Security Reader Setup Readers Reader Setup Page The Reader Setup page allows you to add modify or delete readers including configuring the reader address name description unlock time security area etc There are two reader setup pages e Reader Setup Page e Reader Options Page To navigate to the Reader Setup page from any Hardware page click the Reader tab button in the navigation bar at t
423. utput a wide range of information on any cardholder in the system You can select a variety of options to customize the report To navigate to the Cardholder Database Reports page from any page within the Reports pages click on the Cardholders tab button at the top of the window or from the main Reports page click on the Cardholder Database button on the right side of the screen The following page will display No y Display Report fe None y Output To File CardholderName E Output File Name Print Report e ES 7 Run Report HU Cancel Report PIN Yes No Select Yes if the report is to suppress the cardholder s PIN number default is Yes If Yes is selected the PIN will not be shown on the report Include Access Auth Yes No Select Yes if the report is to include access authorization default is No If Yes is selected then the security Areas the cardholder is authorized for will be shown on the report Include User Def Fields Yes No Select No if the Custom Fields will not be included in the report default is No If the additional custom fields should be in the report change this to Yes Suppress List by Security Area Select the Security Area from the list that you wish the cardholders to be recalled for Only cardholders who are authorized for the selected area will be included in the report sort Records By Select how the report is to sort the data The options are listed below Only on
424. uttons to navigate through the system The main navigation buttons on the left of the Operator Screen and the Alarm Queue window at the bottom of the screen are available at all times while any page of the TOPAZ software displays The Device Tree button will display the device tree at any time See Device Tree on page 8 60 i This Page Intentionally Left Blank The Quick Start will call up the quick start page to give you a short overview of the system See TOPAZ Quick Start on page 1 2 Alarm Queue Window The Alarm Queue window at the bottom of the main Operator Screen is shown below 3 MEG OFFICE FO MFG OFFICE Forced Open ALARM J ACCOUNTING FO ACCOUNTING Forced Open ALARM ACCOUNTING HORT CIRCU ACCOUNTING D oe 3 as cked 106 36 4 0 00 HEF T i M lll The Alarm Queue window will display alarms as they occur in RED The color of the text for the alarm shows its status The list below defines the meaning of the colors Color Status Red Device in alarm Green Secure Orange An access event for example access denied Purple Trouble condition short circuit circuit fault etc 1 30 460932001 GE Security Alarm Queue Window If there are currently more events in the queue than can be shown in the window at one time a scrollbar will appear at the right side of the window The scrollbar will allow you to scroll through all the alarm events in the queue
425. ver the word Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen and clicking the left mouse button The options menu will appear showing the following available selections item Test Help e Grid Grid Snap anap Landscape Landscape Portrait Y Fortra e Test Display Test Disney Test Print Test rin e Encode Mag Stripe Encode Magstipe e Invert Badge on Print Invert Badge on Print Uverlaminate badge e Overlaminate badge Reverse template e Reverse template Import Bitmap Import Bitmap e Print selection Printer selection e Parameters Parameters Grid By selecting the Grid option you will be provided with a grid of dotted lines across the face of the badge to assist in locating various items of the badge design Selecting Grid a second time from the Options menu will erase the grid from the display snap The Snap facility assists you in lining up objects to the grid lines When Snap is selected the system will automatically align the Handles on a Picked object with the nearest Grid line 9 22 460932001 GE Security Options Menu Landscape and Portrait To select a Portrait badge or a Landscape badge move the mouse pointer to the Options selection on the menu bar at the top of the window and click the left mouse button Choose the selection of Portrait or Landscape which is suitable for the badge design you wish to implement This will alter the dotted line template on the screen for badge orien
426. ware User Guide 3 Make any necessary changes to the selected field panel s configuration 4 Click the Save Add button 5 The message Operation Complete should be the message displayed and no further changes are needed NOTE The name of the field panel cannot be modified You must delete the panel and add it using the new name Delete Field Panel Caution DO NOT delete a field panel until all associated readers alarm points and relays have been deleted from the panel first 1 To delete a Field Panel from the System you must first select the panel to be deleted Do this by clicking on the name of the Field Panel in the list of Configured Panels to be deleted NOTE In order to delete a Field Panel you must first delete all readers alarm points and relays on that panel Then you can delete the panel 2 Wait for the panel s configuration information to be displayed in the main window and the panel s description to be displayed in the Description window below the Configured Panels window and then click the Delete button A message Are you sure you want to delete this record will display Click OK to continue 4 Ifa message Device cannot be deleted with Readers Defined appears then shutdown the field panel and deleted it from the Not Found box in Hardware Auto Configuration 5 One of the following messages should display e If Operation Complete is displayed then no further changes are needed e f Operat
427. was selected during the reader s set up Map Window Sizing Buttons These buttons control the size of the map and tree windows Increase Map Window Each time the button is clicked the map window Increases in size to a preset maximum As the map window increases the map tree window decreases In size Decrease Map Window Each time the button Is clicked the map window decreases In size to a preset minimum As the map window decreases the map tree window Increases In Size GE Security February 2 2005 10 15 Topaz Software User Guide Map Tree and Devices Window Maps Devices Q Campus Maps Tab The Maps Tab displays a hierarchical view of all maps with their assigned names Each map s placement in the tree is determined by when it was added to the system You can click the buttons to expand the tree and the buttons to collapse the tree a Campus Q Campus Overview Map An imported map that has additional detail maps added under tt Q Detail Map A detail map is a portion of the overview map above tt in the hierarchy You can select a map from the tree by clicking on the map name which will display it in the map window Device Tab Clicking on the Device tab will display the list of field devices ACUs etc that are currently configured in the system as shown below 10 16 460932001 GE Security Operating TOPAZ Color Graphics Double clicking on the Mn cevice icon or device name will expand the
428. will change in the Status window to reflect the current command sent GE Security February 2 2005 4 3 TOPAZ Software User Guide Alarm Point Control Page The Alarm Point Control page allows you to mask unmask or check the status of the Alarm Input Points and Security Areas e Check Status e Control Mask Unmask To navigate to the Alarm Point Control page from any page within the Control pages click the Alarm Point tab button at the top of the screen or from the main control page click on the Alarm Point button on the right side of the screen The following page will display j 3 Status Monday February 16 2004 10 30 05 AM Microsoft Internet Explorer Panel Category Status ACU 1 LOW BATT Gashte Main System Input Offline ACU 1 POWER Gaslite Main System Input Offline ACU 1 TAMPER Gashte Main System Tamper Offline 1 BACK DOOR DC Gaslite Main Door Contact Offline Security Areas Alarm Input Point i SYSTEM BACK DOOR FO LOBBY DOOR HO mask f Unmask Mask Unmask Status The top portion of the window under Status lists all pre configured alarm points To check the status of any Alarm Point or Security Area scroll through the list until the name of the Alarm Point or Security Area is located The color of the name in the list will determine its current status The list below defines the meaning of the colors 4 4 460932001 GE Security Alarm Point Control Page Status Color Masked B
429. x in this manual Modems The Part 68 rules require the following or the equivalent information be provided to the end user of equipment containing a pre approved modem module Type of Service The TOPAZ System operates on an GE Security s ACU field panel and is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines It connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ 11C or USOC FJ45S Connection to the telephone company provided COIN service central office implemented systems is prohibited Connection to party line services is subject to state tariffs Telephone Company Procedures The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can In order to do this it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment operations or procedures If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment the telephone company will give notice in writing to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service In certain circumstances it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning what equipment you have connected to your telephone line Upon request from the telephone company provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number REN both of these items are listed on the equipment label The sum of all the RENs on your telephone line should be less than five in order to
430. xists sh 3 Overarite You can continue to use the icon in your new category as well as the existing icon group by clicking Yes Other wise click No and the icon will not be added to the new icon group You can then select a different bitmap After selecting all four icons click OK to save your changes 10 42 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics If you click Cancel on the Icon Group window the icons will revert back to the icons assigned to the icon group category when you first opened the Icon assignment window The icon group category can also be renamed from the Icon Group window Adding New Alarm Icon Group If you need to add an additional alarm category icon group click on the Icon Cfg tab and then click the Alarm Icons icon In the top left corner of the color graphics window click on the Add Icon Group button Map Cfg Device Cfg Icon Ctg y J el Alam Icons d j T B Reader Icons Se Relay Icons A blank Icon Group window will be displayed Alarm Icons Mame nh On Secure Masked Trouble Cancel Enter a name for the new alarm icon group and select the icon for the designations GE Security February 2 2005 10 43 Topaz Software User Guide To select the icon for the designation click on one of the blank icon squares for the designation you want to add and the following Look in window will display Pa pe waa el Se et ICA Alarm Icons pe
431. y is to be automatically Activated during a Time Schedule then select from the drop down list a pre configured Time Schedules for the relay action to Begin and End NOTE If you wish to configure a Relay Action Schedule click on the 6 Link Arrow button to the left and the Time Schedule configuration page will drop down Configure the panel and click the Save button and you will return to the Relay Setup page 12 Begin Action Select if the relay is to Activate or Deactivate at the beginning of the time schedule 13 End Action Select if the relay is to Activate or Deactivate at the end of the time schedule 14 Enter up to 127 characters for the Description for the relay 15 After all changes have been made to the Relay page you must click on the Save Add button for the changes to be saved to the Server database You will receive one of the following messages e f Operation Complete is displayed no further changes are needed e If Duplicate Record is displayed then the Relay Name has been repeated Enter a new name and try again e If Operation Failed is displayed then a required field was not entered Enter the field and try again At any point if you wish to clear out all the entered information click the Clear button at the bottom right side of the window Caution Clicking the Clear button before clicking on the Save button will delete newly entered data GE Security February 2 2005 8 55 TOPAZ Software User Guid
432. y sys tem hardware navigation and editing TOPAZ incorporates a separate device tree page At any time you can click on the Device Tree Device Tree button in the main tool bar to navigate to the stand alone device tree Device Tree The Device Tree is a dynamic Tree representation of the entire system s hardware from the server s communication ports to all of the field hardware including workstation field panels ACURT2 RT4 System Requirements To use the TOPAZ software your PC must meet the following minimum requirements e Pentium 4 processor or equivalent e Processor speed 1 8 GHz or Higher e Windows XP with Service Pack 1 or 2000 Professional with Service Pack 4 e Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or above installed the wizard must be completed which must be installed from the TOPAZ CD e 768 MB Random Access Memory RAM on the server 512 MB on the workstation e SVGA display card with 1024 X 768 screen resolution able to support 65K colors If using Windows XP or 2000 Professional set at High Color 16bit e Video Memory 4 MB e Disk Drive Space Required 2 GB 100 MB for workstation e CDROM Drive 20X e Floppy Disk Required for setting up workstation e If using Photo Badging a USB Camera can be used or the GE Security Video capture card Composite Video Camera required For a list of compatible USB cameras refer to the software CD e Serial RS 232 Ports are required if using direct communicat
433. y the full name Select the number for the camera that corresponds to its number as configured in the video switcher Select the Camera Orientation which is the direction the camera icon should point in the map by clicking the up and down arrows to rotate the camera 45 degrees each time Select the Camera Features that the camera is set up for The camera and video switcher s capability determine these features The features that are available are e Pan e Tilt e Zoom e Focus e Iris e Preset position 10 36 460932001 GE Security Configuring Color Graphics If all features were selected the camera window would display like the example below Lobby Camera 3 Close Window Live video from camera in this window When you have completed configuration of the camera click the OK button To relocate the icon click and hold the left mouse button and drag the icon to a new location on the map To delete or remove a camera icon from the map click and drag the icon back to the tree window The icon will disappear from the map and the t red check mark on the icon in the tree will be removed Save your configuration changes by clicking the 5 Save Configuration button in the center of the toolbar at the top of your screen Add Map Links Map Link A Map Link allows you to place a map link icon on the map and set to for a selected map When the Map Link button is clicked during system operation it will jump to
434. y the operator time and date the commentary was entered e System Error Recalls system errors that occurred time and date of occurrence Output Report There are three ways to output the report e Display Report default Will display on the Workstation monitor e Print Report Will be sent to the report printer e Output To File Will save the report into the file name specified in the Output File Name field This saves the report results in a file for later use outside of TOPAZ Select one of the above output options by clicking on the white dot to the right of the selection This will place a black dot inside the white one activating the selection Output File Name If you selected Output to File enter the name of the file to contain the report information The Output File Name can have up to 64 characters For example you can type in Myreport and the report will be saved into the file named Myreport in the directory where TOPAZ was installed You may enter a path with the file name for example c reports Myreport The format of the report files is always plain text and can be opened in Notepad Run Report To send the report to the destination you specified above display printer or file click the Run Report button in the bottom right corner of the browser window A message Report Completed will display with the number of records printed Click OK to continue Cancel Report To stop the report or when you have fi
435. you are attempting to unmask the area the request will be denied All alarms associated with the security area must be secure before an unmask request will be granted GE Security February 2 2005 3 19 TOPAZ Software User Guide Information Page The Information page contains additional detailed information on the cardholder The information in these fields is optional To navigate to the Information page from any page within the Cards pages click the Information tab button at the top of the screen The following page will display i l Batch q i l S Card Setup Y Access Photo ID Masking q Hire Date February Social Security 555 12 3456 Search by Enter Cardholder Department alia Et a fare Aberdeen Schuyler J AA fe Select Cardholder Aberdeen Schuyler J Supervisor George Schultz Oo Barker Eileen S Barron Devyn R Emergency Contact John Aberdeen George Jeremy Emergency Phone ssa Contact Relationship Father O Vehicle License 1CDL234 State ca Record Last Changed The maximum number of characters for each field is shown below Field Name Max Characters Hire Date 18 Social Security 11 Department Phone Extension Supervisor 32 Emergency Contact 32 Emergency Phone 12 Contact Relationship 16 Vehicle License 10 State 2 For the Hire Date field a full calendar can be displayed by clicking on the 4 Calendar

Topaz User Manual - Home Controls, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents